NIT - 2.1.technical Specification

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
1. Civil Works : Page 2-97

2. Electrical Works : Page 98-161
3. Furniture Works : Page 162
4. PEB Works : Page 163-166
Construction of Labour Accommodation Technical Specification
CIVIL WORKS
1. General notes to the specification:

This specification deals with the requirement of all materials, workmanship, installation and testing of entire
foundation & super-structure of Proposed Labour Accommodation of 1000 capacity under DMF Scheme
with civil, electrical, plumbing and sanitary; doors, application of putty and painting, water supply and
underground sewerage disposal arrangement including connection to municipal system, roof treatment,
roads and car parking etc
The detailed specifications given below are for the works described in the schedule of quantities and shall be
guide for proper execution of work to the required standards. It may also be noted that the specifications are
of generalized nature and these shall be read in conjunction with the description of item in schedule of
quantities and drawings. The work also includes all minor details of construction which are obviously and
fairly intended and which may not have been referred to in these documents but are essential for the entire
completion in accordance with good engineering practice.
(i) Unless otherwise mentioned, all the applicable codes and standards published by the Bureau of
Indian Standards and all other standards which may be published by them before the date of receipt
of tenders, shall govern in all respects of design, workmanship, quality and properties of materials
and methods of testing, method of measurements etc. Wherever any reference to any Indian
Standard specifications occurs in the documents relating to this contract, the same shall be inclusive
of all amendments issued thereto or revisions thereof, up to the date of receipt of tenders.
(ii) In case there is no I.S. specification for the particular work, ASTM or EU standard for such work may
be followed. Also, work shall be carried out in accordance with the general guidelines of
manufacturer/ specialised agency subject to full satisfaction and approval of the Engineer-in-charge
and the Architect.
(iii) The work shall be carried out in a manner complying with the requirements of relevant bye-laws of
the Municipal Committee/ Municipal Corporation/ Development Authority/ Improvement Trust
under the jurisdiction of which the work is to be executed or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge/
Engineer/ PMC/ Architect and, unless otherwise mentioned, nothing extra shall be paid on this
account.
(iv) Samples of various materials, fittings etc. proposed to be incorporated in the work shall be submitted
by the Contractor for approval of the Engineer-in-charge/ Architect before order for bulk supply is
placed.
(v) The Contractor shall take instructions from the Engineer-in-charge/ Engineer/ PMC/ Architect
regarding collection and stacking of materials in any place. No excavated earth or building materials
shall be stacked on areas where other buildings, roads, services, compound walls etc. are to be
constructed.
Page 2 of 97
(vi) The Contractor shall maintain in perfect condition all works executed till the completion of the entire
work awarded to him/ her/ them. Where phased delivery is contemplated, this provision shall apply
to each phase.
(vii) The Contractor shall undertake a performance test of the entire installation(s) as per standard
specifications before the work is finally accepted and nothing extra whatsoever shall be payable to
the Contractor for the test.
(viii) The Contractor shall clear the site thoroughly of all scaffolding materials and rubbish etc. left out of
his work and dress the site around the building to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge/
Architect before the work is considered as complete.
(ix) Post construction inspection and testing: After completion of the work and during maintenance
period pending liability of the Contractor, the work shall also be subjected to ‘post construction
inspection and testing’. In case the materials or articles incorporated in the work are found to be
inferior, though the sample collected for the same might have been passed at the time of execution,
it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to replace the same at his own cost, failing which the
Engineer-in-charge may rectify the same at the risk and cost of the Contractor or may accept the
work as sub-standard, and cost be adjusted from the outstanding security deposit, as per the terms
and conditions of the contract.
(x) The Engineer-in-charge/ Architect, shall be the deciding authority as to the meaning, interpretations
and implications for various provisions of the specifications and their decision in writing shall be final
and binding on all concerned.
(xi) In case any difference or discrepancy between the specifications and the description in the schedule
of quantities, the schedule of quantities shall take precedence. In case of any difference or
discrepancy between specifications and drawing, the specifications shall take precedence.
(xii) Since the building has been designed as an earthquake resistance structure; cutting, fabrication and
placement of reinforcement for RCC members shall be as provided in IS: 13920 - 1993. Necessary
wastage during the job as per IS: 13920 - 1993 may be taken into account accordingly.
(a) Notes for Tenderer:
(i) Tenderers are advised to visit the site of work to see the site condition available, accessibility to
the site for further work etc. and quote the rates accordingly.
(ii) OPC/ PPC cement and joining mortar of recommended brand shall only be used for all
construction and masonry works. This is applicable for RMC also.
(iii) Quoted rates shall hold good for plain/ curved of any geometric shapes and sizes of structural/
RCC members and other construction activities at all heights, locations, leads, levels etc. Nothing
extra shall be entertained towards wastages of materials, additional labours/ tools and plants
etc. to achieve the required shapes and sizes.
(iv) The Contractor shall provide adequate safety precautions throughout the construction period to
ensure safety against any accident.
Page 3 of 97
(v) Site area is the only area available for the Society. No extra area will be provided.
(vi) Contractor shall arrange for storing construction materials, site office etc. and optimum care
shall be taken by the Contractor to avoid disturbing the traffic and road around. No extra cost
should be entertained for additional lead, if any.
(vii) The schedule of quantities includes contingent works for other services. The Contractor shall
carry out all related works such as making cut-outs, niches, pipe sleeves, pockets for foundation
bolts etc. in RCC/ AAC block/ mud brick works as required by the Architect/ Engineer without
any extra cost to the Engineer-in-charge.
(viii) Vehicular movement shall abide by the regulation imposed by concerned authorities. The
Contractor shall also abide by the security rules and regulations of the Society inside site area.
The approach road to building should be kept clean and free from obstruction for smooth
functioning.
(ix) While transporting materials from/ to site, and disposal, the spilled over materials/ earth/ debris
on the road should be got cleaned by the Contractors immediately.
(x) Royalty for excavation, transportation, filling of earthwork etc. including obtaining permission
from statutory authority, if any, shall be borne by the Contractor and to be included in the
quoted price. All the receipts of such payments should be submitted to the Engineer-in-charge
before settlement of the final bill.
(xi) The drawings issued for tender purpose are preliminary and indicative only. The working
drawing shall be issued in phased manner at the time of execution. Nothing extra shall be
entertained towards revision in working drawings.
(b) Specific requirements from Contractor:

(i) Immediately after work order is accepted, the Contractor shall enclose the premises with
regular fence of PPGI sheet supported on structural frame work particularly on northern and
eastern boundaries and provide a gate for entry for personnel working for him and members of
Society visiting Site office.
(ii) The Contractor shall make available at site-office latest version of Indian standard codes of
practice followed for this work.
(iii) Technical Specifications and standards stated in this document and drawings should be strictly
adhered to. In case anything is not spelt out explicitly, relevant N.B.C, WB P.W.D, C.P.W.D, IS
codes and specifications shall be followed. No deviation is allowed without prior written
permission from Architect/ Engineer-in-charge. In case any material or item of work not found
here, WB PWD or CPWD specification shall be followed. In all cases prior approval from
Architect/ Engineer-in-charge is mandatory before procurement and execution.
(iv) Contractor to provide:
Page 4 of 97
The Contractor shall provide and maintain at site throughout the period of execution of works
the following at his own cost and without extra charge; the cost remains subsumed in the
contract rates:
• All labour, materials, tools, tackles, plant, equipment and temporary works required to
complete and maintain the works to the entire satisfaction of the Architect/ Engineer/
PMC/ Engineer-in-charge.
• All equipment, instruments and labour required by the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC for
measurement of the works.
• Any of equipment not specifically mentioned above which can reasonably be held
necessary for the completion and maintenance of the works to the satisfaction of the
Architect/ Engineer/ PMC/ Engineer-in-charge.
• Helmet for visitor, Architect/ PMC/ Engineer/ Engineer-in-charge.
• All safety gears i.e. PPE’s for the labour and supervisory staff. All labourer shall wear
standard apron ‘VICI WEAR’ for easy visibility even during working at night.
• Area lighting and lighting for night work shall be provided. Whenever and wherever
required, as advised by the Architect/ Engineer/ Engineer-in-charge, lighting shall be
provided.
• Temporary enclosure, guards, lights and protective arrangement necessary for protection
of workmen, supervisors, engineers or any other persons permitted access to the site shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor. Safety nets shall be provided as per requirement.
• The Contractor shall prepare ‘as-built drawings’ of the works completed.
(v) Dimensions:
• Figured dimensions on drawings shall supersede measurements by scale and drawings to a
large scale shall take precedence over those to a smaller scale. Special dimensions or
directions in the specifications shall supersede all others. All dimensions shall be checked
on site prior to execution.
• The dimensions where stated do not allow for waste, laps, joints, etc. but the Contractor
shall provide at his own cost sufficient labour and materials to cover such waste, laps,
joints, etc.
• The levels, measurements and other information concerning the existing site as shown on
the drawings are taken as correct, but the Contractor should verify them and also examine
the nature of the ground as no claim or allowance whatsoever will be entertained on
account of any errors or omissions in the levels or the description of the ground levels or
strata.
(vi) Setting out of works:

• The Contractor shall set out the centre line of the building or other work and get the same
approved by Architect/ Engineer-in-charge. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor
to install substantial reference marks, bench marks, etc. and maintain them as long as
required by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge. The Contractor shall assume full
responsibility for proper setting out, alignment elevation and dimension of each and all
parts of the work. The centre, longitudinal or face line and cross line shall be marked by
means of small masonry pole provided with a distinct mark at the centre to enable
theodolite to be set over it. The Contractor shall carefully protect and preserve all bench
marks and other marks used in setting out the works.
Page 5 of 97
• Total station, theodolite, levels, prismatic compass, tapes and all other instruments
necessary shall be provided by the Contractor for use at site in connection with this work.
The Contractor shall deploy automated system for checking verticality of the structure
apart from conventional method.
(vii) Quality of materials supplied:

All materials used in the works shall be of the best quality of their respective kinds as specified
herein, obtained from sources and suppliers approved by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge and
shall comply strictly with the tests prescribed in the specification, or where tests are not laid
down in the specifications, with the requirements of the latest issues of the relevant Indian
Standards.
(viii) Sampling and testing:

All materials used in the works shall be subjected to inspection and test in addition to test
certificates. Samples of all materials proposed to be employed in the permanent works shall be
submitted to the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge for approval before the materials are brought to
the site. Samples provided to the Architect/Engineer/ PMC/ Engineer-in-charge for their
retention are to be labeled in boxes suitable for storage. Materials or workmanship not
corresponding in character and quality with approved samples will be rejected. Samples
required for approval and testing must be supplied sufficiently in advance to allow for testing
and approval, due allowance being made for the fact that if the first samples are rejected
further samples may be required. Delay to the works arising from the late submission of
samples will not be acceptable as a reason for delay in completion of the works.
Materials shall be tested before leaving the manufacturer’s premises, quarry or resource,
wherever possible. Materials shall also be tested on site at NABL accredited laboratory and they
may be rejected if not found suitable or in accordance with the specification, notwithstanding
the results of the tests at the manufacturer’s works or elsewhere or test certificates or any
approval given earlier. The Contractor will bear all expenses for sampling and testing, at the
manufacturer’s premises at source, at site or at any testing laboratory or institution as directed
by the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC/ Engineer-in-charge. No extra payment shall be made on this
account.
(ix) Test certificates:

All manufacturer’s certificates of test, proof sheets, etc. showing that the materials have been
tested in accordance with the requirement of this specification and of the appropriate Indian
Standard are to be supplied free of charge on request to the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC/
Engineer-in-charge.
(x) Acceptance:
Acceptance of quality of any material shall lie with the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge only.
(xi) Rejection:
Any materials not been found to conform to the specifications will be rejected forthwith and
shall be removed from the site by the Contractor at his own cost.
(xii) Disposal of earth:

Excess earth may be disposed on approval of the Architect/ Engineer/ Engineer-in-charge.
Page 6 of 97
(xiii) Purchase of materials:

The Architect/ Engineer/ PMC/ Engineer-in-charge shall have power to cause the Contractors to
purchase/ use materials from any particular source as in the opinion of Architect/ Engineer-in-
charge is necessary for the proper execution of the work.
(xiv) Workmanship:
All works shall be true to level, plumb and square. The corners, edges and rises in all cases shall
be unbroken and neat. Any work not to the satisfaction of the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC/
Engineer-in-charge will be rejected and shall be rectified, or removed and replaced with work of
the required standard of workmanship at no extra cost.
(xv) Unforeseen work:

The specifications and drawings given along with for execution of construction/ erection work
are obligatory on the Contractor for the construction work. If in the course of construction work
some additional problems arise, which are not covered by the given specifications, the
Contractor will be given proper instruction by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge thereupon. Such
instructions/ guidance will be binding and will be observed in full by the Contractor/ s regarding
specifications, drawings, method of conducting work and measures necessary for meeting the
construction time tables, as well as instruction on problems occurring in carrying out the work.
(xvi) Interruption of work:

Architect/ Engineer-in-charge/ Engineer/ PMC reserves the right to interrupt or otherwise after
the sequence of any one or more portions of work or item of execution of work; if such
interruption or alterations is necessitated on account of change of design or any special
requirement at site or change in the sequence or work thought best by the Architect/ Engineer-
in-charge in the interest of the work without any cost to the owner Society.
(c) General description of civil works and finishing:
Sl No Item Details
1 Building structure RCC structure with M 25 and M 30 grade concrete.
2 Boundary wall with gate Wall; RCC frame with brick infill panels and gate of MS or
WI grills. and Barbed fencing
3 Lintel/ sill band concrete M 20 grade.
4 Under ground water reservoir RCC structure with IPS flooring and wall.
5 Over head tank RCC structure with IPS flooring and wall.
6 Brick work Fly Ash brick
AAC blocks (200 x 200 x 600 mm) with continuous RCC
band beams at sill and lintel levels.
Class I earthen bricks (4” x 4” x 8”) or (5” x 3” x 10”) for
toilets etc.
7 Materials for brick work See clause no. 8 of specification.
8 Plaster Ceiling: 6 mm thick.
Internal wall: 12 mm thick.
External wall: Sand faced cement plaster 16 mm thick with
waterproofing compound.
9 External wall finish External waterproof putty, primer, weather coat paint;
other finishing works.
Page 7 of 97
Sl No Item Details
10 Internal wall finish Distemper paint Finishing walls with water proofing cement
paint over cement based white putty.
Wall Panel Galvanized Iron profile sheet Rigid PUF (Rigid Polyurethane
Foam) of minimum thickness 50 mm
Roof Panel Galvanized Iron profile sheet Rigid Trapezoidal PUF
11 Flooring and dado work 2.5cm. A.S.flooring with cement concrete (1:2:4) including
punning using 12mm size Crusher broken granite chips.
12 Water proofing Box type water-proofing for underground tank.
• Injection and surface method for underground and
overhead tank.
• Brick bat and brick bat coba with cement concrete
for roof.
• Water proofing concrete over broken AAC blocks
for depressed areas in bath, toilet, kitchen, balcony.
13 Door 32 mm thick ISI marked factory made solid core block

board flush door confirming to IS:2202, Part-1.
14 Window Aluminium Window
15 Water supply pipes Heavy grade GI pipe for main supply to overhead tank.
Medium grade GI pipe for external pipeline.
CPVC pipes for internal pipeline.
16 Soil and waste pipes uPVC/ SWR
17 Sanitary fittings Hindware, Kohler, CERA, Jaquar.
18 CP fittings Hindware, Kohler, CERA, Jaquar.
19 Manhole cover for water tanks Double-sealed heavy quality CI cover. IS: 1726 – 2017.
20 Manhole cover for storm water and RCPC cover. IS: 12592 – 2018.
sewer
(d) Recommended/ preferred manufacturer for building materials and

works:
(i) The Contractor shall procure materials from the following list, subject to prior approval of
Engineer-in-charge. Periodic tests shall be carried out as per schedule of work/ specifications
and drawings at Contractor’s own cost.
(ii) The Engineer-in-charge reserves the right to accept/ reject any new brand(s) proposed by the
tenderer. Selection of particular make or its equivalent shall be finalised by the Architect/
Engineer-in-charge and it is binding on the Contractor.
(iii) Samples of all materials, fittings etc. to be incorporated in the work shall be submitted by the
Contractor and got it approved from the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge, before supply in bulk at
site of work. The approved samples will be kept in custody of the Engineer-in-charge till
completion of the work. Materials not conforming strictly to the approved samples will be
rejected.
Page 8 of 97
(iv) Makes and brands recommended here are for specific work as mentioned. All materials should
be conforming to the relevant IS Code. Makes and brands other than mentioned here may be
used with prior permission and approval from the Engineer-in-charge/ Architect.
(v) Recommended make list:
Sl
Description Recommended manufacturers
No
1 Cement (OPC/ PPC) Ultratech, ACC, OCL, Ambuja.
2 Stone for cement mortar ‘Pakur’ variety.
4 Reinforcement steel (Fe 500 D) TATA, SAIL, RINL, JINDAL Steel, SHYAM Steel.
5 Construction chemicals Fosroc, Sika, BASF, Mapei.
6 Fan hook, curb angle lugs etc MS or Fe 500 D.
7 Anchor fasteners Hilti India, Fisher India.
8 Structural steel section TATA, SAIL, RINL or locally approved structural steel
section manufacturers, (In case of non availability of
structural section with primary manufacturers)
9 Shuttering material Film faced ply wood or steel shuttering.
10 Precast concrete products Siporex Industries, B.G. Shirke and Co, Supreme Concrete
(Minato Blocks) Kolhapur, KK Nasik.
11 (a) Anti-termite treatment chemical a) Central Insecticide board approved (ISI marked)
chemical.
(b) Agency b) Specialized agency shall be a member of IPCA (Indian
pest control association)
12 Plasticizer admixture with waterproofing Fosroc, Pidilite, Mc- Bauchmie, Sika.
properties
13 Water proofing compounds, plasticizer, Sika, Mapei, Ardex, Endura.
grouts, other construction chemicals,
14 a) Aluminium extruded sections for Jindal; Hindalco; Alum extrusion.
doors, windows and wall spans
b) Aluminium hardware Metco, Allen, Crown, Ebco, Alans, Al-alfa.
15 a) Plain glass Saint Gobain, AIS.
16 Mild steel items As approved by Architect/ Engineer-in-charge.
17 M.S flat/ clamp (hot dip galvanized) As approved by Architect/ Engineer-in-charge.
18 Flush door shutter Greenply, Century.
19 a) Doors fittings and fixtures (MS, AI, SS, Shalimar, Saifee, Garg, Alans, Kolkata, Al-alfa, Godrej
brass)
b) Decorative high SS finish fittings and Guardian, Hafele, Hettich, Dorma. Godrej
fixtures
c) Mortise locks, night latch Godrej, Guardian,Yale
d) Door closer Everite, Hardwyn, Godrej, Hyper, Garnish, Dorma.
e) Floor spring Everite, Hardwyn, Godrej, Hyper, Garnish, Dorma,
Hafele.
f) Glass patch fittings Dorma, Ozone.
20 Wall care putty Birla white, Walplast, J K white.
21 a) Interior paint and exterior weather Asian Paints, ICI dulux paints, Berger paints.
proof elastomeric paints
22 G.I. pipe Tata (galvanized MS class C) only.
23 SWR pipe Hind, Sonali, Sanjay (Orissa).
Ductile iron pipe Electrosteel, Tata (brand name Ductura)
24 Antisyphonage pipe Eastern polycrete industries.
25 uPVC pipe (type A and B) Supreme, Astral.
26 uPVC U-drain pipe (for sewerage and Supreme, Astral.
Page 9 of 97
Sl
Description Recommended manufacturers
No
drainage as per B.S: 4514/ 5255)
27 uPVC eco drain pipe Supreme, Astral.
28 RCC hume pipe The Indian hume pipe, Pranali, West Bengal concrete
industries, Kolkata, Sur industries, Kolkata.
29 SS ball valve Laxmi, Leader
30 GM non-return valve Laxmi, Leader
31 Cast iron manhole cover for water tanks As approved by Architect/ Engineer-in-charge.
32 RCPC manhole cover for storm water and As approved by Architect/ Engineer-in-charge.
sewer
33 Sanitary ware Hindware, Kohler, Jaquar, Roca.
34 C.P fittings Hindware, Kohler, Jaquar, Roca.
2. Earth work:
(a) General:
(i) It includes excavations for foundation (if any) in wet and dry conditions in all sorts of soils for
underground water storage tanks, trenches for electrical services, water supply, drainage
system with inspection chambers, etc. and connection to municipal sewerage disposal system
with placement and compaction of back-filling material around trenches and within building
plinth.
(ii) Code for compaction of backfill: Proctor density test as per IS: 2720 - 2011 part 7.
(b) Classification of excavated materials: (IS: 1200 – 2002, part 1)

(i) Common excavation: It shall mean clay, silt, gravel, sand, chalk, loam, peat, filled material,
broken rock less than 0.2 m3 and similar materials which can be excavated by mechanical
excavator or by hand tools without blasting or use of pneumatic hammer.
(ii) Artificial hard material: Any material such as rock mass or existing reinforced concrete requiring
the use of approved blasting or pneumatic tools for its removal but excluding individual masses
less than 0.2 m3.
(iii) Unsuitable excavated material: Any organic matter, rubbish, mud, bentonite slurry, any
combustible material or other matter considered by the Engineer-in-charge/ PMC/ Engineer/
Architect as unsuitable to be removed from site.
(iv) Suitable excavated material: Excavated materials suitable for back filling shall be stacked at a
convenient place for backfilling at a later date.
(c) Site layout and levels:

Refer to clause nos. 2. b) vi) for details of requirements for site layout, cross-checking and
maintenance of different levels as envisaged.
(d) Method of excavation:
Page 10 of 97
(i) The Contractor shall carry out all excavations as required for all materials encountered at site,
segregate them and stack for future use. The Contractor shall provide all labour, tools and
tackles, haulage and transport equipment, consumable etc. necessary for doing the job.
(ii) A record of levels available at site to be marked jointly by the Contractor and Architect/
Engineer-in-charge in a site plan, and a few photographs of condition prior to starting the work
may be kept for reference.
(iii) The Contractor shall prepare an excavation plan in accordance with the drawing, keeping
sequence and timing of excavation, disposal of spoils, water pumping arrangements and
shoring, etc and obtain approval of Architect/ Engineer-in-charge. The Contractor shall protect
the sides of the excavation closely timbered, shored to secure from collapsing and maintained in
position as long as necessary. Design and maintenance of shoring is the responsibility of the
Contractor. If required, the Contractor shall arrange to maintain stable side slopes in excavation
with backfilling and necessary compacting be followed strictly. Shoring shall be removed after
completion as directed.
(iv) No excavated material shall be kept within 1 m of the edge of excavation. The Contractor shall
ensure against slips and falls of earth, clay or other materials in the excavation and make good
at his cost. All materials excavated shall be removed from site with all lead and lift except
wherever permitted for backfilling. Removal of excavated materials shall be measured in cubic
metre.
(v) All drainage and piping layout plan to be approved by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge and
executed well before the construction of roadways and paved areas in the campus.
(vi) Excavation done to a greater depth than necessary shall be backfilled with lean concrete (not
leaner than 1: 4: 8) or suitable material as directed by Architect/ PMC/ Engineer/ Engineer-in-
charge at the Contractor’s expense.
(vii) Pumping out water, if any, accumulated in the excavation shall be done in such a manner as to
preclude possibility of any damage to concrete or masonry in the foundation trench or in
adjacent structures.
(viii) The surface water drainage ditches shall be excavated and carefully trimmed to match the
profiles shown on the drawings. The bottom surface shall strictly follow a uniform gradient to
ensure smooth flow and speedy disposal with no stagnant pool anywhere in the drainage line or
system.
(ix) The Contractor shall be held responsible for any damage to or settlements of any adjacent
buildings, foundations, roads, drainage channels, ducts, etc., and repairs of any such damage
shall be charged to the Contractor.
(e) Safety:
(i) Comprehensive excavation plan shall be prepared by the Contractor to carry out the job
efficiently and safely. All equipments used in excavation work are to be kept in good working
order and the Contractor shall maintain safety at site.
Page 11 of 97
(ii) Excavations shall be kept free of water all the time, as far as practicable until completion of
work and backfilling. Temporary drains, if necessary may be constructed and site shall be
maintained dry and safe for working.
(iii) Whenever necessary, all excavation shall be strongly fenced, guard railings and toe boards shall
be provided by the Contractor for safety precaution around excavations and provide necessary
ladders, staging and walkways for access to the area. All earth work shall be properly protected
against damage from any cause. Necessary precaution like red light in the night and watchman
to be engaged by the Contractor. Safety tape shall be provided all around dug pits, openings etc.
as and when required.
(iv) Contractor shall be solely responsible for safety at site and keep Engineer-in-charge/ Architect/
Engineer/ PMC immune against any post accidental issues with proper indemnity bond.
(f) Inspection and measurement:

(i) After sufficient progress of excavation work, the Engineer-in-charge/ Engineer/ PMC/ Architect
or their representative and the Contractor or their representative shall examine the work jointly
and take measurement. Construction of permanent nature shall commence only after approval
is obtained from Architect/ Engineer-in-charge.
(ii) Excavation for foundation shall be measured and paid net as per drawing, dimensions of
concrete (bed concrete where so specified) at the lowest level in regard to length, breadth and
depth shall be computed from the concerned excavation levels and ground levels taken before
excavation. Any additional excavation required for working space, form work, shoring,
plumbing, de-watering and shuttering, etc. shall not be measured and paid; rates quoted for
excavation shall include for all these factors. No increase in quantity shall be made for all these
factors during and after excavation.
(g) Filling and backfilling:

(i) The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer-in-charge/ Engineer/ PMC/ Architect proposals
regarding materials, their source, and the plant for spreading the compacting filling and
backfilling. Fills from outside source shall only be used if suitable site excavated materials are
not available.
(ii) Fill material: Fill shall not consist of granular material viz. crushed rock, broken stone or bricks,
broken mass concrete or crushed blast furnace slag etc. Good quality silver sand free from
clayey material shall be used for filling within the building plinth under floor and foundation.
Filling shall be done in well compacted layers not exceeding 200 mm in thickness. Each layer
shall be compacted to 95% standard proctor density in accordance with IS: 2720 – 2011, part 7.
(iii) Compaction: Fill material shall be compacted after deposition as per standard practice.
Sufficient soaking shall be done before compaction. Entire area shall be finally dressed up and
trimmed to required levels. Compaction trials shall be satisfactorily completed before actual
filling. Trial areas satisfactorily filled and compacted may be incorporated in the works.
Page 12 of 97
(iv) In small fill areas, including backfilling in narrow widths to structures and trenches for services,
layers shall not exceed 150 mm loose depth and shall be mechanically compacted using light
plant.
(v) Backfilling of pipe trenches: Following the completion of alignment, bedding, laying, jointing and
testing of piping works, and after clearance from Architect/ Engineer/ PMC, the trench shall be
backfilled with uniform readily compactable material free from clay lumps retained on a 75 mm
sieve and stone retained on a 25 mm sieve, hand compacted in maximum layers of 100 mm
thickness to give a minimum total thickness of 450 mm over the pipe barrel. The remaining part
of the trench shall be backfilled with approved material compacted by mechanical means.
(vi) Backfilling around manholes: The space between the manhole walls and the faces of excavation
and spaces above the chamber roof and around shafts shall be backfilled with selected
excavated material layers of 300 mm loose depth and fully compacted with mechanical
rammers.
(h) Rates to include for excavation items:

Apart from other factors mentioned elsewhere in this contract, rates for item of excavation shall also
include for the following:
(i) Clearing site of shrubs, bush, wood, sapling and uprooting of trees.
(ii) Setting out works as required including making reference poles etc.
(iii) Excavation at all depth as shown in the drawing in all types of soil, in wet or dry condition
including dismantling and removing of old building structures, pipelines, sewers, debris, etc. if
any, and removal of all materials of whatever nature wet or dry and necessary for the
construction of underground reservoir etc. and preparing bed before laying concrete.
(iv) Necessary adequate protection for safety of labour, material, adjoining property and equipment
to ensure safety protection against all risk or accident.
(v) Bailing and pumping out water as required for the work and as directed.
(vi) Removal of excavated material from site as necessary with all lead and lift.
(vii) Filling with earth or concrete (mix not leaner than 1: 4: 8) portions excavated to a greater depth
of foundation trench than shown in the drawing.
(i) Silver sand filling:

(i) Silver sand: It shall be clean and free from dust, organic and other foreign matter. Filling shall be
done in layers not exceeding 150 mm thick adequately watered and consolidated. The surface of
the consolidated sand shall be dressed up to required level and slope. The specifications should
adhere to WBPWD, CPWD schedule.
(ii) Measurement: Volume of consolidated sand filling shall be measured. Dimensions shall be
measured correct to the nearest 10 mm and cubical contents worked out to cubic meters
correct to two places of decimal.
Page 13 of 97
(iii) Rates to include:
(iv) Supplying of silver sand.
(v) Filling in layers with adequate consolidation.
(vi) Dressing of surface to required level and slope.
3. Cement concrete works:

(a) Scope:
This standard specifies the material and workmanship requirements for RCC construction of the
super-structure work for the project. The materials, workmanship, installation and testing shall
conform to the following IS codes and special publications in addition to the provisions stipulated in
this specification. For all IS codes, latest revisions/ amendments shall be followed.
SP 23 – 2001 : Hand book of concrete mixes.
IS: 73 – 2013 : Paving bitumen – specification.
IS: 280 – 2006 : Mild steel wire for general engineering purposes.
IS: 432 – 1982 : Specification for mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard-
drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcements.
IS: 456 - 2000 : Plain and reinforced concrete – code of practice.
IS: 457 – 2005 : Code of practice for general construction of plain and reinforced
concrete for dams and other massive structure.
IS: 516 – 1959 : Method of test for strength of concrete.
IS: 702 – 2004 : Specification for industrial bitumen.
IS: 1199 – 2004 : Method of sampling and analysis of concrete.
IS: 1200–2002 (part-1) : Methods of measurement of building and civil engineering works,
(earthwork).
IS:1200–2002 (part - 5) : Methods of measurement of building and civil engineering works
(formwork).
IS: 1203 – 1978 : Penetration value of bitumen.
IS: 1489 – 2005 (part-1) : Specification for portland pozzolona cement.
IS: 1786 - 2008 : Specification for high strength deformed steel bars and wires for
concrete requirement.
IS: 1834 – 2000 : Specification for hot applied sealing compounds for joints in
concrete.
IS: 2002 (part 1)–1999 : Wooden flush door shutters (solid core type) specification.
IS: 2386 - 2002 : Method of test for aggregates for concrete.
IS: 2502 – 2004 : Code of practice for bending and fixing of bars for concrete
reinforcement.
IS: 2645 – 2003 : Integral waterproofing compounds for cement mortar and concrete
specification.
IS: 2720 – 2006 (part - 1): Methods of test for soils, preparation of dry soil samples for various
test.
IS: 2720-2011 (part - 7): Determination of water content dry density relation using light
compaction.
Page 14 of 97
IS: 2751 – 1998 : Code of practice for welding of mild steel plain and deformed bars
for reinforcement concrete construction.
IS: 3370 - 2009 : Concrete structures for storage of liquids.
IS: 3384 - 2000 : Specification for bitumen primer for use in waterproofing and damp-
proofing.
IS: 3764 - 1996 : Excavation work.
IS: 4925 – 2004 : Spec. for concrete batching and mixing plant.
IS: 4926 – 2003 : Specification for ready mix concrete.
IS: 4990 – 2011 : Plywood for concrete shuttering work - specification.
IS: 7320 – 1999 : Specification for concrete slump test apparatus.
IS: 7564 - 2004 : Recommendations for co-ordination of dimensions in building -
arrangement of building components and assemblies.
IS: 7923 - 2005 : Glossary of terms and definitions relating to drives using v- belts and
grooved pulleys.
IS: 8112 - 2013 : 43-grade ordinary portland cement – specification.
IS: 9103 – 2004 : Specification for admixtures for concrete.
IS: 9417 - 1994 : Recommendation for welding cold worked bars for reinforced
concrete construction.
IS: 10262 – 2009 : Concrete mix proportioning – guidelines.
IS: 12269 - 2013 : Ordinary portland cement, 53 grade – specification.
IS: 13311 – 2004 : Non-destructive testing of concrete - methods of test.
IS: 13920 - 1993 : Ductile detailing of reinforced concrete structures subject to seismic
forces– code of practice.
IS: 14687 – 2005 : Guidelines for false work for concrete structures.
(b) Material:
(i) Cement: Generally ordinary portland cement (OPC) conforming to IS: 12269 - 2013 or portland
pozzolana cement (fly ash based) conforming to IS: 1489 - 1967 part – 1 may be used.
Portland slag cement/ high alumina cement shall not be used.
(ii) Unloading from the truck / trailer, proper stacking in waterproof cement go- down,
transportation within the site etc. shall be done by the Contractor at no extra cost to the
Engineer-in-charge. Cement shall be stored in dry weather proof go-down (or shed) built at the
cost of the Contractor in stack not higher than 10 bags. Sufficient space shall be provided for
rotation of bags in order to minimize the length of storage of any of the bags. The floor of go-
down shall be of wood sleepers resting on base of dry bricks laid on the edge.
(iii) The Contractor shall ensure the quality of cement. The Contractor shall satisfy that the cement
brought to the work site conforms to the requirement of IS: 12269 - 2013 or relevant Indian
Standard. Test certificate to be submitted to Architect/ Engineer/ PMC/ Engineer-in-charge
before dispatch of each consignment from manufacturer’s works. The date, quantity of cement
and the number of relevant delivery note shall also be stated in dispatch.
(iv) All supplied cement shall be fresh and should not deteriorate. Cement, if found deteriorated,
shall be rejected and removed from site at once. If the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC/ Engineer-in-
charge has any doubt, can order on the Contractor to have the cement tested or take samples in
the presence of Contractor from cement bags and forward them to a government laboratory for
testing. The cost of such testing shall be borne by the Contractor.
Page 15 of 97
(v) Cement concerning which there is doubt shall not be used pending testing and satisfactory
results. All cement not conforming to specifications and rejected by Architect/ Engineer/ PMC/
Engineer-in-charge and cement that had deteriorated, damaged or set shall not be allowed to
be used. All such cement shall be immediately removed from work site by the Contractor. The
cost of all such cement shall be borne by the Contractor.
(vi) Aggregate:
• Coarse aggregate: Coarse aggregate shall consist of hard, dense, durable, uncoated
crushed rock. Stone aggregates of specific size and quality from approved quarries shall
be used and must comply with the provisions of IS: 383 - 1970. The aggregate shall be free
from soft, friable, thin or long laminated pieces. Aggregate shall be free from injurious
amounts of alkali, organic matter and other deleterious materials. Flakey or weathered
stones shall not be used. The test and maximum percentage of deleterious materials shall
be as specified in the IS: 2386 - 1963. The aggregate shall be screened and washed.
• Size of aggregate:
• Nominal maximum sizes of aggregates in beams and columns should be restricted to 5 mm
less than the minimum clear distance between the main bars or 5 mm less than the
minimum cover to the reinforcement; whichever is less.
• In no case the maximum size of aggregate is greater than one quarter of minimum
thickness of the member so as to facilitate concrete to be placed without difficulty to
surround all reinforcement.
• Generally for reinforced concrete work nominal maximum size of 20 mm is considered
suitable.
• The Contractor shall ensure regular supply and a watch should be maintained on the
particles shape and uniform grading throughout the work. Unless otherwise specified the
aggregate shall be obtained from ‘Pakur’.
• Aggregate shall be washed by approved methods as directed by the Architect/ Engineer-in-
charge at Contractor’s expenses.
• Testing of aggregates: Testing of aggregates shall be done as per IS: 2386 - 1963 part - 1 to
part - 8.
• Fine aggregates: Fine aggregate to be used for concreting shall be as specified under sub-
head 3.0 of CPWD Specifications. Coarse sand shall comply with the requirement of IS: 383
- 1970.
• Aggregates shall be hard, strong, dense, clean and free from clay, silt and fine dust content.
The maximum size of the particles shall be 4.75 mm (3/16 in) and shall be graded down.
The sand shall not contain any harmful materials and other substance like iron, pyrites,
coal, mica, seashells, organic impurities to reduce the strength and durability of concrete.
The total silt content in sand shall not exceed 4% as determined by the laboratory tests.
Aggregates with chloride content or chemically reactive with the alkalis of the cement shall
not be used. Quantity of deleterious materials shall not exceed the limit specified in I.S.
Specification.
(vii) Water:
Water for concreting shall be as specified under sub-head 3.0 of CPWD specifications. Water for
mixing and curing of concrete shall be clean and free from chloride component. Water shall
conform to IS: 456 - 2000.
Page 16 of 97
(viii) Admixtures:
• Admixtures may be used only on written approval of Engineer-in-charge/ Architect. All
admixtures used to modify one or more characteristics of concrete shall be accompanied
by a certificate from an approved institute, stating
• Exact range and method of application.
• Physical and chemical composition.
• Positive and negative side effects.
• A recommendation of maximum allowable quantities (as a percentage of the mass of
cement) to achieve the particular requirement.
• Proportioning and mixing.
Admixtures shall contain no chloride and shall comply with IS: 9103 - 1999. If both retarder
and plasticizer are required simultaneously, only a dual purpose additive shall be used.
Plasticizer must be used strictly in accordance to the manufacturer’s instruction. All
admixtures shall be procured from reputed manufacturer with approval of Engineer-in-
charge/ Architect.
• Air entraining admixtures, for pavement concrete exposed to weather, shall comply with
the requirements of IS: 9103 - 1999.
• Integrated water proofing admixture shall conform to IS: 2645 - 2003.
(ix) Reinforcement steel:

For entire RCC works of superstructure: High strength deformed steel bar/ TMT steel bar
conforming to grade Fe 500D as per IS: 1786 – 2008 to be used. For fan hooks, curb angle lugs
and like other minor items: Mild steel and medium steel bars vide IS: 432 may be used as stated
in approved drawings. Manufacturers test certificate for reinforcing steel shall be supplied to
the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC for each consignment of steel at site of work. Test for material
received at site, if any, and agency for such tests shall be determined by Architect/ Engineer-in-
charge and at no extra cost to the Engineer-in-charge. Unloading from the truck/ trailer, proper
stacking, storing in clean condition, transportation within the site etc. shall be done by the
Contractor at no extra cost to the Engineer-in-charge.
(x) Storage: Reinforcement steel shall be stored above ground upon platforms/ skids or such other
supports to avoid distortion and sag. Reinforcement shall be protected as far as practicable for
deterioration by direct contact or by exposures to conditions producing rust and corrosion. Bars
of different sizes shall be stacked separately in racks and distinctly marked.
(xi) Concrete:
Concrete of grade M 25/ M 30 with 20 mm and down coarse aggregate and coarse sand as fine
aggregates as stipulated in IS: 456 - 2000 with minimum cement content of 400 kg/ m3 of
concrete and slump suitable for pump concreting shall be used for columns and beams. Super
plasticizer as required shall be provided.
As a guide, concrete cube strength at 7 days shall be considered for acceptance. The minimum
compressive strength for concrete tested after 28 days shall meet acceptance criteria of IS: 456 -
2000. Concrete is to tested as per IS: 516 – 1959.
Only controlled cement concrete of approved grade prepared and supplied by approved RMC
plants shall be used. No other type of mixing of concrete shall be allowed.
Page 17 of 97
(xii) Joint materials:

All water bars to be proprietary PVC or hydrophilic, swell-able, elastomeric strip material. Joint
sealants shall comply with the requirements of IS: 1834 - 2000. Joint filler shall be proprietary
cork or fiber board material. All materials to be used shall have prior approval of Engineer-in-
charge/ Architect.
(xiii) Workmanship:
The Contractor shall employ only qualified supervisor and skilled workers. The Contractor shall
deploy weigh batcher, proper tools and plants, cube boxes etc and all other incidental to carry
out the work satisfactorily under strict safety rules following all good engineering practice. He
should follow all safety regulation and supply necessary PPE’s and safety gears to all involved in
work at site.
(xiv) All work shall be set out accurately from datum and benchmarks provided. The Contractor shall
ensure correct position, level and alignment of all parts of work during execution of the work.
(xv) A competent person approved by Architect/ Engineer-in-charge shall be employed by the

Contractor whose first duty will be to supervise all stages in the preparation and placing of the
concrete. He shall supervise:
• The quality, proportion and mixing of the concrete.
• Control water cement ratio.
• Ensure solidity and freedom from voids for concrete.
• Size and position of reinforcement.
• Organize slump test for RMC at site.
He shall be responsible for taking test cubes and other site tests will be carried out under
his direct supervision.
(xvi) Before construction commences, the Contractor shall supply to the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC/
Engineer-in-charge for their approval drawings showing the general detailed arrangements for
his concreting plan, system of form work and all other devices which he proposes to use for the
construction of the structural form work.
(xvii) No materials shall be stored or stacked on floor. For keeping any material on constructed floor,
an approval from Engineer-in-charge/ Architect should be obtained. All such materials shall be
removed immediately after the purpose for which it was kept is over and if instructed by the
Architect/ Engineer/ PMC to that effect.
(xviii) The Contractor shall be responsible for co-ordination with sub-contractors or other Contractors
engaged on the work for incorporating any inserts or electrical conduit pipes, fixing blocks,
chases, holes etc., in concrete members and brick work for electrical, fire, sanitary and other
associated work as required. The Contractor shall ensure that these requirements are as per
drawing and have been approved by the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC/ Engineer-in-charge before
concreting operation. All fixing blocks, chases inserts, holders etc. to be left in the concrete shall
be of the sizes specified in the drawing or as instructed and be instructed and be accurately set
out and placed before pouring of concrete. The Contractor’s rates quoted for concrete items
shall include all the factors. No holes and chases shall be cut in concrete without prior approval
of the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge.
Page 18 of 97
(xix) The Contractor shall provide necessary wooden plugs, sleeves etc. required for the work for
which no extra payment will be made. He will also provide if so directed by Architect/ Engineer/
PMC/ Engineer-in-charge any inserts, wooden plugs, sleeves for other Contractors, such as
electrical contractor, plumbing contractor and other contractors for which he will be entitled for
payment but in case other contractors provide such inserts, then he will have to take proper
measures (at his expense) and take care not to disturb their work while laying concrete.
(xx) Sample and tests:

Architect/ Engineer/ PMC/ Engineer-in-charge shall be provided with necessary facilities to
obtain samples and carry out tests on the materials and construction. If any material or
construction does not comply with this specification, the Contractor shall replace the material
and redo the construction at his own cost. Necessary cost of all such tests has to be borne by
the Contractor.
(xxi) The Contractor shall have to install at site a cube testing machine, cost of which will be borne by
the Contractor entirely. He will also have to keep at work site testing equipment for aggregate
and concrete, like test sieve, balance, slump cones etc., all as required conforming to relevant
I.S. specification/ C.P.W.D./ P.W.D. specification.
(xxii) IS: 1200 - 2002 “Method of measurement of building work” to be followed in all measurements
saved in so far as the same are hereby expressed or implied varied in these specification and/ or
schedule or quantities. In case of any conflict between the IS: 1200 - 2002 and this specification
and/ or schedule of quantities, the later shall prevail.
(c) Measurement of materials:

(i) Fine and coarse aggregates, cement and water shall be measured by weight, complying to IS:
4925 - 2004. The ready mix concrete (RMC) manufacturer approved by the Architect/ Engineer-
in-charge shall take care of measurement of materials for entire RCC works.
(ii) Due allowance shall be made for the weight of water carried by the aggregates in the stock pile
before use. Tolerance in quantity measurement as per IS: 456 - 2000.
(iii) If the cement is supplied in bags, use of part bag of cement shall be avoided in any batch of
concrete. If bulk storage is used, measuring device shall be approved by the Engineer-in-charge/
Architect before use and shall be regularly checked.
(d) Concrete mixes:

(i) Concrete of grade M 25/ M 30 shall be used for RCC works of columns and beams.
(ii) Mix design as per IS: 10262 - 2009 and SP 23: Handbook of concrete mixes, to be done with
aggregates, cement to achieve the necessary durability, workability and characteristic strength
not less than that specified. IS: 456 - 2000 guidelines shall be followed to minimize alkali-silica
reaction. Minimum quantity of cement shall be 400 kg/ m3 of concrete. The Contractor shall
design the mix for 10% higher strength than specified and for different slump requirement. Mix
design shall be approved by Engineer-in-charge/ Architect.
No concreting work to proceed before approval of mix design.
(iii) All concrete for roads and site paving shall have a minimum air content of 3.5%.
Page 19 of 97
(iv) Concrete shall be readily worked into the corners and angles of the form work and around
reinforcement without segregation of materials. Workability shall be measured by the slump of
concrete (IS: 7320 - 1999) at time of placing.
(v) Water cement ratio shall not exceed the limit suggested in the approved design mix vide IS: 456
- 2000. If necessary, plasticizer may be used as suggested in design mix. Procedure for use of
plasticizer shall be as per manufacturer’s recommendation. The degree of workability shall be
compatible with the type of construction.
(vi) Concrete shall be mixed in a mixer in the RMC plant approved by Engineer-in-charge/ Architect.
Mixing shall continue until there is uniform colour and constituency of the materials, and for at
least 2 minute after all the materials are in the mixer. The entire content of the mixer drum shall
be discharged before recharging.
(e) Ready-mixed concrete:

(i) Ready-mix concrete produced at an approved plant complying IS: 4926 - 2003 may be used.
Concrete to be of M 30 or M 35 grade with cement quantity of 400 kg/ m3 (min).
(ii) Concrete shall be supplied from approved plant only. The Engineer-in-charge/ Architect should
have ready access to all parts of the RMC plant during working hours of the plant.
(iii) The RMC suppliers’ statement on cement per unit volume of compacted concrete and on
admixtures shall be communicated in writing to the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC before any
concrete is delivered. All delivery notes of RMC supplied shall be retained by the Contractor for
inspection by the Engineer-in-charge/ Architect/ PMC/ Engineer throughout the duration of the
contract.
(iv) The manufacturer of RMC has also to agree to the sampling and testing procedure or he can
propose his own sampling and testing procedure to be approved by the Engineer-in-charge/
Architect. Normally, ready-mix concrete supplied to site are mixed with certain admixtures
which enables the concrete to be used within 2 hours of supply at site. In case RMC supplied is
not consumed within 2 hours of supply the quantity of RMC remaining unused beyond 2 hours
shall be rejected and removed from site.
(v) Self compacting concrete: RMC manufacturer shall ensure that concrete supplied by the plant
shall meet the requirements of ‘self compacting concrete’ vide IS: 456 – 2000 i.e. it would flow
smoothly into all corners of form work without any void anywhere. Architect/ Engineer-in-
charge may examine self compacting property of concrete as required.
(f) Placement of concrete:
(i) Contractor shall give 24 hours notice to the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC prior to placing concrete
for compaction. All debris saw dust etc. to be removed from shuttering interior before any
concrete is placed. The shuttering shall be watertight and treated properly with approved
composition of material to prevent absorption of water.
(ii) The form work, staging, reinforcement and any built-in items to be inspected and approved by
the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC before concrete is poured. Spaces to be occupied by concrete
shall be clean and free from standing water.
(iii) Concrete shall be transported in such a fashion as per IS: 4926 - 2003 to ensure the correct
quality and consistency at the point of deposition. Delivery trucks shall incorporate means of
agitating the concrete during transportation.
Page 20 of 97
(iv) Concrete shall be compacted within 30 minutes when agitation of the mix has ceased. For RMC,
the time between introduction of cement to the mix and compaction shall not exceed 2 hours
and shall not exceed 1 hour when air temperature exceeds 25 degree C.
(v) Concrete shall not be placed around reinforcement or against surfaces too hot to touch by hand.
All surfaces should be thoroughly dampened immediately prior to placing fresh concrete to
prevent excess absorption of water. No water shall be added to the mix after the concrete has
left the mixer.
(vi) The concrete shall be placed carefully and packed round reinforcement and care shall be taken
to ensure that the reinforcement is not displaced. A competent steel fixer shall be in continuous
attendance to adjust and correct the position of any reinforcement which may be displaced.
(vii) The height (maximum 1.0 meter permitted) from which the concrete will fall shall be
determined by the Contractor in consultation with Architect/ Engineer/ PMC, to avoid
segregation, displacement of reinforcement, built in items, or movement of and damage to
faces of formwork.
(viii) The use of chutes, spouts or pumps will be permitted for drops for concrete more than 1.0
meter as approved by Architect/ PMC/ Engineer. When flexible chutes are used they shall be
kept free from coating of hardened concrete. Concrete in columns, walls and pours greater than
2 m in height shall be placed using tremie tubes or other equivalent system approved by
Architect/ PMC/ Engineer.
(ix) Placing of concrete shall not be carried out in heavy rain unless special precautions, agreed by
the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC are put in force.
(x) Concreting work shall be carried out continuously between specified or approved construction
joints. When vertical lifts of concrete is interrupted and delayed for more than one hour, but
less than three hours, the surface of the unfinished concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned by air/
water spray under pressure and concreting operations commenced immediately.
(xi) The first layer of new concrete placed shall not exceed 150 mm in depth and particular care
shall be taken with compaction of this layer to ensure a good bond between the already cast
concrete and the new layer of concrete.
(xii) Concrete shall be placed gently in layers not exceeding 300 mm thickness. Concrete shall be
protected by use of covering before approval of the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC during first stage
of hardening against high winds, heat and/ or rain or surface water. No shock or vibration shall
be allowed to formwork supporting fresh concrete.
(xiii) The height of lift and the rate of placement shall be determined by the Contractor in
consultation with the Architect/ PMC/ Engineer, consideration being given to the interval
between successive layers, air temperature, method of compaction and temperature rise due to
heat of hydration.
Page 21 of 97
(xiv) No face of concrete shall be left more than one hour before fresh concrete is placed on it.
Pauses for meals, changes of shift, etc., and supply of concrete to be carefully organized so that
the interval is not exceeded, except at construction joints.
(xv) If an interruption of more than an hour occurs, or is anticipated, during concreting of a long
horizontal member, a stop-end shall be installed at a location approved by the Architect/ PMC/
Engineer, to provide clean vertical surface of the joint.
(xvi) If the concreting is interrupted for more than three hours the concrete surface shall be prepared
as per clause no. 3 f) (x); Construction Joints.
(xvii) Laying of thin sections such as floor slabs in two courses shall not be permitted except where it
is expressed to be required by the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC.
(xviii) Reinforced concrete shall not be placed directly on the ground. Where blinding concrete is used
as a base it shall not be less than 50 mm thick, or as stated in the drawings; and to be laid over
the ground immediately after excavation to provide a clean working surface but only after
existing surface meant for receiving blinding concrete is approved by the Architect/ Engineer/
PMC.
(xix) Under yard paving, polythene sheet to be used instead of concrete blinding. Polythene sheet
shall be laid in the longest lengths and widest width with overlaps not less than 150 mm at all
joints and intersections. Polythene sheet shall be laid on compacted sub-base on a surface free
of hard spots or projection likely to cause a puncture.
(xx) Structural concrete cast against open excavated faces shall be as detailed on the drawings, or as
approved by the Architect/ PMC/ Engineer.
(g) Compaction and vibration:

(i) Concrete should be placed before initial setting time as per IS: 456 – 2000. Concrete shall be
placed in layers not over 45 to 60 cm (18 to 24 inches) deep and each layer shall be vibrated into
places by methods which will not permit the ingredients to separate. Surfaces shall be smooth
and free from voids caused by stone pockets, where necessary vibration shall be supplemented
by hand padding to secure the results. Concrete in which initial set has already started should
not be used.
(ii) Full compaction of the concrete shall be achieved throughout the entire depth of the layer by
vibration of concrete. Vibration shall be carried out by those trained in the use of vibrators and
vibrated concrete. Vibrators shall be thoroughly worked against the formwork, around
reinforcement and successive layers shall be thoroughly worked together, to form a solid mass
free from voids inside the concrete.
(iii) Vibrators shall be of sturdy construction, adequately powered and capable of transmitting to
the concrete not less than 3,000 impulses per minutes when operating under load. The vibrator
shall be sufficiently readily into place and visibly affect the concrete over a radius of at least 450
mm (18”) when used in concrete having slum of one inch. A sufficient number of vibrators {at
least two vibrators for concreting of 1.5 cum (50 cft.) per hour} shall be used throughout the
entire volume of each layer of concrete and complete compaction is secured.
Page 22 of 97
(iv) Internal vibrators shall be kept constantly moving in the concrete and shall be applied at points
uniformly placed not further apart than the radius over which the vibrator is visibly effective.
The vibrator shall not be held in one location long enough to draw a pool of grout from
surrounding concrete. The vibration shall be such that the concrete becomes uniformly plastic
and there shall be at least 200 seconds of vibration per square meter (20 second of vibration per
sq. ft.) of surface of each layer of concrete, computed on the basis of visibly affected radius and
taking overlap into consideration.
(v) Normally, power driven vibrators shall be inserted at such distances apart and applied in such a
manner as will ensure full and uniform compaction of the concrete. Immersion vibrators shall
penetrate the full depth of the layer, and when the underlying layer is of fresh concrete, shall
enter and re-vibrate that layer to ensure that successive layers merge together. Vibration shall
be carried out in a manner such that no segregation of concrete occurs.
(vi) Immersion vibrators shall be withdrawn slowly to prevent formation of voids. Vibrators shall not
be used to work on the concrete along the forms, or in such a way as to damage formwork or
other parts of the work, or displace the reinforcement.
(vii) Whenever vibration has to be applied externally, the design of formwork and disposition of
vibrators shall receive special consideration to ensure efficient compaction and to avoid surface
blemishes.
(viii) The Contractor shall demonstrate the efficiency of the proposed method of compaction in a trial
section of work to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge/ Architect. Sufficient vibrators in
serviceable condition shall be on site so that spare equipment is available during breakdown.
Compaction shall not be achieved by vibration of the reinforcement.
(ix) Where vibration is not effective, careful rolling and tapping shall be carried out and sufficient
men employed to ensure that thorough consolidation takes place. Where manual compaction
becomes necessary, the workability of the mix should be controlled to suit such mode of
compaction subject to strength requirement being complied with.
(h) Defective or poor concrete:

(i) If in the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC/ Engineer-in-charge’s opinion, there is doubt as to the
strength of the structure due to the work test cubes failing to attain specified strength, due to
poor workmanship (including dimensional deviations) like honey combing, etc. or any reason
attributable to negligence on the part of the Contractor, then that part of concrete construction
shall be classed as defective and the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge’s decision regarding
dismantling of such concrete, for rectification if concrete is allowed to be retained in its place
shall be final and binding on the Contractor.
Where the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge consider that the defective concrete may be
strengthened as directed by them, the Contractor shall carry out all rectification measure, to the
approval of Architect/ Engineer-in-charge at the expense of the Contractor and shall be fully
responsible for the structural stability of any existing dependent construction during remedial
works.
Page 23 of 97
(ii) Honey combing:

Where honey combed surface are noticed in the concrete, the Contractor shall not patch up the
same until examined by the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC/ Engineer-in-charge and decision given
regarding the acceptance with rectification or rejection of the same. If the Contractor patches
up such defects without the knowledge of the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC/ Engineer-in-charge,
the Architect and Engineer-in-charge/ PMC/ Engineer are at liberty to order demolition of the
concerned concrete members to the extent they consider necessary and in such case, the
Contractor at his expense, shall reconstruct demolished work. The demolished work shall not be
measured and paid for.
If in the opinion of the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge, the honey combing is harmful to the
structure and where so directed by the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC/ Engineer-in-charge, the full
structural members affected by honey combing shall be dismantled and reconstructed to
Architect/ Engineer-in-charge’s approval at the Contractor’s expense. The demolished concrete
will not be measured and paid for.
Where in the opinion of the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge the structural members containing
honey combing can be allowed to be retained with rectification, the rectification shall be carried
out as directed by the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC/ Engineer-in-charge by gunitting (with cement
mortar 1: 3 proportion) the areas after removing defective concrete down to sound concrete to
the satisfaction of Architect/ Engineer/ PMC/ Engineer-in-charge all at the expense of the
Contractor.
(iii) Protection and curing:

Curing shall be in accordance to IS: 456 - 2000. The Contractor shall submit proposal for curing
to the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge and obtain approval. After finishing or removal of form
work, the exposed surfaces of the concrete shall be protected during hardening from the effects
of sun, drying winds, cold, rain or running water. Until the initial set of the concrete the means
of protection used shall not be removed from the concrete.
Curing of concrete after the initial set may be attained by providing adequate water for full
hydration of the cement. Concrete shall be cured for a minimum period of 14 days if the
concrete is exposed to hot and dry condition. Horizontal surfaces shall be covered with water
pond by means of bund and vertical surfaces viz. columns, fins etc. by making burlap with a
layer of sacking, canvas, hessian or a similar absorbent material soaked with water applied as a
fine spray. Alternatively, covering the wet surfaces of concrete with an approved waterproof
paper or plastic membrane immediately.
Mere sprinkling of water on vertical surfaces without sacks of burlaps will not be allowed. In
case of concrete made out of Pozzalana cement, the curing should be continued for another 8
days. During curing the concrete shall be protected from damage by shock, vibration, water,
frost or any agent likely to interfere with the process of setting and hardening. Loads of any kind
shall not be placed on the concrete within one week without permission from the Architect/
Engineer-in-charge.
(i) Construction joints:
Page 24 of 97
In advance of all concrete pours the Contractor shall submit proposals for the location of
construction joints for review by the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC unless shown otherwise on the
drawings. A minimum period of 5 days shall be allowed for review.
Vertical construction joints shall be prepared by careful stripping of the stop end as soon as possible,
within 12 hours except in cold weather, and the surface of concrete immediately brushed to expose
the large aggregate. Care shall be taken only to remove the surface skin and not to loosen the
aggregate.
Horizontal joints shall be prepared while the concrete is still green. The surface skin shall be removed
by means of an air-and-water jet to expose the larger aggregate and the surface left clean to receive
further concrete. This operation shall be carried out between one and three hours after compaction,
depending upon weather conditions. Care shall be taken only to remove the surface skin and not to
loosen the aggregate.
When it is impractical to carry out the above procedures the joints shall be prepared by needle gun
to remove surface skin and laitance. Hacking of hardened surfaces shall be avoided. Before fixing of
reinforcement or shuttering for new concrete, the surface of hardened concrete shall be inspected
and approved by the Architect/ PMC/ Engineer.
On completion of fixing of reinforcement and erection of formwork for the next pour of concrete, the
horizontal and vertical construction joints shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt and debris. Before
concreting is resumed, the joint shall be wetted by clean water. All surplus water left is to be
removed by air spray before start of concreting.
(j) Water bar and water sealer:

Wherever shown in the drawing or instructed by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge, water bar or
water sealer (hydrophilic water stops) of approved quality shall be sued in construction joints for
R.C.C. work. It is necessary to ensure that water bars form continuous diaphragms. The water bars
shall be made out of special chemically erected PVC materials for retaining the flexibility indefinitely.
Normally, the water bars shall be “center bulb” corrugated and with grip type. Corrugation and end
grips specified for better grip and ‘center bulb’ to shape with anticipated movements of adjacent
concrete masses. These shall be of 230 mm width and thickness shall be about 10 mm; IS: 457 - 2005
shall be followed unless otherwise specified.
Care shall be taken not to damage or perforate the water bar by mishandling or nailing. Water bar
shall be securely held in place so that they do not move during the placing of concrete. Care shall be
taken to ensure that concrete is compacted under horizontal water bars and that no air pockets or
voids remain after compaction.
All junctions in water bars shall be formed using factory made intersections. Butt joints between
similar sections shall be carried out on site using manufacturer’s special jig and strictly in accordance
with the manufacturer’s written instructions.
(k) Tests for concrete:

Slump test and Air content test: The slump and air content tests of fresh concrete shall be done for
ensuring correct properties for concrete in accordance with IS: 1199 - 1959 and follow acceptance
criteria therein. Corrective action, if needed, shall be taken and at Contractor’s expenses.
Page 25 of 97
Test of concrete cubes: Work test cubes shall represent quality of concrete incorporated in the work
and taken out in sets of 6 cubes complying strength requirement of IS: 456 – 2000. The cubes shall be
moulded as per IS. Three test specimens to be made for each sample for testing at 28 days and three
for testing of strength of concrete at 7 days. Additional samples are taken for finalizing duration of
curing, or checking the testing error, or for samples cured by accelerated methods as described in IS:
9103 - 1999. The specimen to be tested as described in IS: 516 - 1959.
Manufacture of test cubes and transportation to the laboratory shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor. Testing of cubes shall be carried out in a NABL accredited/ Government approved
laboratory, with concurrence from the Engineer-in-charge/ Architect. Periodical approval of the
laboratory may be obtained from the Engineer-in-charge. Entire expenses shall be borne by the
Contractor. The frequency of sampling to be as given in table below:
Table for frequency of sampling (as per IS: 456 - 2000)
Quantity of Concrete in the Work m3 Number of Samples

1–5 1
6 – 15 2
16 – 30 3
31 – 50 4
51 and above 4 plus one additional sample for each additional 50 m3 or
part thereof
Notes: a. At least one sample shall be taken from each shift.

b. Where concrete is produced in RMC plant, the frequency of sampling may be agreed
upon mutually by suppliers and Engineer-in-charge/ Architect.
(i) The cubes shall be cured as per IS code of practice. The entire operation of casting, curing and
testing will be carried out by the Contractor under the supervision of the Architect/ Engineer-in-
charge.
The cubes shall be initialed, numbered, dated jointly by the Contractor’s representatives and the
Architect/ Engineer-in-charge’s representative with a piece of wire or nail so that an
identification of the initials is left on the cubes.
A cube register to be maintained at site by the Contractor.
(ii) Test results of samples: The test results of the samples shall be the average of the strength of
three specimens. The individual variation should not be more than ± 15%
percent of the average strength. If the variation is more, the test result of the sample is invalid.
(iii) Non-compliance of conformity tests: Where the slump, air content and any other properties do
not comply with the acceptance criteria, the Architect/ PMC/ Engineer-in-charge shall
immediately be notified and corrective action taken at Contractor’s cost and responsibility.
(iv) The Architect/ Engineer-in-charge shall decide whether the concrete in the work represented in
test cubes can be accepted. Failing acceptance, the Contractor shall carry out the tests as
marked in clause no. 3. k) (v) and 3. k) (vi) below at his own expenses.
Page 26 of 97
(v) Other Defects: When the concrete is found defective from visual examination like honey
combing or when low cube strengths are obtained, the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge may ask
the Contractor to carry out core test or load test as per IS: 456 - 2000. All defects in concrete
shall be made good as directed by the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC/ Engineer-in-charge at the
Contractor’s expenses.
(vi) The tests shall be as under:

• Drilling and testing of cored cylinders as per IS: 516 - 1959 and IS: 1199 - 1959;
• Carrying out load tests, and other non-destructive tests, as per IS: 13311 - 2004;
• Cutting out and replacement of defective concrete.
All tests shall be done as advised by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge.
(vii) Load testing: If additional tests in clause no. 3. k) (vi) show that the quality of concrete is
inadequate or exhibits other defects or indicates that the reinforcement used in concrete does
not comply with the relevant standard, the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge may require a loading
test to be made. The Architect/ Engineer-in-charge reserve the right to carry out load testing on
any part of structure and proceed to deal with at their discretion. They may instruct the
Contractor to make a loading test on the work part thereof. The nature of the test and the
loading shall be left to the discretion of the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge. The Contractor shall
bear the cost of the test and the cost of dismantling, reconstruction or rectification of the
defects of concreting in accordance with their instructions.
(viii) After removing shuttering of any part of structure, the Contractor should get approval from the
Architect/ Engineer/ PMC/ Engineer-in-charge that no load test is required for the said
structure.
(l) Surface finishes:

(i) All concrete surfaces shall be free from honeycombing or other blemishes.
(ii) Normally, the exposed surface of floor slabs shall be properly tamped, using a vibrating or hand
operated beam. Immediately after tamping, the completed surface shall be checked for flatness.
Any irregularities beyond permissible tolerances must be corrected. Irregularities shall not be
made good after the concrete has set.
(iii) Concrete surfaces which are to receive grout shall be finished level and tamped. When the
concrete has become firm but is still green, the surface shall be sprayed with potable water and
lightly brushed to remove laitance and to expose the aggregate.
(m) Large concrete pours:

(i) This requirement shall apply to large pours with thickness greater than 1500 mm and a
minimum volume of 20 m3.
(ii) The Contractor shall submit details of concrete mix and a method statement for large concrete
pours and obtain approval from the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge before start of construction.
The method statement shall include details of temperature differential control procedure by the
use of embedded thermocouples together with thermal quilts necessary to maintain the
required external temperature.
Page 27 of 97
(iii) The concrete differential temperature control shall be monitored for 10 days after the concrete
pour. The method of construction shall ensure that the heat of hydration during curing of the
concrete shall not cause a temperature differential between the interior of concrete and any
outside face greater than 20 degree C.
(n) Contractor’s rates to include:

The rates of the Contractor for providing and laying cement concrete in various grades or proportion
in the schedule of quantities shall include the following:
(i) The factors and method of work described in this specification.
(ii) All materials, labour, tools and plants, scaffolding etc; mixing, conveying and placing concrete in
position, ramming, vibrating, trawling, curing, providing necessary scaffolding and removing
after the work is complete.
(iii) Unless otherwise specified in the schedule of quantities, the cost for concrete shall include for
providing stays, struts, bolts, nuts and everything necessary to keep the formwork rigid,
smoothing the process of striking and stripping formwork, hacking the concrete surfaces to
receive plaster etc. Where shuttering is described as separate item in the schedule, the rate for
shuttering shall be inclusive of all the work mentioned in specification for formwork and also
elsewhere in this contract.
(iv) Rates shall cover for any shape of a structural member like columns, beams, fascia, fins, louvers,
etc. and for cantilever beams, slabs, etc. including curved structures.
(v) Formation and treatment of construction joints and expansion joints where PVC or similar types
of water bars are specified; such materials shall be paid in separate rates.
(vi) Design of mixes, testing of cube prepared from the mix; testing of materials of construction and
work in an NABL accredited government approved laboratory if desired by the Architect/
Engineer-in-charge.
(vii) Fixing all inserts like pipes, plugs, forming holes etc.
(viii) Weigh batching using a mechanical weigh batcher or volumetric batching.
(ix) For taking out dowel bars, fan hooks, etc. through shuttering.
(x) Forming drip moulds in chajja, sills etc. where shown in drawings or as directed.
(xi) Form work at all levels.
(xii) The cost of all labour involved and tools used in demolishing and dismantling etc. including
scaffolding; also the cost of separating out and stacking of materials.
(o) Mode of measurements of cast-in-citu reinforced and plain concrete:

All concrete work shall be measured in cubic meters. The measurement of concrete will be as per
detail drawings, shapes and sizes based on net structural sizes as per drawing, i.e. excluding plaster.
No deductions shall be made for the following:
Page 28 of 97
(i) Ends of dissimilar materials for example: beams, posts, girders, rafters, purlins, trusses, corbels
and steps up to 500 cm2 in cross sections.
(ii) Opening up to 0.1 m2.
(iii) Volume occupied by reinforcement.
(iv) Volume occupied by pipe, conduits, sheathing etc. not exceeding 100 m2 each in cross sectional
area.
(v) Small voids when the voids are not exceeding 40 cm2 in cross section.
(vi) Moulds, drip moulding, chamfers, splays, rounded or curved angles, beds, grooves, rebuts up to
10 cm in width or 15 cm in breadth.
(vii) Stops, meters, returns, rounded ends junction dishing, etc.
Columns shall be measured from top of column base to underside of floor slab. In case of columns for
flat slab flare of columns shall be included with column for measurement. Beams shall be measured
from face to face of columns and shall include haunches, if any between columns and beams. The
depth of beams shall be measured from top of slab to bottom of beam. No allowance shall be made
for bulking, shrinkage, cut off tolerance, wastage and hiring of tools and equipment for excavating,
driving etc. The chajja shall be measured inclusive of bearing, when chajja combined with lintel, beam
or slab, it shall be measured as clear projection, wherever fin/ fascia and chajjas are combined,
chajjas shall be measured clear between fin/ fascia. The vertical fin and fascia shall be measured
through.
4. Form work:
(a) Materials and design:
(i) Formwork shall be designed and constructed as per IS: 4990 - 2011 and IS: 14687 - 2005. The
Contractor shall submit to the Architect/ PMC/ Engineer-in-charge entire calculations and
drawings of the formwork and obtain approval before formwork construction commences.
Formwork shall take due account of the surface finish required, the method of placing and
compacting, be sufficiently rigid and tight to prevent loss of grout from the concrete. Material
for construction of formwork shall depend on climatic conditions and expected heat of
hydration. All edges of exposed concrete members shall have a chamfer of approximately 25
mm.
(ii) Formwork shall be so designed as to be readily dismantled and removed without shock,
disturbance or damage to the concrete. Where necessary, formwork shall be so arranged that
the soffit form, adequately supported on props only, can be retained in position for such period
as may be required by curing conditions or specification.
(iii) All formwork shall be set out accurately from datum and benchmarks. The correct position, level
and alignment of all parts of the work shall be ensured by the Contractor at all times during the
execution of the works.
(iv) The formwork shall be planned and provided with approved film faced ply (12 mm thick) to be in
contact with concrete surface except where otherwise stated. As an alternative, sufficiently rigid
steel shuttering may be used. In every case joints of the shuttering are to be such as to prevent
the loss of liquid from concrete. In ply shuttering the joints shall therefore, be either tongued or
grooved or the joints must perfectly close and be lined with craft paper or other types of
Page 29 of 97
approved materials. In case of steel shuttering also the joints are to be similarly lined. If any
particular material or materials be specified in the schedule of quantities for formwork, such
particular specified material or materials shall be used in work. The formwork shall be
constructed so as to remain sufficiently rigid during placing of the concrete and till the formwork
is stuck off. All shuttering and form work must be adequately stayed and braced to the
satisfaction of the Architect/ Engineer/ Engineer-in-charge for properly supporting the concrete
during the period of hardening. The forms shall have sufficient strength and rigidity to hold
concrete and withstand the pressure of ramming and vibration and more so when the concrete
is vibrated. The surface of all forms in contact with concrete shall be clean, rigid, watertight and
smooth. Suitable devices shall be sued to hold corners, adjacent ends and edges of panels of
other forms together in accurate alignment. Bolts must be used in place of wire ties or nails in
case of mechanical vibrators are used.
Sr.no. Form work for Size of form work (thickness/ cross-section)

1. (a) Sheeting, beam and column 25 – 40 mm
sides
(b) Beam bottom 25-40 mm depends on spacing of supports spacing 1000 to
1200
2. (a) Joists ledger 50 x 75 – 50 x 58
(b) Ballies Not less than 100 dia at mid-length and 80 at thin end
In case of ballies, the maximum spacing will be 1.2 meters center to center. Ballies shall rest
squarely on wooden sole plates of 40 mm thickness and minimum beating of 0.1 sq.m.
(v) The form work shall conform to the shape, lines, dimension to suit the R.C.C. members as shown
in drawing and be so constructed. Formwork shall be adequately designed to support the full
weight of workers, fresh placed concrete without yielding, settlement or deflection, and to
ensure good and truly aligned concrete finish in accordance with the construction drawings. A
camber in all direction of 4 mm per mtr (1 in 250) span in all slab and beam centering shall be
given to all for unavoidable saffing due to compression or other causes.
(vi) Formwork (including props) shall be so constructed that the forms are maintained in their
correct position, and to correct shape and profile, so that the final concrete member is within
dimensional tolerances required.
(vii) Formwork shall be so designed that sides of the beams be first stuck leaving the soffit of beams
and supporting props in position. Props shall be designed to allow accurate adjustment and to
permit of their being struck without jarring the concrete.
(viii) Temporary openings shall be provided at the base of forms for columns and at other points
where necessary for facilitating cleaning and observation immediately before concrete is
deposited.
(ix) Vertical shuttering: The vertical shuttering shall be carried down the solid surface as it is
sufficiently strong and shall remain in position until the newly constructed work is able to
support itself. Props shall be securely braced against lateral deflection. Where timber props are
used like ballies, they shall be of minimum diameter of 10 cm and shall be straight and
adequately strong. The spacing of such struts shall be designed to carry loads imposed on it
without undue deflection of the members supported by the props. The spacing of props shall be
Page 30 of 97
approved by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge and any alterations suggested by them shall be
carried out at Contractor’s expense. Branching shall be provided as directed without extra cost.
The Contractor shall allow in his rates for providing props in struts for any height shown in the
working drawings issued to the Contractor from time to time.
(x) Internal ties: No part of any formwork tie or spacer remaining permanently embedded in the
concrete shall be less than the specified reinforcement cover from the finished surface. Ties
which when removed leave a through hole in the member shall not be permitted in liquid
retaining structures. Types of ties to be used in constructing formwork shall be approved by the
Architect/ Engineer-in-charge beforehand.
(xi) The Contractor should keep one carpenter ready at site to keep constant watch on the props
while the concreting is in progress.
(xii) Type of form work (e.g. steel or plywood) and support of form (e.g. steel or wooden) to be used
must be approved by Architect/ Engineer-in-charge.
(xiii) All measurements for formwork shall conform to IS: 1200 - 2002 (part 5).
Water tightness:
It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the forms are checked for water tightness before
concreting operation starts and to make good any deficiencies. If instructed by the Architect/
Engineer-in-charge, craft or other building paper will have to be used without any extra charge for
the same.
Cleaning and treatment of forms:

All rubbish, particularly chipping, shavings and saw dust, oil etc. shall be removed from the interior
of the forms before the concrete is placed and formwork to be in contact with the concrete shall be
cleaned and thoroughly wet and coated with soap solution, raw linseed oil, form oil of approved
manufacturer or any other approved material (such as polythene or polythene sheets) to prevent
adhesion of concrete to formwork. Soap solution for the purpose shall be prepared by dissolving
yellow soap in water to get the consistency of paint. Inside surface of forms shall be thoroughly
cleaned before application of any of the materials mentioned above. Interior of all moulds and
bosses must be thoroughly washed out with hose pipe or otherwise to be perfectly cleaned and
free from all extraneous matter before disposition of concrete.
Prior approval of the formwork made should be taken from Architect/ Engineer-in-charge before
placing reinforcement on the formwork.
Re-use of shuttering shall be permitted only after the inside surface has been thoroughly cleaned in
the manner described above. Architect/ Engineer-in-charge shall inspect and accept the formwork
as to its strength, alignment and general fitness. Temporary openings shall be provided to facilitate
cleaning and inspection of deep members. But the inspection shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for safety of men, machinery, materials and for result obtained.
(b) Release agents:

Release agents for formwork shall be carefully chosen for the particular conditions they are required
to fulfill. Where a concrete surface is to be permanently exposed the same agent shall be used
throughout the entire area. Release agents shall be applied strictly in accordance with
Page 31 of 97
manufacturer’s instructions and shall not be allowed to come in contact with reinforcement. Where
the surface is to receive an applied finish, care shall be taken to ensure the compatibility of the
release agent with the finish.
(c) Surface finishes from formwork or moulds:

Surface finishes from formwork shall be smooth, square and to plumb as per IS.
(d) Stripping:
All formwork shall be removed vide IS: 456 – 2000 so that the concrete is not damaged in any way.
Formwork removal schedule shall be approved by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge. Formwork
supporting cast-in-situ concrete in flexure may be removed when the concrete strength confirmed by
tests on cubes prepared under same condition with cube strength of 10 N/ mm2 or twice the stress
to which it will be subjected whichever is greater, provided that such earlier removal will not result in
unacceptable deflections due to shrinkage, creep etc. Notwithstanding compliance, the Contractor
shall be liable to damage caused by premature removal of props and formwork. In a slab and beam
construction, sides of beam shall be stripped first, then the underside. Formwork must be so
designed that they can be removed in following order:
• Shutters to vertical (non load bearing) face e.g. column boxes, beam sides, wall forms.
• Shutters forming soffits to slabs, horizontal and inclined which carry only light load e.g. slabs,
roofs, floors and canopies etc.
• Soffit shutters carrying heavy load e.g. beam and girder bottoms.
Stripping time: In normal circumstances, forms may be struck as per IS: 456 – 2000.
(e) Formwork in lifts for continuous surfaces:

Where forms for continuous surface are placed in successive units, (as for example in columns or
walls) the forms shall fit tightly over the completed surface so as to prevent leakage of mortar from
the concrete and to maintain accurate alignment of the surface.
(f) Tolerance in formwork:

The following shall be the maximum permissible tolerance:
• Dimensions up to 4 M in length, a tolerance up to 3 mm will be allowed.
• On lengths of more than 4 M, tolerance of not more than 5 mm will be allowed.
• On the cross sectional dimensions of columns, beams, slab faces, chajja, mullions, grill fins,
louvers and such other member, tolerance of more than 3 mm will not be allowed.
• Columns, walls and other vertical members shall not be more than 3 mm out of plumb in their
storey height and not more than 6 mm out of plumb in their full height.
• If work is not carried out within the tolerance set out above four clauses, the cost of all
rectification measures of dismantling and reconstructing as decided by the Architect/ Engineer-
in-charge shall be borne by the Contractors. In case of work dismantled, the same shall not be
measured and paid for.
(g) Measurements of formwork:

Where it is stipulated that the form work shall be paid for separately, measurement shall be taken of
the area of shuttering in contact with the concrete surface. Dimensions of form work shall be
measured correct to a cm. The measurements shall be accounted as stipulated in the Schedule of
items of work:
• Foundations, footings, base of columns etc. and mass concrete.
• Walls (any thickness) including attached plasters buttresses, plinth and strip courses etc.
• Suspended floors, roofs, landings, shelves and their supports and balconies.
Page 32 of 97
• Lintels, beams, girders and cantilevers.

• Columns, pillars, posts and struts.
• Stair (excluding landings) except as in (g) below.
• Spiral stair cases (including landing).
• Arches.
(h) Working on reinforcement:

Fabrication and fixing of steel reinforcement bars including cutting, bending, binding with annealed
binding wires and erecting in position as reinforcement in the RCC work. Entire workmanship shall
comply with IS: 456 - 2000, IS: 3370 - 2009 and as set out below.
(i) Placing: The number, size, form and position of all reinforcement shall be strictly in accordance
with the drawings, unless otherwise authorized by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge in writing.
All reinforcement shall be free from loose rust, mill scale, oil or any other substance and
coating such as paint, cement, grout, etc. likely to reduce the strength and durability of the
bond between steel and concrete.
(ii) Cutting and bending: Cutting and bending of reinforcement shall comply with IS: 2502 – 2004
and as per speculation laid in IS: 13920 - 2016.
(iii) Bar bending schedule: If necessary, bar bending drawings shall be prepared by the Contractor
and approval obtained. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect/ Engineer/
PMC bar bending schedules in triplicate for approval, but no such approval shall relieve the
Contractor of any of his responsibility for the reinforcement or its placing.
(iv) Fixing: Steel reinforcement shall be erected such as to form a rigid cage within the formwork,
with every intersection being bound together with binding wire which shall be tied in such a
manner that the ends of the wire point inward to maintain the full specified cover. Steel stools
of an approved diameter and spacing shall be provided between layers of reinforcement where
necessary to maintain the required positions.
(v) Mild steel binding wire shall be of 0.91 mm diameter (20 gauges) as specified and shall
conform to IS: 280 - 2006. Black or galvanized wires may be used for binding reinforcement
bars. Binding wires shall be free from rust, oil, paint, grease, loose mill scale or any other
coating which will prevent adhesion of cement mortar.
(vi) Binding reinforcement: Bends, cranks and other labours on reinforcing bars shall be carefully
formed matching with the drawings or bar bending schedules in accordance with IS: 2502 -
2004 and bends shall be made cold round a former having a diameter of four times the
diameter of the bars. Stirrups and binders shall be bent two times radius of the bars, against
which they are to be in contact. Heating of the bars for any purpose whatsoever will not be
allowed.
(vii) Cover to reinforcement: The reinforcement shall in all cases be covered with no more and no
less than the minimum thickness of concrete specified or shown in the drawings. Where two
bars cross, the outer should have the minimum cover and no more.
(viii) Splicing reinforcement: Where splices or overlapping in reinforcement are required, the bars
shall be provided with such splices or overlaps as are shown in the drawings/ bar bending
schedules. No bars may be joined by welding unless special permission in writing has previously
been obtained from the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge; in applying for such permission the
Contractor shall supply full details of the method he proposes to adopt.
(ix) Fixing reinforcement: The number, size, form and position of all steel reinforcement bars, ties,
links, stirrups and other parts of the reinforcement shall be in exact accordance with the
drawings, and such parts shall be kept in the correct positions in the forms without
Page 33 of 97
displacement during the process of working the concrete into place. Spacer bars, supporting
stools and distance pieces to maintain the reinforcement in the correct position shall be used.
(x) The use of timber blocks for wedging the steel off the form or mould will not be permitted.
Specified concrete cover shall be maintained by precast concrete spacer blocks of the same
grade as the concrete in which they are used. Any other method of maintaining concrete cover,
if proposed, shall be submitted for approval to the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge prior to start
of work.
(xi) All strength bars be fixed parallel to each other and to the sides of the forms. Any ties, links or
stirrups connecting the bars shall be taut so that the bars are braced properly; the inside or
their curved parts shall be in actual contact with the bars around which they are intended to fit.
(xii) No concrete shall be deposited until all form work and reinforcement has been inspected and
approved by the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC.
(xiii) Two adjacent sheets of fabric reinforcement shall overlap by at least 250 mm or 40 times the
diameter of the wires lying at right-angles to the edges to be overlapped, whichever of these
dimensions is the greater. Laps shall be tied together on both the longitudinal and transverse
wires.
(xiv) Gas cutting of reinforcement shall not be permitted. Welding of reinforcement shall be carried
out with prior approval of Architect/ Engineer only and shall comply with IS: 2751 - 1998. The
binders shall also be welded to main reinforcement with prior approval only.
(xv) Rates quoted for reinforcement shall in addition to any factors mentioned elsewhere shall
include for:
• All cutting to length, labour in bending, cranking and forming hooked ends, handling,
hoisting and fixing reinforcement in work as per drawing.
• De-coiling, straightening of coiled bars, bent bars.
• Cost of binding wire required as described.
• Cost of pre-cast concrete cover blocks to maintain cover and holding reinforcement in
position.
• For fabricating and fitting reinforcement in any structural member irrespective of its
location, dimensions and level.
• Removal of rust and other undesirable substance, using wire brush etc.
• Work at all levels.
• Stock piling of reinforcement as described.
• Cost of all wastage.
• Welding reinforcement bars whenever directed by Architect/ Engineer-in-charge.
(i) Inspection of reinforcement:

No concreting to commence until Architect/ Engineer/ PMC/ Engineer-in-charge have inspected the
reinforcement in position and until their approval obtained. A notice of at least 24 hours shall be
given to the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge by the Contractor for inspection. If in the opinion of the
Architect/ Engineer-in-charge any materials is not in accordance with the specification or the
reinforcement is incorrectly spaced, bent or otherwise defective, the Contractor shall immediately
remove such materials from site and replaced with new and rectify defects in accordance with
instruction of the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC/ Engineer-in-charge and to their entire satisfaction.
(j) Cover for reinforcement:

For normal condition of exposure, reinforcement shall have concrete cover and thickness of such
cover (exclusive of plaster or other decorative finish) shall be as follows:
Page 34 of 97
(i) At each end of a reinforcing bar: 25 mm or twice the diameter of such rod or bar, whichever is
greater.
(ii) For longitudinal reinforcing bar in beam: 25 mm or the diameter of such rod or bar, whichever
is greater.
(iii) For tensile, compressive shear or other reinforcement in a slab: 15 mm or the diameter of such
reinforcement whichever is greater.
(iv) For reinforcement in any other member such as a lintel chajja, canopy or pardi: 13 mm or the
diameter of such reinforcement, whichever is greater.
(v) For main reinforcement in isolated footings (side and bottom): Clear cover shall be 50 mm.
(vi) For column bars: Clear cover shall be 40 mm unless otherwise specified. In case of column of
minimum dimensions of 200 mm or under the clear cover may be used as 25 mm.
(vii) For bars in slabs of strip footings and mat foundations: the clear cover shall be 50 mm. Beam
bars shall be placed over slab bars in respect of beam and slab type foundation.
(k) Structural repair of concrete/ cracks, grouting of joints using

polymer/ epoxy products:
(i) All chemicals required for concrete repair works, sealing of cracks, grouting etc. shall be
procured from a manufacturing firm specialized in this field. The Contractor shall indicate the
name of the firm he is associating and obtain approval from Architect/ Engineer-in-charge
beforehand.
(ii) The Contractor shall submit his proposal for repairs along with the methodology and complete
specifications for approval.
(iii) The expert from the manufacturing firm shall, in the presence of the Architect/ Engineer, train
the Contractor’s staff for the proper method of preparing surfaces, method of mixing chemicals
in correct proportion and its application etc. In the initial stages of repair work, the expert shall
visit the site as often as required by the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC and such visits may be
reduced when the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge is satisfied that the Contractor’s staff are
trained to carry out the work as per requirement of manufacturer’s specifications.
(iv) All chemicals brought at site shall be tested, for the properties specified by the manufacturer in
his catalogues, independently in a NABL accredited laboratory approved by Engineer-in-charge/
Architect. Cost of all such tests is deemed to have been included the rates. Test certificates
issued by the manufacturer shall be used only for the purpose of verifying.
(v) The Contractor shall maintain a register of all chemicals brought on site for repair works
showing manufacturer’s name, batch number, date of manufacture, quantities and date of
consumption etc, and any other information that may be required by the Architect/ Engineer/
PMC. The Architect/ Engineer-in-charge shall countercheck all entries in the register.
(vi) The Contractor shall provide suitable weighing apparatus for mixing chemicals by weight.
Approved mechanical mixers shall be provided to mix and agitate the chemical mixtures.
(l) Rebar grouting:

It is a threaded rod fixing method for fixing new ribbed bars in reinforced concrete. It will not expose
the existing reinforcement by breaking structure. It is used for connecting new wall panel to existing
concrete wall, anchor stair landing, string, handrails and column anchoring into an existing floor slab,
extension of roof slab, sunshade etc; also used to provide support reinforcement for closing of floor
opening.
Page 35 of 97
For extension and/ or strengthening purpose, a threaded rod (extension bar) is fixed using rebar
fixing chemicals without breaking beam, column, roof slab and lintel, ceiling and RCC concrete
structure. All fixing works viz. bar fixing, rebarring, chemical rebarring, lockset and lokfix fixing, rebar
fixing, TMT rod chemical fixing, anchor bolts fastening system are done by using chemical mortar
from Fischer chemicals or equivalent and with application gun.
(m) Recording of data:

Complete records of concreting process for each column, beam and roof casting shall be maintained
by the Contractor and counter signed by the site Engineer from Contractor’s side and Architect/
PMC/ Engineer. The record shall indicate the following:
(i) Sequence of erection.
(ii) Dimension and mark of the column, beam and roof with its reinforcement details.
(iii) Details of reinforcement used in column and beam including lap length and projection.
(iv) Commencement and completion time of concreting.
(v) Date and time of stoppage, if any.
(vi) Slump test and air content test results for batch of concrete.
(vii) Cube strength result of concrete samples to specific structural members receiving the batch of
concrete indicating mix design, column position, beam details and roof elevation from where
samples are taken with date of the sample and comparing with mark on cubes.
(viii) Crushing strengths as obtained at the end of 7 days for three cubes out of a set of 6 and the
end of 28 days for the other 3 cubes. Laboratory in which tested and reference to test
certificate. The Contractor shall offer the result to the Architect/ PMC/ Engineer-in-charge/
Engineer within 24 hours of receiving it.
(ix) A copy of records indicating position in the works of all batches of concrete, their grade, and
results of slump test, air content test, temperature test, test cube, cores and other specimen
taken from them shall be maintained at site with observations by the Engineer/ PMC/
Architect/ Engineer-in-charge and another set to be handed over to the Engineer-in-charge at
regular interval.
(n) Standards for acceptance:

The column, beam and roof casting shall be accepted as satisfactory only when work has been
executed in accordance with the specification and standard stated herein to the satisfaction of the
Engineer/ PMC/ Architect and shall abide by the methodology laid down in IS Code.
(i) Columns shall be erected vertically as accurately as possible as per drawing over pile cap.
Engineer-in-charge/ Architect should be consulted at the time of finalization of column
locations. Refer clause no. 1. b) (vi) of this document for checking of verticality.
(ii) Permissible dimensional deviations in concrete construction shall not exceed the specified limit
as contained in IS specification.
(iii) Normally achievable deviations in IS: 7564 - 2004 will be regarded as the maximum deviation
acceptable, unless otherwise approved by Architect/ Engineer-in-charge.
(iv) Total volume of concrete consumed for column, beam and roof shall not be less than 1% of the
calculated theoretical volume.
(v) Concrete shall show the specified strength as indicated by cube test.
(vi) Reinforcement shall be kept properly projected as required and instructed.
(o) Rates to include:

(i) Mobilization: Mobilization of necessary tools, tackles, plants and machineries at site; erecting
the same for work, dismantling the same after completion of the work, transporting back from
the site and satisfactory clearance of the site.
Page 36 of 97
(ii) Setting: Fixing out the location of column over pile cap as per drawing.
(iii) Removing/ trimming the lean concrete from the projected pile head; exposing, straightening
and cleaning the reinforcement, if available.
(iv) Disposal of spoils, extra soil, any cement slurry, etc. to any place designated by statutory
authorities. Pumping out water and drainage and disposal of same with necessary cleaning of
area before filling or concreting wherever necessary.
(v) Clearing the site thoroughly and leveling the area after completion of the work as directed
whenever required.
(p) Other cement concrete structures, soil treatment and waterproofing:
(i) Liquid retaining structure:

Construction: Liquid retaining structures to be designed and constructed in accordance with
the recommendations of IS: 3370 - 2009. The Contractor shall follow relevant construction
techniques employed for water retaining structures involving best industry practice. The goal
shall be to make an impermeable and durable construction. To achieve this, the Contractor
shall carefully consider the following key issues that will influence the quality of the
construction:
Concrete mix design, including cement type and quantity, admixtures, water-cement ratio and
workability.
• Compaction method.
• Curing method.
• Construction/ expansion joint location and detail.
• Construction pour sequence.
• A detailed work method statement shall be submitted for a minimum of 2 weeks prior to
construction by the Contractor to the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge for review.
(ii) Construction joints in water retaining structure:

Construction joints shall comply with the IS: 3370 – 2009 and as set out below:
• The surface of the concrete at the construction joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and all
laitance removed by wire brushing, pressure jetting or retarders. If mechanical means are
used the aggregate should not be split or dislodged. Heavy duty scrabbling equipment shall
not be used.
• Use of hydrophilic water stops at construction and contraction joints is preferred over PVC
water stops, however where PVC type water stops are used at expansion joints, the
continuity of the entire water stop system must be considered. PVC water stops shall be
firmly tied to the reinforcement or forms to prevent movement during concreting.
• All water stops must be specified and fixed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• The existing concrete at construction joints shall be thoroughly wetted before new
concrete is placed.
• Concrete shall not be allowed to drop more than 1.0 m vertically and shall be placed as
near as practicable in its final position to avoid segregation.
• Tremies or concrete pumps must be used for drop of more than 1.0 m.
• Curing methods to be fixed in consultation with the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge.
Page 37 of 97
(iii) Underground and overhead water reservoir: The Contractor to note that:
• Plaster and neat cement finish to be done on reservoir inner wall surface.
• On roof surface of reservoir, only plastering to be done.
• Plasticizer admixture with waterproofing properties in plaster as bond coat to be used.
• Double sealed heavy quality CI manhole cover (vide IS: 1726 – 2017) to be provided.
(iv) Testing:
• Liquid retaining structures to be tested for water-tightness as per IS: 3370 - 2009. Leak
proof water retaining structure is in Contractor’s scope. Water-proofing, grouting and
other methods to be followed for achieving the required quality are in the scope of the
Contractor for all water retaining structures.
(v) Precast Concrete (excluding pipes):

• All pre-cast concrete shall, unless specified contrary, be mechanically vibrated.
• The pre-casting yard shall be chosen with the approval of Architect/ Engineer-in-charge.
• Where pre-cast units have projecting reinforcement, the moulds shall, if necessary, be
raised on stools above the general level of the pre-casting yard.
• The moulds shall be strongly constructed, closely jointed and true to the required shape
with edges, corners and surfaces which comply with the specification. Moulds shall be so
designed that they can take apart and reassembled with ease.
• Generally the procedure of fabrication shall be as follows:
• The sides of the moulds may be removed not less than 12 hours after casting, provided
that the concrete has thoroughly set to the satisfaction of the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC. All
concrete surfaces shall be cured for a minimum of 10 days.
• Curing of concrete units should be as prolonged as possible (not less than 21 days) but they
should be allowed to dry before fixing for as long a period as possible, and should however
be fixed in a green or set condition.
• Slinging, transporting and stacking may take place ten days after casting, Building or setting
in the work shall not be permitted until 28 days after casting.
• The time periods specified above may be reduced where special techniques are adopted
such as vacuum or pressed concrete, autoclaving steam curing or when rapid hardening
cement is used, all after approval of the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge.
• The sizes of the precast units as shown in the drawings will be normally adhered to.
However, during the progress of work, owing to such exigencies of circumstances as may
be decided by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge the sizes of the units and their method of
joining, their construction and erection may be subject to changes by the Architect/
Engineer-in-charge for which the Contractor will not be entitled to any extra over the rates
quoted for such items of work. The Contractor should quote rates to include these into
account while submitting tender.
• Unless otherwise mentioned in Schedule of quantities (the proportion for precast concrete
work shall be 1: 1.5: 3 i.e. 1 part cement, 1.5 coarse sand, 3 aggregate).
• Water cement ratio for this class of concrete work should not exceed 0.5.
• Form/ mould shall be composed of high quality timber of approved variety consisting
mainly of two basic unit moulds and parameter frame as per drawing. Mould units are to
be assembled with convenient device for demoulding of precast R.C.C. members.
Page 38 of 97
• Where required, joints of precast units are to be grouted with sand cement (2:1) mortar
including admixture of approved waterproofing compound as per manufacturer’s
specification.
• Tolerance to the dimension of precast unit should be as per IS specification.
• During installation of the precast unit in position special care should be taken to avoid the
possible damage to the units and danger to workmen. Any loss, damage or injury caused to
the units or workmen due to carelessness will be the Contractors responsibility and if
ordered by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge, the damaged units are to be replaced by new
units which shall be absolutely at the risk and cost of the Contractor.
• No unit of precast concrete is to remain in the permanent works with the date of
manufacture and such other distinguishing description exposed.
• Maturing of pre-cast concrete shall be as agreed with the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge.
• Rates: The rates for precast concrete work shall include all labour and material for
manufacturing (reinforcement measured separately) unless otherwise mentioned in
schedule of quantities, providing moulds/ form moulds and/ or form work; all surfaces and
edges finished to line and level and treated with approved finish to faces, including profuse
curing in curing vats provided by the Contractor; hosting, transporting, stacking as directed
and fixing in positions as per drawing and direction of the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge; all
work and entire cost of supplying, fixing and removing form, samples of precast unit and
inspection and approval by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge as regards texture, colour and
quality.
• The rates of the Contractor shall be inclusive of installation of the units in position with
light crane, fixing the units to adjacent units (precast or cast in situ) and supporting form
work as shown in drawing, finally to have the cement rendering of 6 mm thick cement
plastering, with all other ancillary and contingent works which may arise, to have the work
finished as per drawing and to the entire satisfaction of the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge/
Engineer/ PMC.
5. Soil treatment (Anti-termite treatment):

Soil treatment shall conform to the following specifications:
IS: 6313 – 2000 (part - 1) : Code of practice for anti-termite measure in buildings.
IS: 6313 – 2001 (part - 2) : Code of practice for anti-termite measure in buildings.
Anti-termite treatment shall be done with Chlorophyriphos or other chemical approved by Central
Insecticides Board from an approved manufacturer.
To make 1% solution of Chlorophyriphos 20% EC for use at site: Mix 1 ltr. of the chemical in 19 ltrs. of water.
For wood treatment mix 1 ltr. of the chemical in 19 ltrs. of kerosene oil.
This item of work will be executed by an approved agency, a member of India Pest Control Association,
approved by Central Insecticides Board. A daily record shall be maintained by the Contractor indicating the
amount of work done and the quantity of chemical consumed for the work. This record book shall be the
property of the Engineer-in-charge.
Page 39 of 97
The chemical for anti-termite treatment shall be tested in a laboratory approved by the Engineer-in-charge
and Architect. The result obtained after testing to be submitted to the Engineer-in-charge and Architect. Cost
of testing shall be included in the rates quoted.
(a) Method of application:

The manner and sequence of operation to be followed are indicated. The concentration of chemicals and
rates of application for various operations are prescribed hereunder. It shall be distinctly understood that
these represent the minimum rates of application for each operation and that the Contractor shall actually
apply chemicals at rates higher than those specified herein to the extent he may consider necessary for
retaining the effectiveness during the 10 years guarantee period. In other word, the onus of responsibility of
applying adequate amount of chemicals as required to sustain the 10 years guarantee shall be that of the
Contractor, but in no case shall actual rates of application be less than these specified herein.
(i) Spraying the mixture uniformly by sprayer as pre-construction anti-termite treatment at the
rate of 7.5 ltrs/ sqm on vertical and 5 ltrs/ sqm on horizontal surfaces (or as directed by
manufacturer) within the trenches, 50% of the emulsion to be filled in the holes made in
trenches at 150 mm. centre to centre as per IS: 6313 – 2001 (Part - II) and as directed.
(ii) Backfill earth on each side of all built up walls, which will be in immediate contact with the
foundation, should be treated with chemical at the rate of 7.5 lit. per linear meter of vertical
surface of the substructure, to a depth of 450 mm and width of 150 mm. The chemical shall be
directed towards the masonry surfaces so that earth in contact with these surfaces is well
treated with the chemical. Ensure back fill against foundation is treated to its full depth.
(iii) If there is loose soil around the walls of underground tank, holes are drilled as close as possible
to the plinth wall about 300 mm (1ft) apart from each other. Insecticide/ termiticide is then
poured, so that it reaches the soil to eliminate the termites present there and to stop them
from re-infesting.
(iv) Before laying the floor, the top surface of the consolidated earth within the plinth wall shall be
treated at the rate of 5 litres of 1% solution of the chemical in water per square metre. It is
advisable to make 20 mm dia 500 mm deep holes at the rate of 300 mm centre to centre
before pouring the chemical.
(v) After completion of the structure, 300 mm of earth along the external perimeter of the tank
shall be treated at the rate of 5 litres of 1% solution of the chemical in water per sqm.
(vi) All timber/ log faces in contact with masonry work shall be brushed twice with 1% solution of
the chemical in kerosene oil.
(vii) Treatment shall not be made when the soil or fill is excessively wet or immediately after heavy
rains to avoid surface flow of the toxicant from application site. Unless the treated areas are to
be immediately covered, precautions shall be taken to prevent disturbance of the treatment by
human or animal contact with the treated soil.
(viii) Builders should take care that any disruption of the barrier during later construction work (e.g.
creation of gardens over the treated barrier), may lead to untreated gaps.
Page 40 of 97
(viii) Guarantee: The Contractor shall have to furnish ten years guarantee in the prescribed
proforma as per conditions and clauses of contract attached herewith to maintain the anti-
termite treated area/ structure free from termite. In the unlikely event of any treatment
becoming necessary subsequently during the guarantee period, required inspection and
treatment shall be carried out free of cost. The Contractor shall submit an undertaking to the
Engineer-in-charge, on a stamp paper, duly notarized, to carry out such repairs as and when
required.
(ix) Rates: The Contractor should include in his rates given in schedule of work in sq.m. area all the
stages of treatment to bottom of foundation, sides of trenches, under side of the floor,
underside/ damp proof course, in the outer face of external wall up to window sill level, door
and window frames to ground floor area which comes in contact with the brick wall and finally
the trenches etc, treatment all round the buildings as per detailed specification mentioned
above. Where the rate of application of the insecticide/ termiticide, has not been specified
clearly the rates should be governed so that during the guarantee period no trouble may arise.
Payment will be made on the plinth area measurement mentioned above and no extra on this
account will be entertained.
6. Water proofing treatment:

Waterproofing is the process of making an object or structure waterproof or water-resistant so that it
remains relatively unaffected by water leakage for water retaining structures or resisting the ingress
of non-potable water inside underground potable water tank. It often refers to penetration of water
in its liquid state and possibly under pressure.
(i) General:
• The Contractor shall get written approval from the Engineer-in-charge and Architect, for
the water proofing agency with specific credential of similar type of work engaged by the
Contractor and shall submit the specification and method statement of the
waterproofing arrangement before commencement of work.
• The Contractor shall test for water leakage from the structure/ surface before rendering
water proofing treatment. Where water proofing treatment provided in schedule for
bone dry condition, it should be done by filling up the tank with water. No wet patches or
leaks shall appear on the slab or junction etc. If leakage is observed, the Contractor
should stop the leakage with proper method and start waterproofing.
• The Contractor shall furnish guarantee bond on appropriate stamp paper in the proforma
as per conditions and clauses of contract attached to this tender document and for
maintaining the surrounding walls and under-side surfaces of the treated tanks, roof,
toilet, kitchen and balcony etc in bone dry condition for 10 years. During the guarantee
period, the Contractor shall attend all leakages, defects etc. if noticed, free of cost,
starting the work of checking up and rectification within a week’s time from the date of
intimation of such leakages/ defects.
• The Contractor shall keep the overhead/ underground tanks filled with water after the
water proofing work has been completed and shall clean it in proper way with potable
water before handing over. At no time shall the tanks be kept empty. Testing for the
bone dry condition for the water proofing work carried out shall again be done, before
handing over, if found necessary by the Engineer-in-charge and Architect.
Page 41 of 97
(ii) Water proofing treatment for water reservoirs:
Underground tank:
• Box type water-proofing with Kota or Sahabad stone:

• The Contractor shall provide and lay patent box type cement based water proofing
treatment by an approved agency with experience of undertaking similar work for
underground water tank floor and outer wall at all levels and locations as per
specification of the water proofing agency including cleaning of surfaces, curing and
testing the tank raft for water tightness, rectification of defects, if any, etc. as per
specification and drawing and as directed by the Engineer-in-charge and Architect.
• The Contractor shall provide 50 mm to 70 mm thick water proofing treatment for tank
base/ floor consisting of:
• 1st layer of Shahabad/ Kota stone of approx. size 600 x 600 x 20 mm thick of approved
quality (rough stone slab) over 25 mm thick base of cement mortar 1: 3 (1 cement: 3
coarse sand) mixed with waterproofing compound conforming to IS: 2645 - 2003 in the
recommended proportion, joints sealed and grouted with cement slurry mixed with
water proofing compound conforming to IS: 2645 - 2003 in proportions recommended by
the manufacturer.
• 2nd layer of 25 mm thick cement mortar 1: 3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand) mixed with water
proofing compound in recommended proportions.
• Finishing top with stone aggregate of 10 mm to 12 mm nominal size spreading @ 8
cudm/ sqm thoroughly embedded in the 2nd layer.
• The Contractor shall provide integral cement based treatment for water proofing on the
vertical surface by fixing Shahabad/ Kota stone of approx. size 600 x 600 x 20 mm thick of
approved quality (rough stone slab) with cement slurry mixed with water proofing
compound conforming to IS: 2645 - 2003 in recommended proportion with a gap of 20
mm (minimum) between stone slabs and the receiving surfaces and filling the gaps with
neat cement slurry mixed with water proofing compound and finishing the exterior stone
slab with cement mortar 1: 3 (1 Cement: 3 coarse sand) 20 mm thick with neat cement
punning with water proofing compound in recommended proportion at all levels as
directed by Engineer-in-charge and Architect.
Overhead tank:
• General: The waterproofing treatment for over head tanks shall be essentially a cement
based water proofing treatment similar to that of M/s Sika or other approved company
consisting of water proof cement based plaster after preparing the surface, filling the
cracks and crevices by means of injection and surface method, using proprietary
waterproofing compound as per their own specifications and as per recommended
proportions etc. and testing of water tightness of the waterproofing treatment and
furnishing guarantee as specified.
• Preparation of surfaces: The surface to receive the water proofing treatment shall be
thoroughly cleaned by wire brushes including removal of scales and laitance, set mortar
etc by the waterproofing Contractors. Surface shall be roughened with close hacking to
provide adequate key for the waterproofing treatment. All honey combing including
cracks and crevices shall be carefully hacked and loose materials removed and all pockets
plugged suitably well before commencing waterproofing treatment.
Page 42 of 97
• Treatment: Before any work of waterproofing is taken in hand, all the surface
preparation mentioned above shall be got approved by the Architect/ Engineer-in-
charge. All plumbing work will be got completed by the agency before commencing the
treatment.
• The treatment shall then be commenced with injection into RCC members wherever
required by cement slurry mixed with water proofing compound of appropriate
consistency to fill up all cracks, honeycombs and crevices, if any. A layer of waterproofing
plaster in the specified proportion as per manufacturers/ waterproofing Contractors
recommendations with admixture of approved manufacturer of waterproofing
compound shall then be laid over floor from inside and will be continued along the side
and partition wall to their full height. The thickness of this treatment on the floor shall
not be less than 50 mm and that on walls not less than 20 mm. The entire surface shall
be finished smooth with steel trowel in cement colour. The plastered surfaces shall be
kept continuously wet immediately after 24 hours so as to cure it properly for at least 7
days.
• Testing: The tank will be filled up to the full height immediately by the Contractor and
water stored for a minimum period of 7 days so as to observe any leakages/ defects for
necessary compliance by the waterproofing Contractor. In the case of tanks whose
external faces are exposed, the requirements of the test shall be deemed to be satisfied
in the external faces shown no leakage and remain apparently dry over the period of
observation for the seven days after allowing seven days period for absorption after
filling the tank for full height. If the structure does not satisfy the condition of test, the
period of test may be extended for a further period of seven days and if specified limit is
then reached, the structure may be considered a satisfactory. Suitable remedial
measures shall be taken by the Contractor at his own cost till the test as specified above
is carried out satisfactorily.
• In the case of tanks whose external faces are exposed prior to testing; all leakages, wet
patches and the like shall be marked out on the outside of walls during test. The tank
shall then be dewatered and the defects made good by grouting, waterproofing,
plastering etc. as necessary to the entire satisfaction of the Architect/ Engineer-in-
charge, at no extra cost to the Engineer-in-charge. The tank shall again be tested for
leakage after rectification. The work shall not be accepted unless the water tightness is
established.
• Back filling in case of underground sump and waterproofing the roof where specified,
shall be carried out after testing and rectification of defects. The completion certificates
shall not be given unless the test for water tightness a described above is carried out to
the entire satisfaction of Architect/ Engineer-in-charge. After a period of two months
after the tank is left dry, once again the tank should be filled with water to check the
efficiency of the water proofing treatment done. If there is any leakage or wet patches,
the same shall be rectified, with no extra cost, by the Contractor.
• Mode of measurement: Measurement for payment of waterproofing treatment shall be
as per actual area covered by waterproofing treatment including offset, overlapping,
rounded junctions, hunch etc. as provided at site. The length and breadth of the surface
actually treated with waterproofing treatment shall be measured up to two places of
decimal of a meter. No deduction shall be made for inlet, outlet, scour connection, but
the same shall be finished as required. The rate quoted shall include all the cost of
materials, labour, transportation, testing of water tank for water tightness, furnishing
necessary guarantee for waterproofing so provided, all as detailed above.
Page 43 of 97
(iii) Waterproofing treatment on terrace:

• General: It shall be essentially a cement based water proofing treatment similar to that
of Sika or other agency and shall consist of providing cement slurry mixed with
waterproofing compound at desired proportions including grouting the cracks and
crevices with cement slurry mixed with waterproofing compound, laying brick bats over
cement mortar bedding to the required slopes for roof drainage, filling and grouting the
joints with cement mortar, finishing the surface smooth/ chequered with cement
concrete (1: 2: 2) mixed with waterproofing compound as directed.
• Preparation of surfaces: All the rubbish, debris and other materials left over will be got
removed by the Contractor. The surface to receive the waterproofing treatments shall be
thoroughly cleaned with wire brushes including removal of scales and laitance, set
mortar etc by the waterproofing Contractors. If any honey combing or cracks and
crevices are observed at column junctions and elsewhere, the same shall be grouted with
cement slurry mixed with approved water proofing compound.
• All plumbing work will get completed by Contractor before commencing the treatment.
Rain water down pipes shall be fixed prior to commencement of waterproofing
operation.
• The Contractor shall provide details of waterproofing treatment proposed by him in
writing including roof fill material, waterproofing compound, minimum and maximum
thickness etc. for effective supervision of the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge while the
work is executed at site.
• Treatment: The waterproofing treatment shall be as per manufacturers specifications,
method and procedure. It shall generally consist of the following:
• Applying cement slurry mixed with waterproofing compound over entire surface to be
treated. Laying of broken brick bat of required thickness over prepared cement mortar
bedding to give proper slope for roof drainage, grouted by cement mortar with
waterproofing compound.
• Laying of joint less cement based waterproofing cement concrete layer of average
thickness as specified in the schedule ensuring that sufficient slope for effective roof
drainage is provided in the average thickness of water proofing treatment proposed.
• Final rendering to give a smooth finish of cement colour with false lines at 300 x 300 mm
or nearer convenient dimension. Curing by ponding shall be done for 7 days.
• Testing and guarantee: The Contractor shall test the surface for bone dry condition by
ponding water over roof for minimum seven days period to the entire satisfaction of the
Architect/ Engineer-in-charge. After a period of two months, once again the roof should
be ponded with water to check the efficiency of waterproofing treatment against
leakage. The Contractor shall furnish guarantee for the waterproofing treatment
provided and maintaining the underside of the roof in bone dry condition for a minimum
period of ten years.
• During this period, the Contractor shall be liable to attend all leakages, defects etc if
noticed free of cost, starting his work of checking and rectification within a week time
from the date of receipt of intimation of such leakage etc.
• Mode of measurement: Net area in square meter of the roof measured in between the
side walls, i.e. plan dimensions included rounded junctions, kerbs, parapets where water
proofing treatment provided etc. shall be measured for payments. The rate shall include
the cost of labour, materials, scaffolding etc. and shall cover the cost of rounding of
Page 44 of 97
junctions etc. will not be measured separately. Brick bat filling done under this item will
not be measured separately and is deemed to be included in the item with an average
thickness of 115 mm.
(iv) Water proofing treatment of toilet, kitchen and balcony:

Depressed areas in bath, toilet, kitchen, balcony to be filled with water proofing concrete over
broken AAC blocks, at all floors and locations up to the required level and the surface made
suitable to receive floor finish etc. as per drawings and waterproofing agency’s (like Sika)
specification. Treatment to vertical and horizontal surface of depressed portions is as under:
• Applying cement slurry @ 4.40 kg/ m2 mixed with waterproofing compound conforming
to IS: 2645 - 2003 in recommended proportions after preparation the existing surface.
• The Contractor shall provide 25 mm thick cement plaster 1: 3 (1 cement: 3 sand) mixed
with waterproofing compound as per waterproofing agency’s specifications up to
finished floor level and about 12 mm thick plaster mixed with waterproofing compound
for walls above finished floor level up to 600 mm height.
• Next, blown or residual bitumen applied hot at minimum 1.70 kg/ m2 area.
• Covering with 400 micron thick PVC sheet (over laps at joints of PVC sheet should be 100
mm wide and pasted to each other with bitumen @ 1.70 kg/ m2) to be done.
• Curing to be done as specified. Testing of the area for water tightness, rectification of
defects, if any, to render the surface in bone dry condition etc. to be completed as per
specifications, drawings and as directed by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge. Wherever
required, scaffolding etc. to be provided by the Contractor.
7. Underdeck insulation:
A non-fibrous, fire retardant polyethylene or phenolic foam material with reflector properties i.e. a radiant
barrier is needed for under-deck insulation. It should be very effective in temperature control to maintain
cooler indoor. It should be an ideal environment friendly insulation material, better than conventional glass
wool insulation material to stop unwanted transmission of heat.
(a) General:
(i) Material to have extremely low K value, 0.018 Kcal/ hr/ MC.
(ii) Low water vapour transmission level.
(iii) Should be available in a single component system.
(iv) Mildly antiseptic and resistant to fungal or bacterial growth. It should not attract rodent.
(v) Should have good acoustic properties.
(vi) Material shall be classified as P (not easily ignitable) vide BS 476 Part 5.
(vii) To conform to building classification ‘O’ based on propagation index vide BS 476 Part 6.
(viii) Temperature range: (+) 125 degree C to (–) 190 degree C.
(ix) Material shall have a class I surface spread of flame, highest possible vide BS 476 Part 7.
(x) Lowest smoke obscurations 5% (almost negligible) vide BS 5111 Part 1.
(xi) Toxicity index 0.04478 – Naval Engg. Standard 713 (NES).
(b) Method of application:

(i) Clean the roof underside surface to remove dust, loose particle like cement mortar etc with
wire brush.
(ii) Apply one coat of Shalicoat to underside of roof.
Page 45 of 97
(iii) Apply CPRX compound to the underside of each pre-laminated phenolic foam panel and press
in position. Butt the joints together to make it appear as a composite one.
(iv) Secure panels in position with the help of screws, rawl plug and washers.
(v) Use self adhesive aluminium tapes as required.
8. Masonry and allied works:

(a) Scope:
This specification covers furnishing, installation, repairing, finishing, curing, protection, maintenance
and handing over of masonry and allied works for use in structures and locations covered under the
scope of the contract.
Some of the relevant codes for this section:
IS: 383 – 2002 : Specification for coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete.
IS: 1077 – 2002 : Common brunt clay building bricks specifications.
IS: 1127 – 2003 : Recommendations for dimensions and workmanship of natural building stones for
masonry work.
IS: 1200 – 2002 : Method of measurement of building and civil engineering works.
IS: 1542 – 2003 : Sand for plaster-specification.
IS: 1661–2001 : Code of practice for application of cement and cement-lime plaster finishes.
IS: 2116 – 2002 : Specification for sand for masonry mortars.
IS: 2185– 2005 : Concrete masonry units, part 3: Autoclaved cellular aerated concrete blocks.
IS: 2212 - 2005 : Brick works- code of practice.
IS: 2250 – 2000 : Code of practice for preparation and use of masonry mortars.
(b) Materials:
Autoclaved aerated concrete (AAC) block: (IS: 2185 – 2005 part 3)
It is a cellular concrete block, steam cured of sizes as shown in specification below. Use of fly ash @
20% may be permitted for OPC cement of IS: 12269 - 2013 grade for making AAC blocks with
additives as required for aeration. Technical specification for grade I blocks are as under:
Sr. No. Property Units Sizes/ qty.

1. Size Mm 625 x 240 x thickness
2. Thickness Mm 50,75,100,125,150,200,225
3. Compressive strength N/ mm2 > 3 - 4.5 (IS: 2185)
4. Normal dry density Kg/ m3 450 – 650
5. Sound absorption DE Up to 42
6. Fire resistance Hrs 4
7. Thermal conductivity “K” W/ mK 0.24
8. Thermal resistance K - m2/ W 0.46
9. Heat transmission coefficient ‘U’ W / m2 K 2.17
10. Density in oven-dry condition Kg/ m3 550 – 650
11. Drying shrinkage % 0.04 % (size of block)
All blocks shall be sound and free of cracks and damage. The blocks shall contain ISI mark with the
identification of the manufacturer, grade and block density and month and year of manufacture.
Dimensional tolerance shall not exceed (+/-) 5 mm for length and (+/-) 3 mm in width and thickness
for AAC blocks. All blocks shall have rectangular faces and sharp straight edges. A lot shall normally
contain 10,000 pieces of AAC blocks. At the time of manufacture, 24 blocks will be chosen randomly
from the lot for testing. All 24 samples shall be checked for dimension and visual defect, if any. 12
blocks shall be tested for compressive strength, 3 for density, 3 for thermal conductivity and 3 for
Page 46 of 97
drying shrinkage. Balance 3 blocks shall be used for testing of drying shrinkage if need arises. The
supplier shall furnish manufacturer’s certificate for the quality and result of tests but the Architect/
Engineer-in-charge reserves the right to make independent test at a laboratory of their choice and
the Contractor shall supply required no. of specimen for such tests and borne the cost of such test
altogether.
(c) Earthen brick:

(i) Bricks for masonry work shall be of 5 N/ mm2 (minimum) crushing strength qualities, well
burnt from first class kiln, of uniform size, shape and colour, free from cracks, flaws or nodules
of free lime and emit clear ringing sound when struck. Fractured surface shall show fine
grained, uniform, homogeneous, dense texture free from grits, lumps of lime, laminations,
cracks, air-holes, soluble salts etc. or other defects which may impair strength, durability,
appearance and usefulness. Bricks shall not have any part under burnt. The brick shall not
break when thrown on the ground on their flat face in a saturated condition from a height of
about 2 feet. Water absorption after 24 hours immersion shall not exceed 20% by weight for
common bricks vide IS: 1077 - 2002. Dimensional tolerance shall not exceed 8% of size shown
in the drawings for common bricks. All bricks shall have rectangular faces and sharp straight
edges. Bricks shall show no efflorescence after soaking in water and drying in shade.
(ii) Each brick shall have the manufacturers’ identification marks on the frog. Representative
samples shall be submitted to the Architect/ PMC/ Engineer/ Engineer-in-charge for approval.
The approved sample shall be retained by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge for future
comparison and reference. The brick to be used for work shall be approved by the Architect/
Engineer-in-charge beforehand from time to time.
(iii) Joining mortar for AAC blocks: Standard thin bed joining mortar of ‘Accofix’ of ACC or
equivalent with high adhesive strength, quick and firm laying for AAC blocks with thin joints to
be used. It is made up of cement, graded stone and blended with polymers to give high bond
strength and water retention properties. The final joint of AAC structure shall develop
compressive strength of 6.8 Mpa at 28 days; tensile adhesion strength up to 0.8 Mpa and initial
flow: 150 – 180 mm water demand at 25% of powder content.
(iv) Cement: Cement used shall be Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC) or Portland Pozzolana Cement
(PPC) conforming to IS codes.
(v) Coarse aggregates: Coarse aggregates shall be as per IS: 383 - 1970, consisting of hard, strong
and durable crushed stone and free from organic or clay coatings, disintegrated stones, soft
flaky particles, etc. which are liable to affect the strength, durability or appearance of concrete.
Washing of aggregates shall be carried out, if desired by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge. It
should meet the requirements of clause no. 3. b) (vi) of this specification. Grading of coarse
aggregates shall conform to IS: 383 - 1970 and shall produce a dense concrete of the specified
proportion, strength and consistence that will work readily into position without segregation.
(vi) Sand: Sand shall be hard, durable, clean and free from adherent coatings or organic matter and
shall not contain clay balls or pellet. The sand shall be free from impurities such as iron pyrites,
alkalis, salts, coal, mica, shale or other laminated materials in such forms or quantities as to
affect adversely the hardening, strength, durability or appearance of mortar, plaster or
concrete or to cause corrosion to any metal in contact with such mortar, plaster or concrete.
All sand shall be properly graded. Approval of Architect/ Engineer-in-charge may be obtained
Page 47 of 97
beforehand regarding the area from where sand is drawn and type of sand obtained. Unless
otherwise directed by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge, all sand to pass through IS Sieve no.
240 and 15 to 35% of sand for masonry mortar and 5 to 50% of sand for plaster shall pass
through IS Sieve no. 30. Sand for concrete shall conform to IS: 383 - 1970.
(vii) Water: Water shall be clean, fresh and free from organic matters, acids or soluble salts and
other deleterious substances, which may cause corrosion, discolouration, efflorescence etc. as
per IS: 456 – 2000.
(viii) Mortar for brick work: For cement sand mortar, cement and sand in requisite proportions as
specified in schedule of works shall be mixed dry in a mechanical mixer and then water added
and mixed further. Minimum quantity of water shall be added to achieve working consistency.
No mortar that has stood for more than half an hour shall be used.
(d) Installation:
(i) Brick edging: Excavation shall be done close to the brick dimensions and in perfect alignment.
Bricks shall be firmly placed by hammering with wooden mallets and sides and joints packed
firmly with earth so that the edging is not disturbed easily. Alignment and level shall be
acceptable to the Architect/ PMC/ Engineer.
(ii) Masonry:
• General: All masonry work shall be true to the line, level and shapes as shown in the
drawings. All masonry shall be tightly built against structural members and bonded by
dowels, inserts etc. as shown in the drawings. The concrete surface against which
masonry work is to be laid shall be hacked and cleaned. Masonry work shall always be
placed against saturated surface dry condition.
• Masonry made of AAC blocks:
➢ All AAC block surface shall be free of voids, cleaned of dust and wetted before use. One
bag of Accofix mortar shall be mixed with 10 litres of water (approx) in a clean bucket to
make a paste. Stir the paste for 5 – 10 minutes to make it homogeneous. Allow it to
stand for 3 – 5 minutes and then mix again for 2 – 3 minutes.
➢ The mixture shall be used up in 20 minutes by applying over masonry surface in thickness
of 2 - 4 mm by using notched trowel or equivalent tools for good bonding and neat finish.
Place the adjacent block immediately on to the notched mortar and lap into place. For
wall construction, the first course of block wall is to be built using conventional mortar.
➢ Apply joining mortar with special trowel over the block surface and once it is pretend to
dry, tap the block with rubber mallet firmly into position. Clean off excess mortar
squeezed out of joints. Leveling rasps and wedges may be used for horizontal and vertical
block positioning. Special metal joint fixings and ties may be used during wall junction
construction.
➢ Two horizontal RCC bands (one at sill level and other at an appropriate level indicated by
the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge) should be provided for 200 and 100 mm thick wall
structures made of AAC blocks. Vertical stool columns should be provided for long walls.
Extra precaution is to be taken for half block work in consultation with the Architect/
Engineer-in-charge.
• Brick masonry:
Page 48 of 97
➢ All bricks shall be immersed in water for twenty four hours before being put to work so
that they are saturated and will not absorb water from mortar when used. During actual
use, bricks shall be soaked by submergence in clean water for at least two hours in
approved vats.
➢ Bricks shall be laid in English bond unless specified otherwise. Broken bricks shall not be
used. Bricks shall be handled carefully so as not to damage their edges. They should not
be thrown from any height to the ground but should be put down gently.
➢ Bricks shall be laid with frogs upward over full mortar beds. Bricks shall be pressed into
mortar and tapped into final position so as to embed fully in mortar and no hollows left
anywhere. Inside faces shall be buttered with mortar before next brick is placed and
pressed against it. Thus all joints between bricks shall be fully filled with mortar.
➢ Mortar joints shall be kept uniformly 10 mm thick. The vertically of the walls and
horizontality of the courses shall be checked quite often with plumb bob and spirit level
respectively.
➢ All walls, coming in contact with reinforced concrete columns, beams etc. to be properly
bonded by inserting reinforcement/ 20 swg. black iron jalli and extra labour shall be
included in the rates.
➢ Joints: When the brick surface are to be plastered, the joints shall be raked to a depth of
5 mm when the mortar is green, so as to provide good key to plaster. Where plaster or
pointing is not provided, the joints shall be struck flush and finished immediately.
• Half brick work:

➢ Half brick thick and brick on edge walls shall be provided with 20 swg. wire netting
reinforcement. For half brick thick wall and brick on edge wall, wire netting shall be
provided in every third course and in alternate course, respectively, according to
standard practice, with galvanized staples. Wire netting for the purpose shall be 40 mm
mesh made of 20 swg. black soft iron wire.
• Brick flat soling:

➢ For soling, the bricks shall be first class picked jhama of approved quality; sound, hard,
tough, durable, dense, clean, and free from soft spots, cracks, decay and other defects.
Brick bats shall not be used. All the fillings shall be watered and compacted to get
maximum consolidation. The cushioning will consist of local sand.
➢ The bricks shall be laid on flat surface (unless otherwise specified) touching each other.
Brick shall be laid in parallel rows, in breaking-bond or herring-bone bond pattern as
directed and firmly embedded, true to line and filled with local sand. Measurement shall
be in sq. m.
• Expansion and separation joints:

➢ Location of joints shall strictly be as shown on approved drawings. Expansion joints
shall be as shown in drawings and specified in the Schedule of items. Expansion joint
filler boards and sealing strips shall have minimum transverse joints. Transverse
joints shall meet the approval of the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge.
➢ Separation joints shall be with standard waterproof paper or with alkathene sheets
about 1 mm thickness. Length and sealing of laps shall be decided in consultation
with the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge.
• Mouldings, cornices, drip course:

Page 49 of 97
➢ These shall be as per drawings. Bricks shall be cut and dressed as required. If no
subsequent finish is envisaged, these shall be rubbed to correct profile with
carborandum stone.
• Curing:
➢ For walls made of AAC blocks, only surfaces exposed to direct sun or strong hot
winds during summer, mist spraying or temporary covering should be applied.
➢ Brick masonry work shall be cured by keeping it wet for ten days from the date of
laying. At the end of days work, top surface of masonry shall be kept wet by ponding.
• Materials for brick works:
Sr. no. Brick for wall Fly Ash

1. Brick for wall in toilet Earthen brick.
2. Brick for soling/ other Local jhamma bricks.
purposes
3. All internal walls in Fly Ash
partions
(iii) Damp proof course:

Unless otherwise specified, damp-proof course shall be 40 mm thick ‘artificial stone’ in
proportion 1: 1.5: 3 of cement: sand: stone-chips (10 mm down) with admixture of a water
proofing compound as approved by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge. The percentage of
admixture shall be as per manufacturer’s specifications but not less than 3% by weight of
cement. The top surface shall be double chequered and cured by ponding for ten days. A coat
of bitumen of grade 80/100 shall be applied over the course.
(iv) Surface drains: Surface drains are to be completed with foundation works and finishing as
described:
• 125 mm (5”) or 250 (10”) thick brick in cement mortar (1: 5) on wall side or as per
drawing.
• 250 mm (10”) thick brick in cement mortar (1: 5) on outer side.
• Bed of one jhama brick flat soling and 100 mm (4”) thick cement concrete (1: 2: 4) with
(1:4) cement plaster and neat cement finish as specified in schedule.
• Channel of 250 mm (10”) finished with overall width 662 mm (26.1/2”) laid to proper
gradient with a minimum of 75 mm (3”) in depth to invert at the starting point to finished
with 20 mm cement plaster (1: 4) finished smooth with angles rounded off. Unless
otherwise shown in drawing the gradient shall be 1 in 200. However, this gradient has to
be finally corrected and fixed to suit the site requirement.
• Excavation to suit the gradient of drain and site requirement.
(v) Rates to include: Apart from other factors mentioned elsewhere in this contract, the rates for
items of brick work shall be including for the following:
• All labour, materials, use of tools and other items incidental to the satisfactory
completion of brick masonry work at all heights and levels with all leads and lifts.
• Erecting and removing of all scaffolding, ladder and plant required for execution of the
work to the height, depth and shapes as shown on the plan approved by the Architect/
Engineer-in-charge and maintaining the scaffolding till the surface finishing works are
completed including extra labour and materials for using cut bricks in the construction of
Page 50 of 97
wall of varying thickness other than one brick, one and half bricks, half brick and brick on
edge walls, as per drawings and inclusive of all necessary bye work.
• Constructing brick work through to lines, levels, batters, pillars, curved projection,
cutting, tooting, etc. in strict conformity with the drawings and to any position or shape,
to any heights or levels, including racking out joints and housing frames, fixtures, etc. and
of all materials.
• Curing brick work at all heights, depths and levels.
• Extra labour, materials and bye work for bending brick work to R.C. work as specified.
• Removing of all stains and adhering mortar lumps on the brick work surface.
• Cost of reinforcement in half brick walls and brick on edge walls.
• Raking out joints for receiving plaster as specified.
• Providing, forming and/ or cutting grooves, chases, channel holes/ openings for
electrical, air-conditioning, plumbing and drainage work, even though they may not be
shown in the drawing, including mending the damages to the required finish of the
adjoining surface after completion of the work including scaffolding, additional
shuttering, reinforcement/ fixtures, welding in position, plastering, curing etc. as directed
and to the entire satisfaction of the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC/ Engineer-in-charge.
• Rates quoted for damp proof course shall include –

➢ Concreting to the required thickness as mentioned in the schedule of item.
➢ Cleaning the top of brick wall and providing checkered mark impression on the
concrete surface with expanded metal or other approved device and curing.
➢ All side shuttering.
➢ All concrete admixture and cement grouting for jointing and all bye work.
(vi) Measurements:
• Half brick work and brick on edge walls shall be measured in ‘sqm’ unless otherwise
mentioned;
• One brick wall and thicker walls shall be measured in ‘cum’, brick walls up to and
including 3 brick in thickness should be measured in multiples of half bricks which shall
be deemed to be inclusive of mortar joints. Width more than three bricks in walls will be
measured actually and limited to the width specified.
• No deduction or addition shall be made on any account for:
➢ Ends of dissimilar materials (i.e. joists, beams, lintels, posts, girders, rafters, purloins,
trusses, corbels, steps, etc.) up to 500 sqm in section.
• For details of measurements not mentioned elsewhere in the contract, the method of
measurement shall be as per relevant IS code.
(e) Finish to masonry and concrete:
Scope: This specification covers supply and furnishing, installation, repairing, finishing, curing, testing,
maintenance till handing over of finished items for masonry and concrete. This also includes work to be done
to make the surface suitable for receiving the finishing treatment.
(i) Some of the codes applicable for this section:

• IS: 1200 - 2002 : Code for Measurement.
• IS: 1542 –2003 : Sand for plaster- specification.
Page 51 of 97
• IS: 1661 - 2001 :Code of practice for cement and cement-lime plaster finish on walls
and ceilings.
• IS: 4101 - 2000 : Code of practice for external facings and veneers.
(ii) Preparation of surface:

• All joints in masonry walls to be raked. R.C.C. surface shall be properly hacked to get
good key to the plaster. All dust, oil and extraneous matter shall be brushed down with
stiff wire brush and thoroughly washed with water. All laitance shall be removed from
concrete to be plastered. The wall surface to be plastered shall be kept wet for 6 hours
before plastering is commenced.
• Prior to actual plastering and finishing work, the approval of the Architect/ Engineer-in-
charge shall be obtained as to the acceptability of the surface preparation.
9. Plastering:
(a) Mortar:
For sand cement plaster, sand and cement in the proportion as specified in the drawings/ schedule of
quantities shall be mixed dry on a watertight platform and minimum water added to achieve working
consistency. No plaster, which has stood for more than half an hour, shall be used. Water to be added to
plaster that shows tendency to become dry to make it remain workable.
(i) Proportion of mortar: Unless otherwise mentioned, the plaster for walls, lintels and column
shall be done with cement mortar consisting of one part cement and six parts of sand by
volume. In the case of ceiling, ceiling beams, projected slabs, sills, chajja, marquise domes etc.
the mortar should be mixed in the proportion 1: 4 (1 cement : 4 sand) and shall be as per IS:
1542 - 1960 as applicable to wall and ceiling plastering. Rough cast plaster shall consist of two
coats – under layer of 1: 5 (1 cement: 5 sand) cement plaster and top layer of 1: 3 (1 cement: 3
sand). Not more cement mortar shall be prepared than can be used up within half an hour.
(ii) Application of plaster:

• The mortar shall be applied evenly with force on the surface to be plastered. The sponge
mortar surface of cement plaster shall be finished at once by rubbing with a trowel till
the cement appears on surface. All corners, angles and junctions shall be made truly
vertical and horizontal as the case may be and carefully and neatly finished. Rounding off
corners and junctions, where required shall be done without extra charge. The mortar
shall adhere to the surface intimately when set and there should be no hollow sound
when struck. The thickness of plaster shall be of 12 mm (min) over entire surface of
interior brick wall and R.C.C. surface; 19/ 20 mm over stone/ AAC walls and external brick
walls and 6 mm over plaster for ceiling, project slab, walls, chajja, marquis, domes,
exposed surface of beam, etc.
• Plaster, when more than 12 mm thick, shall be applied in two coats – a base coat
followed by a finishing coat. Thickness of base coat shall be sufficient to fill up all
unevenness in the surface; no single coat, however, shall exceed 12 mm in thickness. The
lower coat shall be thicker than the upper coat; the overall thickness of the coats shall
not be less than the minimum thickness shown on the drawings. The undercoat shall be
allowed to dry and shrink before applying the second coat of plaster. The undercoat shall
Page 52 of 97
be scratched or roughened before it is fully hardened to form a mechanical key. The

method of application of plaster shall be ‘thrown on’ rather than ‘applied by trowel’.
• To ensure even thickness and true surface, patches of plaster about 100 mm to 150 mm
square or wooden screed 75 mm wide and of the thickness of the plaster, shall be fixed
vertically about 2000 mm or 3000 mm apart, to act as gauges. The finished wall surface
shall be true to plumb, and the Contractor shall, without any extra cost to the Engineer-
in-charge, make up any irregularity in the brickwork/ AAC block work with plaster. All
vertical edges of the brick pillars, door jambs etc. shall be chamfered or rounded off. All
drips, grooves, moldings and cornices shall be done with special care to maintain true
lines, levels and profiles. Any plastering that is damaged during work shall be repaired
and entire work left in good condition after removal of debris etc.
• Plastered surfaces shall be broomed down to make a smooth, even surface free from
undulations, holes etc and obtain a uniform bluish hew.
(iii) Finish:
• Standard finish: The standard finish shall be used unless otherwise specified in the
drawings or sought by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge. The plastered surface shall rub
in well to an even plain with a wooden float for external surface and finished smooth
with a steel trowel for internal surface. Wherever any special treatment to the plastered
surface is indicated, the work shall be done exactly as shown on the drawings or as per
schedule of works, to entire satisfaction of the Architect/ Engineer/ Engineer-in-charge
regarding the texture, colour and finish.
• Neat cement finish: Immediately after achieving a true plastered surface with the help of
a wooden straight edge, the entire area shall be uniformly treated with a paste of neat
cement at the rate of minimum 2.2 kg per sqm and rubbed smooth with a trowel to
uniform finished thickness of 3 mm only.
(iv) Pointing to Masonry:

The brickwork shall be brushed down with a stiff wire brush, so as to remove all loose dust
from the joints and thoroughly washed with water. Mortar consisting of 1 part cement and 3
parts of clean, sharp, well graded sand by volume shall be pressed carefully into the joints and
finished suitably to shape as shown on the drawings. Any surplus mortar shall be scrapped off
the wall face leaving the surface clean.
(v) Curing: All newly plastered surfaces shall be watered for a minimum period of ten days, by an
approved method, and shall be protected from excessive heat and sunlight by suitable
approved means. Moistening shall commence, as soon as the plaster has hardened sufficiently
and not susceptible to damage. Each coat of plaster shall be kept damp continuously, for at
least two days, and then dried, before applying the next coat. The pointed surface vide 9.10.3.5
shall be kept wet for at least three days for curing.
(b) Sand faced cement plaster:
(i) General: Specification for materials and scaffolding etc. shall be followed for sand faced
cement plaster.
(ii) Preparation of surface:
Page 53 of 97
• The surface to be plastered shall first be thoroughly cleaned down. All joints shall be
racked out in case of brick work/ stone masonry and closely hacked and wire brushed in
case of concrete, as per the relevant masonry/ concrete/ formwork items. The surface to
be plastered shall be well wetted for a minimum period of 6 hours before starting the
work. The mortar for all plaster work shall be cement sand mortar of mix as specified in
the schedule of quantities.
• Double scaffolding required for facility of construction shall be provided by the
Contractor at his own expenses wherever directed by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge.
Scaffolding shall be created with steel pipes of adequate strength so as to be safe for all
the dead, live and impact loads likely to sustain by it during construction operations.
• The Contractor shall take all measure to ensure the safety of the work and workmen. Any
instruction of the Architect/ Engineer/ Engineer-in-charge in this respect shall be
complied with. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for any incident of injury or
damage to nearby property and persons resulting from faulty scaffolding, defective
ladders and materials or otherwise arising out of his default in this respect.
• Proper scaffolding shall be provided to allow easy approach for workmen and supervisory
staff to every part of the work. Any damage done to the windows, doors etc. during
execution of the work shall be made back to the original conditions by the Contractor at
his own cost. Since safety is the utmost concern, steel pipe scaffolding is to be used
strictly.
(iii) Workmanship:
• The surface to be plastered shall first be dubbed out with cement mortar to cover all
irregularities and faces up to proudest part. The dubbing coat which shall be of
proportion as specified in schedule of works and a 12 mm. thick layer shall then be
applied/ scored and keys shall be formed on the surface by thoroughly combing it with
heavy horizontal lines about 12 mm. apart and about 3 mm. deep when mortar has just
set.
• The cement mortar for sand faced plaster shall have washed and approved sand with
slightly larger proportions of coarse materials, but not exceeding 3 mm in sand particle
size. The proportion of cement to sand shall be as specified in the schedule. The water is
gradually added to make the mixture homogenous. The thickness of finishing coat
excluding key shall be 8 mm. After application, the surface should be finished with a
wooden float lined with cork closely pricked on with a wet sponge tapped gently to bring
sand particles into prominence.
• Before plastering work is taken up for chajjas etc, all chajjas and any other horizontal
portion shall be cleaned of set mortar that might have been fallen at the time of
plastering at higher elevation. Junction of wall and chajja shall be rounded off
simultaneously as directed by the Architect/ Engineer/ Engineer-in-charge.
(c) Punning with cement based white putty:

Cement wall putty is water resistant white cement based putty ideal for use on concrete/ mortar walls
(internal and external) and ceilings. It fills the fine pores of mortar/ concrete walls and ceilings and provides a
white, smooth and dry surface, essential for painting. Two coats of the putty should be applied on surface
with average thickness of 1.5 mm. The material shall be procured by the Contractor from manufacturers
approved by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge. Skilled workmen shall be involved in application.
(i) Application procedure:

Page 54 of 97
• Remove all loosely adhering material from the wall surface with the help of emery stone,
putty blade or wire brush and clean water. The substrate should be clean, free from dust,
grease and loose materials. Dry and absorbent surfaces should be moistened with
sufficient quantity of clean water.
• Mix putty with clean water slowly to make a paste. Continue the mixing for 10- 15
minutes till a uniform paste is formed (manufacturer’s specifications should be followed
regarding water volume).
• After thoroughly mixing putty apply the first coat on already moistened wall surface from
bottom to upward direction uniformly with the help of putty blade. This would ensure
less wastage and proper finish. After drying of first coat of putty just rub the surface
gently with west sponge or rub the surface very gently with the putty blade to remove
the loose particles.
• Allow the surface to dry for 3 hours and then apply second coat of putty. Leave the
surface to dry completely. After drying of second coat remove marks, with the help of
moist sponge or rub the surface very gently with the putty blade. Leave the surface to
dry for overnight.
• Always prepare a required quantity of putty only and use it within 2-3 hrs. of mixing with
water. Thickness of each coat is to be limited to a maximum of 1.5 mm thickness.
(ii) Precautions during application:

Putty should be done over fully cured surface. Mixing of putty is very important and hence
extreme care is to be taken for proper and thorough mixing with hand or mechanical stirrer in
order to get best results. It is recommended not to rub putty strongly and harshly with rough
emery paper. This breaks the film formed over putty, which decreases the water repellence
properties. The total thickness of each coat should be limited to a maximum of 1.5 mm.
(iii) Coverage: The coverage area of putty on smooth normal mortar wall is 20 to 25 Sq. Ft/ Kg/
mm in double coat. The coverage area, however, will depend upon the quality of the substrate.
(iv) Tests and curing: As per manufacturer’s specifications.
(d) Acceptance criteria:

Finish to masonry and concrete shall fully comply with the specifications, approved samples and instructions
of the Architect/ PMC/ Engineer/ Engineer-in-charge with respect to lines, levels, thickness, colour, texture,
pattern and any other special criterion as mentioned in the specification or shown on drawings.
(e) Rates to include:

Apart from other factors mentioned elsewhere in the contract rates for the item of plaster shall include for
the following:
(i) Preparing the surface to receive the plaster.
(ii) Providing cement plaster with screened sand, of the specified average thickness to the
required finish, line and level, at all heights, with all lead and lift and adopting all safety
measures.
(iii) All labour, materials, use of tools, consumables and equipment required to complete the
plastering as per specification.
(iv) Curing for ten days.
(v) Any moulding work if shown on the drawing or as specified unless separately provided in the
tender.
(vi) Labour for plastering the surface in two operations when thickness of plaster is more than 12
mm thick.
Page 55 of 97
(vii) Plaster work in bends, jambs, sills, crises, rounded angles, fair edges, narrow returns, quarks,
‘V’ joints splays, drip moldings, making good to metal frame, junctions with skirting or dados,
narrow openings, holes, conduits, timber, sills, holes, sill brackets, railings, etc. and making
good all damages after all the sub-contractors or nominated sub-contractors have done their
work.
(viii) Neat cement finish when specified in the item.
(ix) Erecting, strong and stout, double scaffolding including maintaining the same.
(f) Mode of Measurement:

Plaster shall be measured in square meter. The measurement of wall plastering shall be taken between the
walls or partitions (the dimensions before plastering shall be taken) for lengths, and from the top of floor or
skirting to the ceiling for height.
10. Structural steelwork fabrication:

(a) Scope:
This work involves shop layout, fabrication, inspection and erection of light structures, purlins, side runners,
anchor bolts etc. for car shed, steel door frame and shutters, window frames and shutters, grills, ladder for
tanks and safety cages, hand railings for fire escape platform and staircases etc. for the building. Supply of
materials, consumables, labour, tools, tackles, plant, equipment, machinery, staging, scaffoldings, and other
incidentals necessary for completion of the work satisfactorily meeting all criteria of good engineering
practice.
(i) Some of the codes applicable for this section:
IS: 226 – 1975 : Specification for structural steel.

IS: 808 – 2004 : Dimensions for hot rolled steel beam, column, channel and angle
sections.
IS: 814 – 2004 : Covered electrodes for manual metal arc welding carbon and carbon
manganese steel - specification.
IS: 816 – 1996 : Code of practice for use of metal arc welding for general
construction in mild steel.
IS: 1038 – 2001 : Specification for steel doors, windows and ventilators.
IS: 1161 – 1998 : Steel tubes for structural purposes –specification.
IS: 1361 – 2006 : Specification for steel windows for industrial buildings.
IS: 1367 – 2002 : Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners.
IS: 2062 – 2011 : Hot rolled medium and high tensile structure steel- specification.
IS: 4351 – 2003 : Steel door frames.
IS: 4736 –1998 : Specification of hot dip zinc coatings on mild steel tubes.
IS: 7452 – 2003 : Hot rolled steel sections for doors, windows and ventilators-
specification.
(ii) Steel sections used for fabrication of doors, windows etc shall be of standard rolled steel
sections vide IS mentioned above or as specified in the drawing and schedule. Steel sheets for
frames, shutters, louver blades etc. shall be of gauge mentioned in drawings and schedule.
(b) Mild steel grills and gate:

These should be made of the best quality material and shall be of the shape, size and pattern as per
schedule of quantities and drawing; shall be free from dust, burrs, blisters and cracks. Welding shall
be neatly done and all slag chipped off, before primer coat is applied. Grills/ gate shall be true to
shape and accurate in dimensions so that they fit exactly into the door/ window frame. They shall be
Page 56 of 97
fitted into the frame by means of 10 mm square steel lugs welded to the grill. If screws are used, the
screw heads shall be welded to the grill and welding is ground off neatly. Spot welding only will not
be accepted.
(c) Material:
• Structural steel : Grade E 250 A (IS: 2062-2011)
• Electrode : MMA for mild steel (IS: 814-2004)
• Tubes : Medium, grade Yst 240 (IS: 1161-1998)
• Bolt, nut, washer : Grade 4.6 (IS: 1367-2002)
• The Contractor shall furnish test certificate for materials as far as practicable. The minimum
thickness of gussets shall be 6 mm and base plate shall be 10 mm. MS anchor bolt shall not be
less than 12 mm dia.
(d) Storage:
All materials shall be stored to prevent any rusting or damage and maintain them in a clean and good
for use condition. Electrodes shall be packed, stored and protected from weather effects as specified
by the manufacturer.
(e) Workmanship:
For fabrication and erection, the Contractor shall follow drawings supplied by the Architect/
Engineer-in-charge. Wherever necessary, the Contractor shall prepare fabrication drawings and
obtain approval from Architect/ PMC/ Engineer. The Contractor shall employ skilled fabricators and
welders for carrying out the job following good engineering practice.
• At the outset, all plates, bars and sections shall be flattened, straightened and made free from
twist before further work done on them. Welding shall meet the requirements of design size
and made free from defects like spatters, undercut etc. Welding shall be visually inspected for
cracks and in case of any doubt, die penetration check may be done. Cracks, if found, shall be
rectified by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Architect/ PMC/ Engineer.
(f) Bill of materials:

The Contractor shall prepare a bill of material and bolt, nut, washer schedule and submit the same
for verification and approval of the Architect/ Engineer. Payment will be made based on it. Rate shall
include cost of materials, fabrication, transport to site, fixing etc. complete with one coat of shop
paint. Rate shall be in sq.m. or kg. as specified in the schedule of works.
(g) Protective coat of paint:

The shop paint for steel structure shall be best quality lead or zinc chromate primer paint from
approved manufacturer. All surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust, grease, loose mill scales etc.
and given one coat of shop primer paint. Portions which would be inaccessible after assembly of
units shall be given an extra coat of paint before assembly. Where called for in the schedule, all steel
structure shall be hot dip galvanized to give a coating weight of 1.5 to 2.0 oz per s.ft. One coat of zinc
chromate primer shall then be applied as shop paint.
(h) Assembly and erection at site:

In general, the fixing of steel structural items shall conform to IS: 1081 - 2006 and as shown in
drawings. The Contractor shall assemble and install all steel structural works as shown on drawing
keeping proper lines and level and in approved workman-like-manner to give trouble free
installation. The installation shall be done according to the drawings and/ or as approved by the
Architect/ Engineer/ PMC. Necessary holes, chases etc. required for fixing shall be made by the
Page 57 of 97
Contractor and made good again as per original, after installation without any extra charge. After
installation of steel structural items, all abrasions to shop-coat of paint shall be retouched and made
good with the same quality of paint used in shop coat.
(i) Measurement and rate:

The entire structural steel fabrication work shall be measured in kg weight after entire fabrication
work is over and material transported to site.
11. Specification for scaffolding:

(a) Scope:
This specification is to provide maximum protection to all personnel and workers involved in this work. The
contractor shall follow the guidelines strictly.
Some of the codes applicable for this section:
IS: 814 – 2004 : Covered electrodes for manual metal ARC welding of steel.
IS: 1038 – 2001 : Specification for steel doors, windows and ventilators.
IS: 1161 - 1998 : Steel tubes for structural purpose specification.
IS: 1367 - 2002(Part - 3) : Mech. properties of carbon and alloy steel bolts, screws. studs.
IS: 2062 - 2011 : Hot rolled medium and high tensile structural steel.
IS: 2750 - 2006 : Specification for steel scaffoldings.
IS: 4014 - 2006(Part - 1) : Code of practice for steel tubular scaffolding, Materials.
IS: 4014 - 2005(Part - 2) : Code of practice for steel tubular scaffolding, safety regulations.
IS: 4014 - 2006 : Code of practice for steel tubular scaffolding.
IS: 5491 - 1969 : Code of practice for laying in situ granolithic concrete floor top.
IS: 7452 - 1990 : Hot rolled steel section for doors, windows and ventilators.
ISO 9001 - 2008 : Quality management system.
(b) General:
(i) No scaffold shall be erected, moved, dismantled or altered except under the supervision of
competent persons (that is qualified and authorized certifying engineer) and by competent
workmen possessing adequate experience of such work under valid permit. All materials for
any scaffold shall be inspected by competent person on each occasion before use.
(ii) Only cup-lock type scaffolding material shall be used. In case it is not feasible to use cup-lock
type scaffolding material, permission shall be obtained from Authorized certifying Engineer in
consultation with the Architect/ PMC for use of other type of steel scaffolding materials. Steel
scaffolding shall be erected and used in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations,
proper seating and locking of all connections, using the corrective devices.
(iii) Use of bamboo scaffolding, wooden planks and manila or coir rope is strictly prohibited.
Barrels, boxes, loose tile blocks, loose pile of bricks or other unstable objects shall not be used
to support planks used as working platforms under any circumstances.
(iv) For any overhead job at height of 2.0 meters and above, scaffolding with railing and toe board
is to be erected at working platforms. It is mandatory to use double hook type safety belt with
fall arrester and safety nets in construction and maintenance activities. However, during
erection of scaffolding, only safety belt as above shall be used. For plastering and painting work
for outside surface, a gondola or electromechanical jhula may be used.
Page 58 of 97
(v) Scaffolds and their components must be capable of supporting without failure at least 4 times
the maximum intended load i.e. safety factor of 4 to be ensured. No alteration should be made
that might impair the strength of such structures; no improvised, make-shift or substandard
scaffold should be permitted even for the most temporary use.
(vi) During setting up and dismantling of scaffolds, warning signs, safety cordons and other safety
measures shall be undertaken to ensure safety.
(vii) The footing or anchorage for scaffolds shall be sound, rigid and capable of carrying the
maximum intended load without settling or displacement. Unstable objects viz., barrels, boxes,
loose bricks or concrete blocks shall not be used to support scaffolds or planks.
(viii) Base plates with shank of size minimum 5 cm long for scaffolding shall be provided. The base
plate shall be of mild steel of minimum 6 mm thickness and of at least 15 cm x 15 cm sizes.
(ix) Overhead protection must be provided for worker on a scaffold exposed to overhead hazards.
Slippery condition on scaffold shall be eliminated immediately after they occur.
(x) Drawings and specifications of all tube and coupler scaffolds must be designed by a qualified
engineer competent in this field considering the criticality of the structure. Scaffolding above
40 mtrs height, if to be erected, must be designed by professional.
(xi) Heavy duty tube and coupler scaffold shall have all posts, runners and bracing of only steel
material as per IS: 1161 - 1963 and shall also satisfy IS: 2750 - 1963. No dissimilar/ non-
standard pipes or sections shall be used in scaffold work. In general, steel tubes of 40 mm NB
heavy class of minimum 4.00 mm thickness or 4.37 kg per running metre weight are to be used.
No free-standing scaffolds shall be higher than 4 times the minimum base dimension.
(xii) Posts must be accurately spaced, erected on suitable bases, and maintained in plumb. The
posts shall not be spaced more than 2.0 mtrs. The poles, legs or uprights of scaffolds must be in
plumb; securely and rigidly braced to prevent swaying and displacement.
(xiii) If scaffolds are to be used to a great extent or for a long period of time, a regular plank
stairway, wide enough to allow two persons to pass shall be erected. Such stairway shall have
handrails on both sides.
(xiv) No stairway or run of slope 2 in 3 should be used. Where the slope of a stairway or run renders
additional foothold necessary, and in every case where slope is more than 1 in 4, stepping laths
to be provided.
(xv) The scaffolding must be strong and rigid, stiffened with necessary cross braces and always
decked and beard on the sills with closed board ceilings and swings to prevent any injury to
persons or materials.
(xvi) If for the interest of work, the Contractor has to erect scaffolding in other’s properties,
including local bodies or Corporation, the arrangement for the same including the cost of
licensing fees, etc. shall have to be borne by the Contractor and the Engineer-in-charge should
be kept free from any liability on this account.
(c) Plumbness:
(i) Scaffold should be erected in plumb to ensure structural capability of the system to maximum.
After erection of first tire of scaffold, check for plumbness and continue doing so as the scaffold
is built. Settlement or slight variations in the fit of the components may require additional
adjustments as tires are added to the scaffold tower. The scaffold frame should be checked for
plumbness after each tire is added to the scaffold. Each working deck must also be at level.
(ii) Runners/ ledgers shall be erected along the length of the scaffold, located on both inside and
outside posts at even heights. Runners/ ledgers shall be interlocked to the inside and outside
posts at even heights. Runners/ ledgers shall be interlocked to form continuous lengths and
Page 59 of 97
coupled to each post. The bottom Runners/ ledgers must be located as close to the base as
possible (300 mm). Runners/ ledgers shall not be spaced more than 2.0 mtrs on centres.
(iii) Cross bracing must be installed across the width of the scaffold at least every third set of posts
horizontally and every fourth runner vertically. Such bracing must extend diagonally from inner
and outer runners upward to the next outer and inner runners.
(iv) The entire scaffold shall be tied to and securely braced against the building/ structure at
intervals not to exceed 10 mtrs horizontally and 8.5 mtrs vertically. Head clearance of minimum
2.5 mtrs must be provided where pedestrian traffic is involved.
(d) Working platforms (including working stages):

(i) Every working platform more than 2.0 mtr high from which a person is likely to fall shall be of
steel plates/ planks/ jalis and shall be:
• Closely boarded, planked or plated;
• At least 700 mm wide if the platform is used as a footing only and not for the deposit/
keeping of any material.
• At least 900 mm wide if the platform is used for deposit of materials.
• At least 1100 mm wide if the platform is used for the support of any higher platform.
• At least 1300 mm wide if the platform is one upon which stone is dressed or roughly
shaped.
• At least 1500 mm wide if the platform is used for the support of any higher platform and
is the one upon which stone is dressed or roughly shaped.
• Two metal plates/ planks shall not have more than 25 mm gap between them.
• Planks should be laid flat with an overlap, lengthwise, of at least 30 cm with the centre
of overlap directly over a bearer. Boards and planks used for the floors should be of
uniform thickness, closely laid and securely fastened in place.
• All lumber used in the construction of scaffold shall be sound, straight-grained, free from
cross-grains, shakes and loose and dead knots. It shall also be free from dry rot, large
checks, worm holes, or other defects impairing its strength and durability.
• All nails used in construction of scaffolds, staging and supports shall be of ample size and
used in sufficient quantities at each connection to develop the designed strength of
scaffold. Nails should penetrate to the holding piece to a depth of at least 12 times the
diameter of nail.
• All tools/ loose materials used for scaffold platform to be kept in boxes.
(ii) The distance between two consecutive transoms or other supports on which a platform rests
shall be fixed with due regard to the anticipated load and the nature of platform flooring. As a
general rule such transoms shall not be placed more than 1.0 mtr apart.
(iii) The minimum uniformly distributed design load per sq. m. of platform shall be 250 kg. Any
concentrated load at any point in the span shall not exceed the designed uniformly distributed
load. Planks shall not be less than 50 mm thick.
(iv) There shall be a screen or other protection suspended from the scaffold to catch materials that
may fall from above. Screen shall be extended beyond the edge of scaffold to catch any
material that may fall over the edges.
(e) Guard-rails and toe-board at working places:

(i) Every side of a working platform or working place, being a side thereof from which a person is
likely to fall, at a height of more than 2.0 mtr shall be provided with one or more suitable
guard-rail of adequate strength, to a height of at least 900 mm (but maximum 1200 mm) above
the platform or place and above any raised standing place on the platform, and with toe-
Page 60 of 97
boards of minimum 150 mm height and so placed as to prevent fall of persons, materials and
tools from platform or place.
(ii) The rear of outer side of every scaffolding, platform and ramp more than 2.0 mtr above
surrounding ground or solid construction, or adjacent to deep holes, excavations, high tension
electrical wires shall be provided with a substantial guard rail of standard construction
consisting of top and intermediate rails and toe-boards all supported by posts and securely
connected to scaffold at intervals of not more than 2.4 mtr.
(iii) Guard rails/ toe-boards need not be provided where platform is to be used for temporary
works and where other arrangements are in place.
(f) Coupling devices:

(i) Every scaffold manufacturer provides coupling devices to join scaffold frames together in the
vertical plane. These devices are sometimes omitted, with the belief that the bearing weight of
the scaffold and its load will keep the frame above firmly resting on the frame below. This will
probably hold true until the scaffold moves or sways. Then the joint may pull apart causing a
scaffold collapse. Therefore, coupling devices must always be used and installed properly on
every leg of scaffold at every joint as assembly proceeds.
(ii) A safe and convenient means of access shall be provided to the platform or scaffold. Means of
access may be a portable ladder, fixed ladder, ramp or a stairway. Access/ escape ladders must
be provided on at least two sides of the scaffolds. Cross braces or frame work as means of
access to the working surface shall not be permitted. Ladder shall be of rigid construction
having sufficient strength for the intended loads and made of metal and all ladders shall be
maintained well for safe working condition. The ladder shall be given an inclination not steeper
than 1 in 4 (1 horizontal and 4 vertical). Ladders shall not be used for climbing carrying
materials in hands.
(iii) Ladders shall not be spliced. Where splicing is unavoidable, it shall be done only under the
supervision of competent person. No ladder shall be over 9.0 mtr. in length. Landing platform
shall be provided suitably. The width between side rails in rung ladder shall not be less than 30
cm for 3 mtr length ladder. Uniform step spacing of not more than 30 cm shall be kept.
(g) Overhead protection:

Overhead protection shall be provided on the scaffold whenever persons are working at higher places. This
protection shall not be 3 mtrs above the scaffold floor and shall be of planks or other suitable materials.
(h) Use of scaffold:

(i) Good housekeeping shall be maintained at all times upon scaffolding, platforms and ramps.
Excessive storage of materials thereupon shall be avoided. Care must be taken to avoid
accumulation of small objects, viz. boards, tools, pieces of reinforcing steel, waste concrete
which may easily be disturbed or knock off. Hand rails shall be kept in good and repaired
condition and securely nailed or fastened. Scaffold shall be cleared of all tools, materials and
rubbish at the end of each working day/ shift.
(ii) Persons shall not be permitted on scaffolds when the platform or guard rails are slippery.
Persons shall not be permitted on scaffolds during a storm or strong winds.
(iii) Suspended scaffolds shall never be used for storage of stone or heavy materials. Swinging
scaffolds to be avoided.
(iv) Double scaffold shall be mandatorily used in brick work, plastering and painting works.
(i) Inspection criterion:

Page 61 of 97
Inspection of scaffold should be carried out to ascertain that:
• The scaffold is of suitable type.

• Material used in its construction are sound and of sufficient strength.
• The scaffold is of sound construction and stable.
• The required safeguards are in position.
• Scaffolds should be inspected and certified
• Before being taken into use, display board ‘safe to use’ shall be put. Scaffold fit for use shall be
provided with GREEN tags whereas scaffolds not fit for shall be provided with RED tags.
• In case scaffold is not certified by competent person, Red tag shall be displayed.
• After any alteration or interruption in use of scaffolds.
• Ascertain health of the persons working on scaffolding job.
• As scaffolds have to remain in position normally for many weeks, they must be inspected at
least once a week to make sure that nothing has gone wrong since erection. In addition, they
must always be inspected after a spell of bad weather which might have affected their stability.
• The inspections must be carried out by someone who knows the faults to look for and how
they may be put right. The result of inspection to be recorded and repair works undertaken.
(j) Co-ordination with other contractors:

Co-ordination with all contractors and sub-contractors working for construction of this building is important
for smooth execution of the job. The Contractor shall have to allow other trades to make reasonable use of
his scaffolding as directed by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge. The Contractor shall share scaffolding
platform wherever required and ensure safety of all workmen involved. No misunderstanding or unjust
action shall be tolerated wherever workers safety is in jeopardy.
(i) Dismantling: The dismantling of scaffold shall be carefully done under experienced supervision.
Care shall be taken not to drop small, loose objects when removing scaffold planks. All nails
shall be promptly removed from scaffold planks and planks safely piled.
(ii) Precaution against hazard:

• No uninsulated electric wire shall be allowed within 3 mtr. of the working platform,
stairway etc of the scaffold. While carrying bars, rods or pipes of any conducting material
of length greater than 3 mtr. in the vicinity of electric wires, special care to be taken that
these bars do not touch the electric wires.
• Care shall be taken against any possibility of catching fire. In suspended scaffolds, instead
of blowtorch or other flame for removing paints, only wire ropes not less than 10 mm dia
shall be used.
• Care to be taken to see that no part of a scaffold is struck by a truck or heavy moving
equipment and no material dumped against it. Proper lighting shall be provided in the
scaffold area and on thoroughfare.
(iii) Lift for construction: A lift is required for lifting materials and manpower for construction.
Number of winches and buckets proposed to be used for smooth carry forward of this work to
be indicated by the Contractor. Decision on this score shall be done in consultation with the
Architect and Engineer-in-charge. Cost towards this facility to be subsumed in the contract.
12. Painting:
Page 62 of 97
(a) Scope:
(i) This specification covers painting of interior and exterior surfaces of woodwork, masonry,
concrete plaster, miscellaneous structural, metal doors, windows, grills and all other steel
items, rain water down comer, soil, waste water and service water pipes, etc. as shown on
drawings, schedule of works and as directed by the Architect/ PMC/ Engineer/ Engineer-in-
charge. The scope includes supply of painting materials, consumables, tools, tackles, plant,
equipment, scaffolding, labour etc. and incidentals to complete the painting work satisfactorily
as per good engineering practice.
(ii) The Contractor shall follow all safety rules and ensure usage of safety gears and PPE’s by the
workmen as required and necessary, like belt, helmet etc. as the Contractor will be solely
responsible in case of accident, if any.
(iii) The Contractor shall plan and execute his job in such a manner so as not to create
inconvenience to local people and other Contractors working in the vicinity. The Contractor
shall take all precautions to prevent damage, disfiguration or staining to work of other trades
or installations. The Contractor shall fully guarantee all material and workmanship for the
entire protective system.
(iv) Some of the codes applicable for this section:

• IS : 1200 – 2002 : Method of measurement of building and civil engineering works.
• IS: 2074 –2002 : Ready mixed paint, air drying, red oxide zinc chrome, priming
specification.
• IS : 2338 - 2000 : Painting of woodwork.
• IS : 5410 - 2009 : Cement Paint.
(b) Materials:
(i) Materials shall be of highest grade premium quality product of well-known manufacturer
approved by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge. It shall be delivered to site in original sealed
containers, bearing brand name, manufacturer’s name and colour shade with labels intact and
seals unbroken. All materials shall be subject to inspection, analysis by the Architect/ PMC/
Engineer before approval. It is desired that materials of one manufacturer only shall be used as
far as possible and each paint shade to be obtained from the same manufacturing batch. All
paint shall be subject to analysis from random samples taken from painters bucket at site, if so
desired by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge.
(ii) All primer paint shall be compatible with the material of the surface to be finished as well as
with the subsequent finishing paints to be applied on it.
(iii) All unspecified materials such as shellac, turpentine or linseed oil shall be of the highest quality
available and shall conform to IS standards. All materials shall be obtained from reputed
manufacturers under approval of Architect/ Engineer-in-charge.
(iv) All colour shall be as per painting schedule. Tinting and matching shall be done to the
satisfaction of the Architect/ PMC/ Engineer/ Engineer-in-charge. Samples shall be furnished
before hand for approval.
(c) Application:
(i) Painting of interior walls: Interior walls have been classified in the following categories:
• Apartment: All interior plastered surfaces of each apartment to be rendered with white
putty punning as mentioned above.
Page 63 of 97
➢ Apartment owner shall take care of finish paint of his/ her choice and execute it
separately.
• Common hall, lift lobby, staircases and other areas:
➢ These areas include common hall at ground floor and lift lobbies in each floor. All
interior plastered surfaces of common hall and lift lobby, two staircases, mumty
rooms, pump room, toilet at ground floor; lift drive rooms, security room, car parking
and all other places to be rendered with white putty punning.
➢ Primer and paint over wall putty surface to be according to the drawings and
schedule of works. Pump room to have synthetic enamel paint over putty surface.
Acrylic emulsion paint shall be water-based acrylic co-polymer emulsion with rutile
titanium dioxide and other selected pigments and fungicide. It shall exhibit excellent
adhesion to plaster and cement surface and shall resist deterioration by alkali salts.
The paint film shall allow the moisture in wall to escape without peeling or blistering.
The paint after it is dried shall be able to withstand washing with mild soap and
water without any deterioration in colour, or without showing flaking, blistering or
peeling.
(ii) Painting of external wall:

• Paint material: Exterior paint shall be of good quality exterior grade acrylic elastomeric
paint, water repellant, UV and heat resistant, manufactured by reputed paint
manufacturer and suitable for exterior application, which can prevent patches of damp,
algae and fungal attack caused by wind driven rain and stand as weather shield for at
least ten years. Paint film formed on application should be sufficiently elastic to bridge
hairline cracks and maintain long lasting glow.
• This paint shall be brought to the site of work by the Contractor in its original containers
in sealed condition. The material shall be brought in at a time in adequate quantities to
suffice for the whole work or at least a fortnight's work. The empty containers shall not
be removed from the site of work till the relevant item of work has been completed and
permission obtained from the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC.
(iii) Preparation of surface:

• For new work, the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned off all mortar dropping, dirt, dust,
chalk, algae, fungus or moth, grease, flaking paint and other foreign matter by brushing
and washing; pitting in plaster shall be made good, surface imperfections such as cracks,
holes etc. should be repaired using white cement. Never apply putty or filling compound
while painting an exterior surface. The prepared surface shall have received the approval
of the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge after inspection of the surface and before painting
commenced.
• All mildewed surfaces shall be treated with approved fungicide viz. ammoniacal wash
consisting of 7 gm of copper carbonate dissolved in 80 ml of liquor ammonia and diluted
to 1 litre with water or 2.5 percent magnesium silico-fluoride solution and allowed to dry
thoroughly before paint is applied.
(iv) Application of primer: In case of freshly plastered walls, apply one coat of exterior acrylic
primer or weather shield alkali bloc after thinning with water in the ratio of 1:1 by volume for
best performance. All specifications in respect of base coat of water proofing cement paint
shall be followed as described in manufacturer’s specification.
Page 64 of 97
• Before pouring into smaller containers for use, the paint shall be stirred thoroughly in
its container, when applying also the paint shall be continuously stirred in the smaller
containers so that its consistency is kept uniform.
• Dilution ratio of paint with potable water can be altered taking into consideration
the nature of surface climate and as per recommended dilution given by manufacturer.
• In all cases, the manufacturer’s instructions and directions of the Architect/ Engineer/
PMC shall be followed meticulously.
• The lids of paint drums shall be kept tightly closed when not in use as by exposure to
atmosphere the paint may thicken and also be kept safe from dust.
• Paint shall be applied with a brush on the cleaned and smooth surface. Horizontal
strokes shall be given first and vertical strokes shall be applied immediately afterwards.
This entire operation will constitute one coat. The surface shall be finished as uniformly
as possible leaving no brush marks.
(v) Finishing paint:

• Colour and shade of finish paint shall be as shown in Architectural drawing or as directed
by Architect/ Engineer-in-charge. Apply two coats of weather resistant type paint
suitable for external application on normal, sound surfaces, with 4 to 6 hours in between
the coats. Apply third coat for darker areas such as parapet walls, sun shade borders etc.
as shown in drawings or as directed by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge.
(vi) Special precaution:

• Primer and finish paint shall be from the same manufacturer and shall be compatible
with each other. Paint manufacturer’s instruction shall be followed strictly. Stir the paint
thoroughly before use. Surface preparation, dilution of paints and application shall be
strictly as per the paint manufacturer’s instruction literature so as to keep the validity of
guarantee by the paint manufacturer.
• Containers to be stored in upright position, with lid tightly closed, in a cool dry place with
good ventilation all the time.
• Paint may be hazardous to human health. Follow all safety rules and instruction for
medical safety as prescribed by the paint manufacturer.
(vii) Scaffolding, protective measures:

• Scaffolding to be as per relevant clauses.
• Doors, windows, floors, articles of furniture etc. and such other parts of the building not
to be painted, shall be protected from being splashed upon. Splashing and droppings, if
any shall be removed by the Contractor at his own cost and the surfaces cleaned.
Damages, if any, to furniture or fittings and fixtures shall be recoverable from the
Contractor.
(viii) Measurements and rate:

• Length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm. and area shall be calculated in
sqm correct to two places of decimals.
• Rate shall include material, labour, tools, equipment, scaffolding etc to complete the
painting job as per specifications and instruction of Architect/ Engineer-in-charge.
13. Painting of fabricated steel items:

Page 65 of 97
a) Scope:
(i) Fabricated steel items shall include all steel frames, shutter, structure in car parking area and
shed in roof, grills, iron pipes, valves of water pipe lines and discharge services etc.
(ii) All surface defects on fabricated steel items likely to be detrimental to the protective painting
shall be removed. All rust and scales shall be removed by scrapping or by brushing with steel
wire brushes. Hard skin of oxide formed on the surface of wrought iron during rolling which
becomes loose by rusting, shall be removed.
(iii) All fins at saw cuts, burrs and sharp edges shall be similarly removed. All oil contamination and
grease shall be removed by solvent wash, and then wiped clean with dry cloth. All weld flux,
slag, fume, heat oxides and metal spatter in addition to mill scale or loose paint shall be
removed from the surface with power tool or hand tool to achieve a level of cleanliness
equivalent to Swedish pictorial standard St 3.
(iv) Finished surface shall be coated with two coats of zinc chromate primer (DFT of each coat = 35
micron) and two coats of synthetic enamel paint (DFT of each coat = 35 micron). The initial coat
of priming paint shall be carefully applied to ensure a thorough “wetting” of the prepared
surfaces. Paint may be applied using brush or spray guns but coats of paint shall be of specified
DFT and uniformly applied without sags, runs, spots, brush marks, damage or contamination.
Such irregularities if found shall be removed and the affected area recoated. The dry film
thickness of each coating applied shall be checked by means of an elcometer or microtester dry
film gauge.
(v) Each coat of paint shall be cured or dried properly before the application of the successive
coat. If time elapsed between successive coating is more than three (3) weeks, surface shall be
lightly rubbed with fine abrasive paper and all loose particles and dust shall be thoroughly
cleaned using compressed air jet, before application of subsequent coat.
(vi) For painting of steel items all paints shall be of good quality and purchased from reputed
manufacturer. Colour and shade shall be as per drawing and as per sample of paint approved
by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge. The colour shall be uniform and should not vary from
piece to piece. To ensure this, paints shall be from same batch mark so that colour and shade
remain same. All primer and paint shall be procured from the same manufacturer to ensure
good compatibility of paints. Paint manufacturers instruction shall be followed strictly. Stir the
paint thoroughly before use. Surface preparation, dilution of paints and application shall be
strictly as per the paint manufacturer’s instruction literature so as to keep the validity of
guarantee by the paint manufacturer.
(vii) The final finish surface shall be smooth and free from brush mark, free of sags, runs, crawls or
other defects. Containers to be stored in upright position, with lid tightly closed, in a cool dry
place with good ventilation all the time. Paint may be hazardous to human health. Follow all
safety regulations and instruction for medical safety as prescribed by the paint manufacturer.
(x) Painting of GI items:

• All GI items like water pipes, fittings and fixtures, etc. shall be given two coats of
synthetic enamel finish paint. Surface shall be lightly rubbed with fine abrasive paper and
all loose particle and dust shall be thoroughly cleaned before application of any paint. All
paints shall be of good quality from reputed manufacturer. Colour and shade to be as per
drawing and as per samples of paint approved by the Architect/ PMC/ Engineer.
(xi) Acceptance criteria:

• All painted surfaces shall be uniform and pleasing in appearance.
• The colour, texture etc. shall match exactly with those of approved samples.
Page 66 of 97
• All stains, splashes and splatters of paint; varnishes shall be removed from surrounding
surfaces.
(xii) Rates: Rates shall be unit rates for complete items described in the schedule of works. No extra
payment will be made for preparation of surface before painting or for cleaning up after the
work is complete. Scaffolding where necessary, shall be erected on double supports tied
together by horizontal pieces, over which scaffolding planks shall be fixed. No ballies, bamboos
or planks shall rest on or touch the surface which is being painted. Rate to include this
requirement.
(xiii) Method of measurement:

• All structural steel works whose any or all faces are to be painted shall be measured and
paid in weight of steel unless otherwise specified in schedule.
• Painting or putty punning to concrete and masonry shall be measured on the area
painted or punning done. For measurement of openings whose jambs, sills, soffits etc.
are to be painted, the following procedure shall be followed:
➢ For opening up to 0.5 sq. m. each, deductions shall be made for half the area of
openings and no additions shall be made for jambs, sills, etc.
➢ For openings exceeding 0.5 sq. m. but not exceeding 3.0. sq. m. each, deductions
shall be made for half the area of openings and no additions shall be made for jambs,
sills, etc.
➢ For opening exceeding 3.0 sq. m. each, deductions shall be made for the whole area,
and additions shall be made for the jambs, sills, soffits, reveals etc.
• For openings, pipes, sleeves etc. whose sides are not finished no deductions shall be
made for openings etc. up to 0.1 sq. m. in area each and full deductions shall be made for
all openings above 0.1 sq.m. in area each.
• No extra shall be paid for painting done around openings, sleeves, pipes, ducts, inserts
etc.
• No extra payment shall be made for painting, etc. on wall features such as grooves,
ducts, beads, projections, cornices, etc. unless given different finish or specified in the
“Schedule of works”. The actual area of the features shall be girthed and included in the
wall measurements.
• For painting of uneven surfaces in doors, windows, ventilators, louvers, guard bars,
balustrades, gratings, railings, gates etc. equivalent plain areas shall be measured as
given in clause 17.2 (Table II) of IS: 1200 - 2002.
• For painting pipes for sanitary and plumbing work, measurement shall be made on actual
work done in running meters (R.M.) for different diameters. Measurements shall be
along the central lines of pipes laid. No deductions or additions shall be made for valves,
fittings etc.
• Unless specifically stated on the schedule of works, all painting, varnishing or polishing of
wood shall be measured and paid on the area treated. For measurement of uneven
surfaces, equivalent plain area shall be measured as per clause 17.2 (Table II) of IS: 1200 -
2002.
14. Floor finishes and allied works:

(a) Scope:
Page 67 of 97
(i) This specification covers supply of materials, installation, finishing, curing, testing, protection,
maintenance till handing over various types of floor finishes and allied works.
(ii) Some of the codes applicable for this section:
IS: 4457 – 2012 :Ceramic unglazed vitreous acid resisting tiles- specification.
IS: 13630 - 2006 :Ceramic tiles- methods of test, sampling and basis for acceptance.
IS: 13753 - 1993 :Specification for dust pressed ceramic tiles with water absorption of E<10%
IS: 13755 - 1993 :Specification for dust pressed ceramic tiles with water absorption of 3%<E<6%
IS: 13801 - 2013 :Chequered cement concrete tiles- specification.
IS: 15622 - 2006 :Pressed ceramic tiles – specification.
(b) General:
(i) The floor finishing works shall be planned in detail including co-ordination with other agencies
involved and approval obtained from the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC/ Engineer-in-charge.
However, the Contractor shall remain fully responsible for the finished items with all
precautions and vigilance to avoid damage whatsoever till handing over of the completed
works.
(ii) Special materials required for individual finishing items shall be as covered in schedule of
quantities for respective items as per relevant IS codes. These materials shall be of best quality
available indigenously, unless specified otherwise; procured from reputed specialized
manufacturers and all samples to be approved by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge. A sample
of all such items shall be retained by the Engineer-in-charge for verification at stages of
construction and on completion. No substandard material shall be allowed to be used in the
name of maintaining construction schedule. The Contractor shall maintain proper inventory of
the item immediately after approval for construction by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge.
(iii) Only workers specially experienced in particular items of finishing work shall be engaged;
where such workers are not readily available, experienced supervisors recommended by the
manufacturer shall be engaged with due permission from Architect/ Engineer-in-charge. In
particular cases where the Engineer-in-charge desires, the Contractor shall get the finishing
items installed by the manufacturer.
(iv) The surface to be treated shall be thoroughly examined by the Contractor beforehand. The
level of base shall be lower than the theoretical finished floor level by the thickness of floor
finish. Any chipping or filling to be done to bring the base to the required level shall be brought
to the notice of the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge and approval obtained regarding method and
extent of rectification work required.
(v) For all types of flooring, skirting, dado and similar works, the base to receive the finish shall be
adequately roughened by chipping, raking out joints and cleaning thoroughly of all dirt, grease
etc. with water, hard brush and detergent, if required, unless otherwise directed by the
manufacturer of any special finishing materials or specifically indicated in this specification or
schedule of works under relevant item.
(vi) The base shall be thoroughly soaked with water; but all excess water mopped up to prevent
extra water in the finishing treatment. Where adhesives are used for fixing the finishes, the
surface shall be done dry, as per method specified. Approval of the Architect/ Engineer-in-
charge is to be obtained regarding acceptability of the surface before commencement of
finishing work.
Page 68 of 97
(c) In situ finishes:

(i) IPS flooring:
• Indian patent stone flooring is a basic type of flooring which provides good wearing
properties. Mix of concrete for IPS flooring is 1: 2: 4 (1cement, 2 sand and 4 stone
aggregates) or as specified. As per the nature of use, the flooring thickness of concrete is
decided from 25 mm to 50 mm.
• It is laid over a concrete/ RCC base, which is almost 75 to 150 mm The thickness of the
IPS flooring may be as per the requirement of work; in residential floor 35/ 50 mm floor
thickness is sufficient whereas industrial floor thickness should be kept at 50 to 75 mm.
• Method of construction: Make reference level on the wall, transfer this marking to all
location where flooring to be done with help of water level tube. Ensure there is no air
bubble present in water tube. Reference mark is to be transferred across the flooring
area and marked with line marker on wall. Flooring thickness level to be marked and
dummy level dots provided in every 1 or 2 meter ensuring required slope of flooring.
• Concrete in specified mix should be poured in panels to minimize shrinkage cracks. It
would work as expansion joint also. The size of panel should not exceed 3 square meters
for indoor and 2 square meter for outdoor flooring. Panel to be created with glass,
aluminium or brass strips (thickness and materials of strip should be as specified in
schedule) are fixed in cement mortar with their tops at proper level according to slope.
Concrete should be kept 3 to 4 mm down from finished floor level (i.e. thickness of neat
cement over concrete) and allowed to set for minimum 1.5 hours. Surface to be levelled
with a straight edge and finished with a wooden float or trowel. When the concrete is
just set, neat cement slurry with marble dust of required thickness (in proportion of 1
marble dust: 3 cement) to be placed over concrete. After few hours when slurry become
semi hard then metal troweling should be started and continue for several times till final
finish is achieved. There should not be any mark left on the finished surface and care
should be taken that no cement slurry spread on the surface.
• If glossy or smooth IPS flooring surface required then neat cement punning, 2 to 3 mm
thick is spread over the IPS concrete surface and allowed to soak into the concrete. The
surface is finished with metal trowel 3 to 4 times to give surface a glossy look.
• For curing of IPS concrete flooring, surface pond or wet hessian clothes are spread over
surface for 15 days. If required, vacuum dewatering machine to be used for big work to
give the surface a smooth and better finish. It also increases the abrasion resistance of
IPS concrete surface.
• Dressing of slab: As mentioned above.
• Preparation of surface and laying: The surface preparation shall be as described in
marble flooring, except that the edges of the slabs to be jointed shall be buttered with
grey cement and admixture of pigment to match the shade of the slab. The thickness of
the joints should be as minimum as possible. In any location, it shall not exceed 1 mm.
• Polishing and finishing: The specifications shall be as described in marble flooring except
that (a) first polishing with coarse grade carborundum stone shall not be done, (b)
cement slurry with or without pigment shall not be applied on the surface before
polishing.
• Measurements and rates: These shall be as described in marble flooring.
(ii) Acceptance criteria: The finish shall be checked specially for:

• Level, slope, plumb as the case may be
Page 69 of 97
• Pattern and symmetry

• Alignments of joints, dividing strip etc.
• Colour, texture
• Surface finish
• Thickness of joints
• Details at edges, junctions etc.
• Performance
• Precautions specified for durability.
(iii) Measurements: Length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm. Height shall be
measured correct to a cm in the case of dado and 5 mm in the case of riser and skirting. The
area shall be calculated in square metre, correct to two places of decimal. Length and height
shall be measured along the finished face of the skirting or dado including curves where
specials such as coves, internal and external angles and beads are used. Where cornices are
used the area of dado shall be measured excluding the cornices. Nothing extra will be paid for
cutting (sawn) the tiles to sizes. Where coves are used at junctions, the length and breadth
shall be measured between the lower edges of the coves.
(iv) Rates: The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above. Rates shall be for complete finishing work including necessary forms,
underbed, sticker and preparation of the surface including cutting and chipping to receive the
finish but exclusive of the base unless included in contract. The dividing strips in case of in situ
finish shall be included in the rates. Similarly, indentations, laying in desired patterns and in
panels shall be inclusive in the rates. All necessary cutting tiles, slabs etc., cost of specials, if
any, shall be included in the rates. No extra shall be paid for rounding corners and edges.
Unless mentioned otherwise, same rates will apply to floor, skirting, dado, treads, nosing etc.
15. Carpentry and joinery:

(a) Scope:
Supply, fitting and fixing of timber frames for doors and windows with MS holdfasts; flush doors,
windows, shutters, partitions, wall paneling, pelmets, shelves, furniture etc. as shown in drawings,
including a prime quote of approved paint, varnish or fixing of decorative plastic laminate where
called for in the schedule. This shall also include the supply and fixing of all hardware and fixtures
shown in drawing or specified in the schedule.
Note: Preparation of timber for joinery is to commence simultaneously with the beginning of the
project work generally and should proceed continuously until all the wood work is prepared and
fixed/ stacked on/ near the site as the case may be.
IS: 285 – 2011 : Laundry soaps.

IS: 848 – 2006 : Synthetic resin adhesives for plywood (phenolic and aminoplastic)-
specification.
IS: 883 – 2005 : Design of structure timber in building- code of practice.
IS: 1328 – 2007 : Veneered decorative plywood specification.
Page 70 of 97
IS: 1367 – 2002 : Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners.
IS: 1708 – 1986 (Part -1): Methods of testing of small clear specimens of timber
(Determination of moisture content).
IS: 2074 – 2002 : Ready mixed paint, air drying, red oxide, zinc chromate, priming-
specification.
IS: 2202 – 1999 (part -1) : Wooden flush door shutters (solid core type)- specification.
IS: 2338 – 2000 : Code of practice for finishing of wood and wood-based materials.
IS: 3564 – 2002 : Hydraulically regulated door closers- specification.
IS: 4101 – 2000 : Code of practice for external facings and veneers.
IS: 6315 – 2001 : Floor springs (hydraulically regulated) for heavy doors- specification.
IS: 6607 – 2006 : Specification for rebated mortice locks (vertical type).
(b) Installation:
(i) Materials:
• Timber: Unless otherwise specified, all timber shall be of best quality well seasoned sal
wood (for frame) and teak or other approved wood (for furniture) free from large or
loose knots, cracks or other defects. The surface shall be smooth and free from
blemishes and discolorations. Timber shall be treated with approved wood preservative
or chemically treated as specified in schedule of works. The Contractor or sub-contractor
shall get the rough timber approved by the Architect/ Engineer/ Engineer-in-charge
before start of actual work.
• Plywood: Plywood shall be of commercial quality or with decorative surface veneer.
Unless specifically permitted otherwise, the adhesive used in plywood shall be phenol
formaldehyde resin of BWR grade conforming to IS: 848 - 2006.
• Flush doors: Flush doors shall be solid core doors with commercial or decorative faces
and hardwood edges with teakwood lipping. The core for solid core doors shall be block
board or wood particle board of green ply or other approved brand. Manufacturer’s
literature and test certificates shall be submitted for approval of the Architect/ Engineer-
in-charge. The Contractor shall give a guarantee that the adhesive used is phenol
formaldehyde of BWR grade, conforming to IS: 848 - 2006. The thickness shall be as
specified in the schedule.
• Fixtures: Fixtures for doors, windows, furniture etc. shall be as shown on drawing or as
specified in the schedule.
(ii) Workmanship:
• General: Only skilled carpenter shall be employed to execute the job. The Architect/
Engineer-in-charge shall approve the carpenter before commencement of work.
• Framing timber and other work shall be of close-fitting with proper wood joinery,
accurately set to required lines or levels and rigidly secured in place. All timber surfaces
in touch with masonry or concrete shall be treated with wood preservative before fixing
in position. The surface of frames etc. that will come in contact with masonry after fixing
shall be given two coats of approved paint over wood preservative before fixing. Mastic
caulking shall be done after fixing external door and window frames. Special care shall be
taken to match the grain of timber or plywood, which will be subsequently polished/
painted. Screwing or nailing will not be permitted to the edge of plywood and particle
board. The edge of all plywood, block board and particle board shall be finished with
teakwood lipping.
• Fixing for frames and partitions shall generally be done with 40 mm x 6 mm x 300 mm
long MS holdfasts (or 8 mm dia 150 mm long anchor fastener) bifurcated at end and
Page 71 of 97
grouted with 1: 2: 4 cement concrete. The gap between masonry and external door and
window frame shall be caulked with polysulphide mastic. MS grills or guard bars shall be
provided to windows where called for in drawings or specified in schedule.
• The workmanship and joinery shall be accurately set out in strict accordance with the
drawing and shall be framed together and securely fixed in approved manner and with
properly made joints. All work is to be properly tenoned, shouldered, wedged and
pinned, etc., properly glued with approved quality adhesive to the satisfaction of the
Architect/ Engineer/ PMC. Door/ window frames shall have cut rebates. Planted rebated
shall not be permitted. As door frames are fixed flush with plaster of walls, an additional
teakwood cover (architrave) mould of 40 x 12 mm thick to be provided.
• Finish: All carpentry work after finishing shall be sand papered smooth. Prime coat of
paint shall be given after inspection by the Architect/ PMC/ Engineer to all surfaces other
than those, which shall be subsequently polished or covered with laminated plastic
sheet.
(iii) Door frames:

• The frames shall work, framed and fixed in position as per detailed drawing and as
directed by the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC. Specified timber shall be used, and it shall be
sawn in the direction of the grains. Sawing shall be truly straight and square. The
scantling shall be planed smooth and accurate to the full dimensions, rebates, rounding
and mouldings as shown in the drawings. Patching or plugging of any kind shall not be
permitted except as provided. Frame size shall be 75 x 100 mm. A tolerance of 2 to 3 mm
shall be allowed in the finished cross section dimensions of door and windows frames.
• Joints: These shall be of mortice and tenon type, simple, neat and strong. Mortice and
tenon joints shall fit in fully and accurately without wedging or filling. The joints shall be
glued, framed, put together and pinned with hard wood or bamboo pins not less than 10
mm diameter after the frames are put together in position by means of a press.
• Gluing of joints: The contact surface of tenon and mortice joints shall be treated before
putting together with synthetic resin adhesive of approved make.
• Fixing in position: Before the frames are fixed in position, these shall be inspected and
approved by the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC. The frame shall be placed in proper position
and secured to walls or columns as the case may be with metallic fastener, iron hold fasts
as per schedule of works and as directed by the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC.
• In case of door frames without sills, the vertical members shall be embedded in the
flooring to its full depth when sills are provided. These sills shall be embedded and sunk
in the floor to its full depth. The door frames without sills while being placed in position
shall be suitably strutted and wedged in order to prevent warping during construction.
The frames shall also be protected from damage, during construction.
• Joinery work:
➢ Joinery work shall be started immediately after the commencement of the building
work. All pieces shall be accurately cut and planed smooth to the full dimensions
without any patching or plugging of any kind. Rounding and moulding of rebates as
shown in drawings shall be made before assembling.
➢ The depth of splayed rebate in frames for hosting the shutters shall be 1.25 cm; the
meeting of the styles shall be rebated 20 mm. The joinery work shall be assembled
and passed by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge, then joints shall be pressed, and
Page 72 of 97
secured by bamboo/ wooden pins of about 6 mm diameter. The horns of styles shall
be sawn off.
➢ Tolerance: The finished work with a tolerance of + 1 mm in thickness + 2 to 3 mm in
width of styles and rails shall be accepted.
• Gluing of joints:
➢ The contact surface of tenon and mortice joints shall be treated before putting
together with bulk type synthetic resin adhesive of a make approved by the
Architect/ Engineer-in-charge. Shutters shall not be painted, oiled or otherwise
treated, before these are fixed in position and approved by the Architect/ Engineer/
PMC. Mountings and glazing bars shall be stub-tenoned to the maximum depth of
25 mm, whichever is less. Tenon thickness shall be approximately one third the
finished thicknesses of the members and the width of each tenon shall not exceed
five times its thickness.
➢ Beading: Timber, plywood, hard board and particle board panels shall be fixed only
with grooves but additional beading may not be provided either on one side or on
both sides. In so far as glass and asbestos panels are concerned beading shall always
be provided without grooves. Where beading is provided without grooves, the
beading shall be only one side, the other side being supported by rebate from the
styles. For external doors and windows beading shall be fixed on the outside.
➢ Fittings: Details of fittings should be as per the schedule of fittings.
(iv) Flush door shutters:

• Flush door shutters shall have a solid core and may be of the decorative or non-
decorative (paintable) type as per IS: 2202 (part I) - 1999. Nominal thickness of shutters
may be 25, 30 or 35 mm. Thickness and type of shutters shall be as specified. Width and
height of the shutters shall be as shown in the drawings or as indicated in schedule. All
four edges of the shutters shall be square. The shutter shall be free from twist or warp in
its plane. The moisture content in timbers used in the manufacture of flush door shutters
shall be less than 12% when tested as per IS: 1708 (part I).
• The core of the flush door shutters shall be a block board having wooden strips held in a
frame constructed of stiles and rails. Each stile and rail shall be a single piece without any
joint. The width of the stiles and rails including lipping, where provided shall not be less
than 45 mm and not more than 75 mm. The width of each wooden strip shall not exceed
30 mm. Stiles, rails and wooden strips forming the core of a shutter shall be of equal and
uniform thickness. Wooden strips shall be parallel to the stiles. End joints of the pieces of
wooden strips of small lengths shall be staggered. In a shutter, stiles and rails shall be of
one species of timber. Wooden strips shall also be of one species only but it may/ may
not be of the same species as that of the stiles and rails. Any species of timber may be
used for core of flush door. Only non-coniferous (hard wood) timber shall be used for
stiles, rails and lipping.
• The face panel shall be formed by gluing, by the hot-press process on both faces of the
core, either plywood or cross-bands and face veneers. The thickness of the cross bands
as such or in the plywood shall be between 1.0 mm and 3.0 mm. The thickness of the
face veneers as such or in the plywood shall be between 0.5 mm and 1.5 mm for
commercial veneers and between 0.4 mm and 1.0 mm for decorative veneers, provided
that the combined thickness of both is not less than 2.2 mm. The direction of the veneers
adjacent to the core shall be at right angles to the direction of the wooden strips.
Page 73 of 97
Finished faces shall be sanded to smooth, even texture. Commercial face veneers shall
conform to marine grade plywood and decorative face veneers shall conform to type I
decorative plywood as specified in IS: 1328 - 2007.
• Lipping, where specified, shall be provided internally on all edges of the shutters. Lipping
shall be done with battens of first class teak wood as specified, of depth not less than 25
mm. For double leaved shutters, depth of the lipping at meeting of stiles shall be not less
than 35 mm. Joints shall not be permitted in the lipping.
• For double leave shutters, the meeting of stiles shall be rebated by 8 mm to 10 mm. The
rebating shall be either splayed or square type as shown in drawing where lipping is
provided. The depth of lipping at the meeting of stiles shall not be less than 30 mm.
• Opening for glazing shall be provided where specified or shown in the drawing. Also,
when required and asked by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge, opening for glazing shall
be provided. Unless otherwise specified, the opening for glazing shall be 250 mm in
height and 150 mm or 200 mm in width unless directed otherwise. The bottom of the
opening shall be at a height of 1.4 m from the bottom of the shutter. Opening for glazing
shall be lipped internally with wooden batten of width not less than 25 mm.
• Where specified the height of the venetian opening shall be 350 mm from the bottom of
the shutter. The width of the opening shall be as directed but shall provide for a clear
space of 75 mm between the edge of the door and venetian opening but in no case the
opening shall extend beyond the stiles of the shutter. Top edge of the opening shall be
lipped internally with wooden battens of width not less than 25 mm. Venetian opening
shall be provided as specified or shown in drawing.
• Tolerance on width and height shall be + 3 mm and tolerance on nominal thickness shall
be ± 1.2 mm. The thickness of the door shutter shall be uniform throughout with a
permissible variation of not more than 0.8 mm when measured at any two points.
• For bonding various components of flush door shutters namely, core, core frame, lipping,
cross-bands, face veneers, plywood etc. and cover plywood, adhesive shall conform to
BWP type phenol formaldehyde synthetic resin vide IS: 848 - 2006.
• Test: Samples of flush door shutters shall be subjected to the following tests:
➢ End immersion test.
➢ Knife test.
➢ Glue adhesion test.
One end of each sample shutter shall be tested for end immersion test. Two specimens
of 150 x 150 mm size shall be cut from the two corners at the other end of each sample
shutter for carrying out glue adhesion test. Knife test shall be done on the remaining
portion of each sample shutter.
(i) Shutters of decorative and non-decorative type from each manufacturer, irrespective of
their thickness, shall be grouped separately and each group shall constitute a lot. The
number of shutters (sample size) to be selected at random from each lot for testing shall
be as specified. If the total number of shutters of each type in a work (and not the lot) is
less than twenty five, testing may be done at the discretion of the Architect/ Engineer/
PMC and in such cases extra payment shall be made for the sample shutter provided the
sample does not fail in any of the test specified. For knife test, glue adhesive test,
slamming test, the end immersion test, the number of shutters shall be as per col. 4 of
table below.
Page 74 of 97
Sample size and criteria for conformity

Permissible no.
Sample
Sr. no. Lot Size of defective Sub. Sample size
Size
sample
1. Upto 26 to 50 8 0 1
2. 51-100 13 1 2
3. 101-150 20 1 2
4. 151 – 300 32 1 3
5. 301 – 500 50 2 4
6. 501 and above 80 2 5
All the sample shutters when tested shall satisfy the requirements of the tests. The lot
shall be declared as conforming to the requirements when numbers of defective sample
does not exceed the permissible number in col. 3 of the Table. If the number of sample
shutters found unsatisfactory for a test is one, twice the number of samples initially
tested shall be selected and tested for the test. All sample shutters so tested shall satisfy
the requirement of the test. If the number of samples found unsatisfactory for a test is
two or more, the entire lot shall be considered unsatisfactory.
(ii) Length and width of the shutters shall be measured to the nearest cm in closed position
covering the rebates of the frames but excluding the gap between shutter and the frame.
Overlap of two shutters shall not be measured. All work shall be measured net as fixed
and area calculated in square metres to nearest two places of decimal. No deduction
shall be made for providing venetian opening and opening for glazing.
(iii) The rate includes the cost of material and labour involved in all the operations described.
Extra rate shall be payable for providing rebates in double leaved shutters. Glazing when
provided shall be measured and paid for separately as specified.
(v) Acceptance criteria:

(i) Door shutters: It shall be of proper size, shape, design and free from wrap. When fixed to
frame, these shall work/ operate smoothly without jamming and all latching or locking
devices shall engage properly without undue force or exertion.
(vi) Rates: Rates shall be unit rates including preservatives, shop coats, primer, varnishing,
polishing etc. against items mentioned in schedule. No separate payment will be made for
fixing, caulking etc. unless separately provided in the schedule.
(vii) Method of measurement:

(i) Holdfast/ anchor fastener: Shall be measured for actual number used.
(ii) Door shutter: Shall be measured for actual outer area of shutters for different thickness
and types described in schedule.
(iii) Glass and glazing: Shall be measured and paid separately under relevant items.
(iv) Fittings and fixtures: Shall be measured separately in actual numbers used for different
sizes and types described in Schedule.
16. Metal doors, windows, ventilators, louvers, etc.

(a) Scope:
Page 75 of 97
The scope of work includes preparation of shop drawing, approval of drawing, fabrication, supply and
installation of anodised aluminium/ uPVC door, windows, louvers, ventilators, composite unit with
glazing etc. It includes supply of all materials, fittings, fixtures, other accessories necessary for
erection etc. complete excluding supply of glass and glazing. Scope includes storing properly of all
fabricated/ supplied items, erecting and fixing in position.
IS: 733 – 2001 : Designation HE 9-WP :Specification for wrought aluminium and
aluminium alloy bars, rods and sections.
IS: 1081 – 2006 : Code of practice for fixing of metal doors, windows and ventilators.
IS: 1285 – 2002 : Wrought aluminium and alloys - extruded tube and hollow sections.
IS: 1868 – 2006 : Anodic coatings on aluminium and its alloys- specification.
IS: 1948 – 2006 : Specification for aluminium doors, windows and ventilators.
IS: 1949 – 2006 : Specification for aluminium windows for industrial buildings.
IS: 2835 – 1998 : Specification for flat transparent sheet glass.
IS: 3548 – 2005 : Code of practice for glazing in buildings.
(b) Installation:
(i) Materials:
• Aluminium sections: Material for all aluminium doors, windows, partitions etc shall be
extruded type conforming to IS: 733 – 2001 or as per INDAL guideline or approved
equivalent. The aluminium alloy used shall conform to IS designation HE 9 WP. Hardware
and fixtures to be as per schedule of work and of best quality from approved
manufacturers.
➢ The Contractor shall inform the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge regarding the
manufacturer from whom he proposes to indent material and supply samples for
approval. All sections shall be approved by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge before
fabrication is taken up. The Engineer-in-charge shall retain the samples of indented
material for comparison with bulk supply. The samples may be returned to the
Contractor towards the end for incorporation in the job.
➢ Ventilators shall conform to IS specification. The details like coupling mullions,
transoms, weather bars, pivot arrangements for ventilators, etc. shall be as per
drawings and IS codes.
➢ Where composite unit openings are shown on drawings, the individual window
units shall be joined together with requisite transoms and mullions as shown on
drawings. All windows shall be outside glazed fixed with putty or metal glazed beads
as shown on drawings and/ or as specified in the schedule. Where aluminium
glazing beads are specified, they shall be made of extruded aluminium channel 9.5
mm x 9.5 mm x 1.6 mm (Indal Section no. 2209) unless otherwise shown in the
drawing.
➢ All aluminium members shall be supplied in either matt or polished finish including
anodizing them by electrochemical process to an approved colour and thickness.
The frame shall be protected with a layer of clear transparent lacquer based
methacrylates or cellulose butyrate. The coating shall be removed after installation
is completed and after completing finishing work in the adjoining area. The mastic
for caulking shall be of best quality from a manufacturer approved by the Architect/
Engineer-in-charge. In general, the mastic for fixing of metal frames shall be as per
IS and as approved by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge.
Page 76 of 97
(ii) Fabrication of aluminium sections:

• Doors shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped in shop for hinges, locks and
bolts. They shall also be reinforced for closers, push-plates and other surface hardware
where necessary. Any drilling and tapping required for surface hardware shall be done at
site. Provision shall be made for fixing glazing, vision panels, louvers etc.; glazing
moldings shall be of extruded aluminium sections with profiles shown in drawing and
suitable for fixing 6 mm glass. Louver blades shall be V or Z shaped.
• Frames consisting of extruded hollow sections or profiles shall be square and flat, the
corners of the frame being fabricated to a true right angle; hinges to be of projection
type or friction hinges. Necessary coupling of approved shape shall be provided for
composite windows. Holes required for fixing frame and glazing shall be provided. Only
brass screws shall be used for fixing the frame to concrete members.
• Vertical and horizontal members shall be adequately rigid to resist lateral forces. Design
calculation shall be submitted for deflection of members to the Architect/ Engineer-in-
charge. All the fixtures for centre-hung shutters, top and bottom hung shutters, or side
hung shutters shall be got approved beforehand. The fixtures used should make it
possible to open the shutter to any angle. Unless otherwise specified, aluminium doors
shall be provided with floor springs of approved quality and make.
• All fitting and shop assembly shall meet the requirements of a first class job and to be
ready for erection. All welds shall be dressed flush on all exposed and contact surfaces.
Shop joints shall be made to hairlines and then welded or braced by such method as will
produce uniform colour throughout the work. All members shall be carefully fitted and
assembled into neat joint with concealed fasteners. Wherever possible, joints shall be
made in concealed location and on edges of doors. Field connections of all works may be
made with concealed screws or other type of fasteners. Glazing beads shall be snap type
fit without visible screws and shall be of sizes to accommodate 6 mm thick glazing. All
work shall be adequately braced and reinforced as necessary for strength and rigidity.
• Doors, frames, mullions, transom etc. shall be anodized in a bath of sulphuric acid to
provide a clear coating of minimum 16 micron thickness. The anodized materials shall
then be sealed by immersing in boiling water for 15 minutes. A protective transparent
coating shall be applied to the sections before shipment.
• Improper alignment or faulty operation due to inadequate strength of the hardware or
fixture shall entirely remain the responsibility of the Contractor. All hardware and
fixtures shall be able to withstand repeated use. Door closures shall be suitable for doors
weighing 61 - 80 kg unless stated otherwise in schedule of works. Each closure shall be
guaranteed against manufacturing defect for one year and any defect found within this
period shall be rectified or the door closure replaced free of charge. Concealed door
closures shall be either floor mounted or transom mounted, suitable for installation with
metal doors. It shall meet the performance requirement and endurance test as specified
in the IS code.
• Portions of aluminium frame which come in contact with masonry construction shall
before shipment from workshop be protected with a heavy coat of alkali paint.
Aluminium coming with other incompatible material/ metals shall be coated with zinc
chromate primer. Where aluminium frames come in contact with steel members, they
Page 77 of 97
shall be separated by either a 3 mm thick rubber gasket for full width of aluminium
member or any other approved film so as to avoid metallic corrosion.
(iii) Erection of aluminium doors, windows, ventilators, louvers at site:

• In general, the fixing of doors, windows, ventilators, louvers etc. shall conform to IS: 1081
- 2006 and as shown in drawings. The Contractor shall assemble and install all doors,
windows, sashes, fixed metal louvers, etc. including transoms and mullions for composite
units in respective places as shown on drawing keeping proper lines and levels, and in
approved workman-like-manner to give trouble free and leak-proof installations. The
installation shall be done according to the instructions of the manufacturer, and/ or as
approved by the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC. If required, the installation shall have to be
carried out under the supervision of the manufacturer’s staff. The Contractor shall take
every precaution against damage of the components during installation. Necessary holes,
chases etc. required for fixing shall be made by the Contractor and made good again as
per original, after installation without any extra charge. After installation of doors,
windows etc. all abrasions to shop-coat of paint shall be retouched and made good to
same quality of paint used in shop coat.
• All coupling mullions, transoms, frames etc. in contact with adjacent metal and other
members, shall be well bedded in mastic. The Contractor shall bring to site the mastic
cement in original sealed containers of manufacturer and shall apply it as per
instructions. For all frames used in construction, mastic shall be supplied by the
Contractor and caulking done properly as per drawings, specifications and instructions of
the Architect/ PMC/ Engineer.
• Door shutters, partitions, hardware fixtures etc. shall be fixed only after major
equipments have been installed in rooms. Wherever required nylon cords of approved
quality shall be supplied along with pivoted sashes and shall be of adequate length to
terminate one metre from the floor. Loose ends of cords shall end in metal or plastic pull
as approved by the Architect/ PMC/ Engineer.
(iv) Sealants:
• All joints, which are sealed with sealant as part of the fabrication or erection procedure,
shall be sealed with an approved low/ medium modulus silicone sealant (exposed or
concealed) in manufacturer's standard colour as selected by the Architect/ Engineer-in-
charge. All perimeter sealant (metal to adjacent construction) shall be sealed similarly.
Silicone sealant shall be as manufactured by General Electric (Silpruf) or Dow Corning
(790 or 795) or as approved by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge.
• In using specified sealant, strictly observe printed instructions of sealant manufacturer
regarding joint size, limitations, backer rod, mixing, cleaning, surface preparation,
priming and application. A primer shall be used, unless written instructions from the
sealant manufacturer advise to the contrary, and sealant manufacturer certifies that the
lack of the use thereof will not reduce sealant performance. Sealant shall not be applied
when substrates are wet or when the temperature is below 40 degree F, unless special
low temperature application procedures, as recommended by the sealant manufacturer
are followed. Care shall be exercised to insure against "three surface adhesion". Bond
breakers shall be provided where necessary.
• Provide certification from sealant manufacturer that the sealant manufacturer has
reviewed all sealant details and finds sealant suitable for the purpose intended,
compatible with and will not stain the surfaces with which they are in contact. Statement
Page 78 of 97
as to compatibility, adhesion sufficiency and non-staining shall be accompanied by actual

test results on production substrates performed in accord with applicable ASTM
procedures. Cleaners used in laboratory testing shall be as intended for use on the work
and shall be VOC complaint.

• For fabricated items:
➢ Overall dimensions shall be within +/- 1.5 mm of the size shown in the drawings.
➢ Mullions, removable transoms etc shall be in one length and deviation from
straightness: +/- 1.5 mm from axis of member.
➢ Door and window shutters shall operate without jamming. The clearance at head and
jamb for door shutters shall not exceed 1.5 mm. For double leaf doors, gap at
meeting stiles shall not be more than 1.5 mm.
➢ Door leaves shall be undercut where shown on drawings.
➢ Doors, windows, frames etc. shall be on a true plane, free from warp or buckle.
➢ All welds shall be dressed flush on exposed and contact surfaces.
➢ Correct location and smoothness of operations of all shop installed hardware/
fixtures.
➢ Provisions for hardware and fixtures to be installed at site.
➢ Glazing beads shall be cut with mitered corners.
➢ Glazing clips, fixing devices etc. shall be supplied in adequate numbers.
➢ Shop coats shall be properly applied.
➢ Exposed aluminum surfaces shall be free from scratches, stains and discolouration.
Anodized surfaces shall present a uniform and pleasing look.
• For installed items:
➢ Installations shall be at correct location, elevation and on a true vertical plane.
➢ Fixing details shall be strictly as shown on drawings.
➢ Assembly of composite units shall be strictly as per drawings with mastic caulking of
transoms and mullions, gaskets, weather strips etc. complete.
➢ All frames on external walls shall be mastic caulked to prevent leakage through joint
between frames and masonry.
➢ All openable section shall operate smoothly without jamming.
➢ Locks, fasteners, etc. shall engage positively. Keys shall be non-interchangeable.
➢ Cutting to concrete and masonry shall be made good and all abrasions to shop paint
touched up with paint of same quality.
(vi) Information to be submitted:

• Along with tender:
➢ Names of manufacturers of doors and windows etc.
➢ Manufacturer’s catalogue for all hardware and fixtures proposed to be used.
• After award of contract:
➢ Submission for approval of fabrication drawings for metal doors and windows.
➢ Submission of work - schedule for fabrication.
➢ Submission of samples of all bought out items for approval. The Engineer-in-charge
shall retain the samples for cross-checking and return at completion of work.
Page 79 of 97
• Supply and installation of doors shall be measured in sqm of area of door, window and
louver etc.
• Glazing beads, weather stripping, fixed devices etc. shall not be measured separately but
shall be included in the supply rate of respective items.
• Curing or grouting to concrete and masonry or welding and drilling to aluminium
required for installation shall be included in the installation rate. No separate payment
shall be made for caulking and jamming or frames or making good to concrete and
masonry.
• Glass and glazing shall be measured and paid under relevant items.
• Door and window fixture, lock, door closure shall be measured in actual numbers used.
17. Glass and glazing:

(a) Scope:
The work consists of supplying all glass and glazing, clips, putty, mastic cement etc. wherever
required as shown on drawings and schedule including fixing of all glass and glazing on supplied
aluminium and uPVC material.
The following codes, standards and specifications are made a part of this specification.
IS: 1081 – 1960 : Code of practice for fixing and glazing metal doors, windows and ventilators.
IS: 2835 – 1998 : Specification for flat transparent sheet glass.
IS: 3548 – 2005 : Code of practice for glazing in buildings.
(b) Installation:
(i) General: The Contractor shall supply and install all glass and glazing as required for various
doors, windows, sashes, ventilators, fixed louvers, miscellaneous glazing and partition from
approved manufacturer like Hindustan Pilkinton or equivalent, shall have uniform refractive
index and free from flaws, specs and sand bubbles. The glass shall be brought to site in the
original packing of the manufacturer and cut to size at site. The cut edges shall have properly
squared corners with straight edges and free from chips, spalls of any other damage. Fixing to
frames shall be done with approved glazing pins and approved quality rubber beading.
(ii) Materials:
• Clear glass shall be float glass and shall be at least 5 mm thick for windows and minimum
6 mm thick for doors or as indicated in the schedule.
• Obscure glass shall have a cast surface in one side.
• EPDM/ neoprene gaskets with snap-fit glazing shall be fixed as per manufacturer’s
instructions and shall sit snugly against glass to give a leak proof installation.
(iii) Fully toughened/ tempered glass:

Toughened/ tempered glass shall have to:
• Conform to ASTM 1048-04 kind FT.
• Glass to come from a source that uses computerized optical methods to scan the float
glass during production for inclusions. The glass used for toughening should be of the
highest graded quality from this scanning.
Page 80 of 97
• Tempered on a roller hearth furnace eliminating tong marks.

• Conform to the following requirements in the horizontal toughening process:
➢ Maximum bow: 0.1% b.
➢ Roller wave: All thicknesses 0.075 mm between peaks and troughs.
➢ Edge dip: 0.25 mm maximum.
• Location of identification marks indicating its nature and processor to be agreed with the
Architect/ Engineer-in-charge.
• Locating of roller marks on heat treated glass parallel to the sill (horizontal).
• Heat soak test for all toughened glass.
• Heat soaking to EN 14179 standards as amended by the heat soak procedure described
in Appendix B.
• Provide the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC with copies of temperature log records for each
batch and any statistical analysis of the test data.
• The manufacturer shall, upon request, show by statistical analysis of test data that the
probability of failure is less than one in 130 tonnes.
• Demonstrate by the prime manufacturer’s testing that surface compressive stress in the
glass is greater than or equal to 100 N/ mm² when measured by GASP in accordance with
ASTM F218-95 (2000).
• Do not use toughened glass in situations where breakage could result in glass falling
more than 3 meters to an occupied area, unless specifically approved or the glass is
laminated.
(iv) Glazing, setting and finish:

• All glazing clips, bolts, nuts, putty, mastic cement etc. shall be supplied by the Contractor.
• All glass shall be thoroughly cleaned before putting in position. Each glass pane shall be
held in place by special glazing clips of approved type. As specified in relevant IS codes,
four glazing clips shall be provided per glass pane, except for large panes six or more clips
shall be used as per instructions of the Architect/ PMC/ Engineer. All holes that may be
necessary for holding the clips, glazing beads and all other attachments shall be drilled by
the Contractor.
• Glass panes shall be set without springing, and shall be bedded in putty and puttied,
except where molding or gaskets are specified. Putty, mastic cement etc. shall be
smoothly finished to the even line. Obscure and figured glass shall be set with smooth
side out. After completion of glazing work, the Contractor shall remove all dirt; stains,
excess putty etc. clean the glass panes and leave the work in perfectly acceptable
conditions. All broken, cracked or damaged glass shall be replaced by new ones at the
Contractor’s own cost. Window pane glasses shall be of toughened clear glass with 5 mm
to 6 mm thickness or as specified.
• Wastage shall not be considered.

• All installation shall be free from cracked, broken or damaged glass. Edges of large panes
of thicker glass and heat absorbing glass shall be inspected carefully for chipped, cracked
or ungrounded edges.
• Glazing shall be carefully done to avoid direct contact with metal frames.
• All glass shall be embedded in mastic or fixed by EPDM/ Neoprene gaskets to get a leak
proof installation.
Page 81 of 97
• On completion, the panes shall be free from dirt, stains, excess putty or gasket etc. to the
entire satisfaction of the Architect/ PMC/ Engineer.
(vi) Rates:
• Rates shall be unit rates for supply and/ or installation of different kind of glass
mentioned in the schedule of works.
• No separate payment for glazing clips, mastic cement, putty, nails etc. and for drilling
holes in frames for inserting glazing clips.
• No separate payment shall be made for cutting of glass to required size, edge finishing
etc.
• No separate payment shall be made for cleaning the glass after installation.

• All supply and/ or installation of glass shall be measured by actual area of work done.
• When the glass is supplied by the Engineer-in-charge, the cutting of glass shall be
measured for actual length of cut edges.
Page 82 of 97
18. PHE WORK
(i) General requirement: The installation work of sanitary and plumbing system shall be carried
out in conformity with the requirements of relevant bye-laws of municipal and other
authorities in whose jurisdiction the work is being carried out and also following specifications
as laid down by Indian standards and National Building Code of Practice - No. SP: 7 - 1983 (Part
IX) plumbing services and No. SP: 35 - 1987.
(ii) System description: The entire system shall comprise of following arrangements:
• Piping connection from municipal supply point to underground reservoir.
• Connection from underground reservoir to overhead tank.
• From overhead tank to distribution in each flat (32 nos).
• Drainage/ overflow pipe from overhead tank to drain.
• Storm water pipe from roof to underground drain.
• Water supply arrangement at ground floor, security gate and garden.
• Drainage pipe from each flat to common header and finally to underground municipal
drain.
• Sewerage pipe from each flat to the common vertical header and connecting to
municipal sewer.
➢ Applicable codes and specification: All materials, supply, erection, testing and
commissioning shall comply with the requirements of the relevant Indian standards
and codes of practice as given below:
BS: 416 – 1990 : HCI Pipe and Fittings.

IS: 458 – 2003 : Precast concrete pipes (with and without reinforcement.
IS:778 - 1995 : Specification for copper alloy gate, globe and check valves for
waterworks.
IS:1172 – 1993 : Code of basic requirements for water supply drainage and sanitation.
Part 16 - 1979 : Laying of water and sewer lines including appurtenant items.
Part 19 - 1981 : Water supply plumbing and drain.
IS:1239 - 1992 : Mild steel tubes and mild steel tubular and other wrought steel pipe
fittings (Part I and Part II)
IS:1726 - 1991 : Specification for cast iron manhole covers and frame.
IS:1729 - 2002 : Ductile iron drainage pipe fittings for over ground non-pressure
pipeline socket and spigot series.
IS:1742 –1983 : Building drainage.
IS:1879 - 1981 : G.I. Fittings
IS:2065 –1988 : Code of Practice for water supply in Building.
IS:2379–1963 : Colour code for identification of pipelines.
IS:2556 - 2009 : Vitreous china sanitary fixture.
IS:3989 - 1984 : Centrifugally cast (spun) iron spigot and socket soil waste and
ventilating pipes, fittings and accessories.
IS:4985 – 2000 : Unplasticized PVC pipes for potable water supplies- specification.
IS:5329 - 2007 : Code of Practice for sanitary pipe work above ground.
IS5401 – 2002 : Microbiology – general guidance for the enumeration of coliforms.
IS:5450 – 2004 : Standard specification for Polyethylene/ Aluminium/
Polyethylene (PEAL-PE) composite pressure pipe. (KiTEC composite
pipe).
IS:5455 – 2003 : Cast iron steps for manhole.
IS:7231 - 2009 : Plastic flushing cisterns for water closets and urinals- specification.
DIN:8077 - : Polypropylene Random Copolymer Pipe.
Page 83 of 97
1999 – 07
IS:8329 - 2005 : Centrifugally cast (spun) ductile iron pressure pipes for water, gas
and sewerage.
IS: 9523 – 2000 : Ductile iron fittings for pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage.
IS:12592 – 2002 : Precast concrete manhole cover and frame.
IS:13592 – 1992 : uPVC Pipes (Type - A) Rain water Pipe
uPVC Pipes (Type - B) Soil and Waste Pipe
IS:14735 – 1999 : uPVC fittings (Type - A and B)
IS 15225 - 2002 : Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride compounds used for pipes and fittings
– specification.
IS:15778 - 2007, : cPVC Pipes for Potable Water.
ASTM D2846
(iii) Material:
• Piping arrangement:
➢ Municipal supply to underground tank: Water supply connection from municipal
source to underground tank shall be done with ductile iron or GI pipe.
➢ Underground domestic water tank to overhead tank, roof ring mains: Heavy class GI
pipes conforming to IS: 1239 - 1992 including all necessary fittings such as elbow,
coupler, union, tee etc conforming to IS: 1879 - 1981 shall be used.
➢ From ring main to vertical distribution in flats, gate, garden: GI pipes (medium class)
with fittings such as tee, elbow, reducer, union, valves, cocks, float valve/ motorized
valve etc. shall be used for all services to flats, ground floor, gate and garden. GI
pipes to conform to IS: 1239 - 1992 (part I), fittings to IS: 1239 - 1992 (part II). The
drain water (light class) pipe shall be of IS: 1239 - 1992 (part I). Fitting and fixing shall
be done with teflon tape.
➢ Domestic water lines: Generally CTS - SDR11, chlorinated PVC (cPVC) pipes vide IS:
15778 – 2007, ASTM D2846 may be used. All fittings necessary for pipe line work
shall be as per this standard. Flow guard solvent cement vide ASTM F 493 and teflon
tape for threaded joints to be used.
➢ Soil, waste, overflow/ rain water pipes (external): uPVC soil/ waste/ rain water
pipes of 8 kg/ cm2 pressure class vide IS: 4985 - 2000 and all fittings viz. bends,
junctions, cowls, offsets, etc. including joining with solvent cement.
➢ External soil, waste connections: Non-pressure NP 2 class R.C.C. pipes, collars, etc.
➢ Discharge from sink, basin, other fixtures and connection to drain: uPVC pipes of 8
kg/ cm2 pressure class conforming to IS: 4985 - 2000 and all fittings viz. bends,
junctions, cowls, offsets, etc. including joining with solvent cement.
• Ductile iron pipes and fittings: Ductile iron pipe is made of material similar to cast iron
but with higher tensile strength. The pipe and fittings shall match the requirements of IS:
8329 - 2005 and IS: 9523 - 2000. The pipe shall be bell type with bevelled plain end. Bell
is to be provided with internal gasket recess for the gasket to sit in. It shall be procured
from spun pipe manufacturers like Electrosteel, Tata (Ductura), Jindal. Pipes and gaskets
shall be procured and assembly done as per good engineering practice. The gasket
should be kept away from organic chemicals.
• GI pipes and fittings:
➢ Galvanized iron pipes shall be procured from reputed manufacturer of good standing
viz. Tata, Jindal. However, prior to procurement, the Contractor shall take approval
from Architect/ Engineer-in-charge of vendor from whom the pipes shall be
procured. These pipes shall be manufactured strictly as per IS: 1239 (Part I) – heavy/
Page 84 of 97
medium/ light quality of sizes from nominal bore (NB) of 15 mm to NB of 150 mm

[nominal bore gives reference to the approx bore of the tube/ pipe as explained in IS:
1239 (Part I) Cl. 2.4].
➢ Galvanized iron fittings viz. elbows/ tees/ sockets etc. shall be manufactured in
accordance with IS: 1879 - 1981. All fittings must be embossed with ISI mark.
➢ Pipes shall be galvanized as stated in IS:
4736 - 1998. Minimum weight of galvanizing will be 400 gms/ sq.m. of inside and
outside surfaces of pipe. Galvanized fittings shall be as per IS: 1879 - 1981. Minimum
galvanization shall be 610 kg/ sq.m.
➢ All tubes/ pipes must be able to withstand a test pressure at works of 5 MPa (50 kg/
cm2) without showing any sign of defect whatsoever. All installed pipes and fittings
for water supply and distribution shall be tested to a pressure of 7 kg/ sq.cm. held for
60 minutes. The pressure gauge must be correctly calibrated prior to use for testing
of pipeline.
➢ Fittings shall be tested at works to a pressure of 21 kg/ cm2 without any sign of
defect. As laid pipeline assembly test pressure at site shall be 7 kg/ cm2.
• cPVC pipes and fittings: cPVC pipes and fittings used in hot and cold potable water
distribution system shall conform to requirement of IS: 15778 - 2007. The material
from which the pipe is produced shall consist of chlorinated polyvinyl chlorides. The
polymer from which the pipe compounds are to be manufactured shall have chlorine
content not less than 66.5%. The internal and external surfaces of the pipe shall be
smooth, clean and free from grooving and other defects. The pipes shall not have any
detrimental effect on the composition of the water flowing through it. Diameter and wall
thickness of cPVC pipes are as per standard.
• uPVC pipes and fittings: uPVC pipes shall be as per IS: 13592 – 1992; type – A for rain
water pipe, type – B for soil and waste pipe. Fittings shall be as per IS: 14735 – 1999.
Pipes are liable to be damaged in transit and notwithstanding tests which may have been
made before dispatch; each pipe shall be examined carefully on arrival at site. Damaged
pipes shall be rejected. Good pipes shall be carefully stacked to prevent damage. All
defective pipes should be segregated, marked in a conspicuous manner and removed.
• RCC pipes: RCC pipes shall be of NP2 class as mentioned in schedule of works and
manufactured as per IS: 458 - 2003 by good and reputed manufacturer.
• Transition fittings: All types of one end brass threaded male/ female adaptors in various
fittings like coupler; socket, elbow and tee are available for transition to other plastic/
metal piping and for fixing with CP fittings. All transition fittings required for the work
shall be procured on approval of Architect/ Engineer/ PMC. All fittings shall carry the
following information:
➢ Manufacturer’s name/ trade mark.
➢ Size of fitting.
• Valves:
➢ Stainless steel ball valves shall be 90 degree shut off – on valve with pressure rating
of 16 kg/ sq.cm and of standard make like ‘Leader’ may only be used.
➢ Gun metal non-return valve shall be as per IS: 778 - 1995 with pressure rating of 16
kg/ sq.cm. The ISI mark must be embossed on the valve. Valves must be procured
from reputed manufacturers of good standing. Brands such as ‘Leader’ may only be
used.
• Hangers/ brackets/ clamps/ fasteners:
Page 85 of 97
➢ All clamps, hangers and fasteners necessary for fitting and fixing different type of
pipes are shown in drawings. Dimensions and details given in drawings should be
strictly followed.
➢ Generally the clamps and hangers shall be of 5 mm thick MS flats/ angles of specified
width and thickness. These clamps and hangers should be properly galvanized with a
coating of approximately 400 gm/ sqm (minimum) of surface area. Holes/ slits etc. as
necessary should be made before galvanizing. Hangers should be fastened to ceilings
with 8 mm dia galvanized anchor fastening bolts. All other nuts/ bolts/ screws/ nails
should also be galvanized. After galvanizing, the clamps/ hangers etc. should be
painted with one coat of coal tar epoxy paint prior to fixing in position. Each nail
shall be 100 to 150 mm long and 8 mm in dia. All pipe nails or nails used in support
shall be galvanized.
➢ Fasteners viz. nuts, bolts and washers, screws and turnbuckles etc. shall be of MS
galvanized as manufactured by GKW, TATA or equivalent approved by Architect/
Engineer-in-charge.
• Piping installation support and spacing: Pipes can be concealed in chases. The pipes and
fitting are to be pressure tested prior to concealing. To maintain alignment of CP fittings
while joining, all alignment of fittings and pipe shall be done correctly. Nails should not to
be used for holding of pipes in the chases.
• Pipe sleeve: Pipe sleeve that may have to be used for passage through walls/ floors/
roofs etc. shall be of rigid PVC whose inner diameter should be slightly higher than the
outer diameter of the pipes passing through the wall/ floor/ roof. The length of the
sleeve should be equal to the thickness of structure/ member through which it is
embedded. Sleeve pipes should not be less than 6 kg/ sq.cm. pressure rating. The
annular space should be packed with any silicate/ silicon compound. For water prone
areas this sealing should be done with epoxy compounds.
• Pipe joining materials:
➢ Teflon tape: 25 mm/ 20 mm wide (PTFE) tapes shall be used as pipe thread joining
materials for all galvanized and other concealed pipe installations.
➢ Hold tite solution: These shall also be used along with PTFE tapes for concealed pipe
Installations. Manufacturer – Har Castle Waud and Co.
➢ M – seal or other epoxy putty should be used for sealing junctions of pipes and
floors/ walls as may be required.
• Pipe insulation:
➢ Anti-corrosive treatment to be done by using pypkote primer (@ 100 gm/ sq mt) with
wrapping 4 mm thick pypkote (AW 4 mm) protective coating by thermo fusion
process with overlap of 15 mm and providing thrust block at a distance of 3 m centre
to centre for underground GI piping system. Application shall be as per
manufacturer’s specification and approved by the Architect/ Engineer.
➢ No insulation is needed over ductile iron pipe. Wrapping with polythene may be
done at location of pipe joints after painting the joint with anti-corrosive bituminastic
paint of approved quality.
• Paints: Paints to be applied on pipe/ fitting/ surfaces which will be concealed in grooves/
chases must be epoxy primer from good and reputed manufacturer. Paints to be applied
on pipe/ fitting surfaces which will be exposed within ducts or inside false ceilings or on
roof or elsewhere shall be two coats coal tar epoxy paint.
• Manhole covers and frames/ gully gratings:
Page 86 of 97
➢ Manhole cover, frames for storm water, drain and sewer shall be of RCPC vide IS:
12592 - 2002 and from reputed manufacturer. Capacity and size shall be as per
schedule of works.
➢ Manhole cover for water tanks to be double-sealed heavy quality CI cover vide IS:
1726 – 2017.
➢ Gully gratings shall be of RCPC as detailed in drawings and schedule.
➢ Step irons (foot rests) shall be CI (heavy) as per IS: 5455 - 2003.
(iv) System erection:

• General:
➢ The water supply and drainage connection work under this specification shall only be
executed by a licensed plumbing Contractor/ plumber listed in the approved list of
HIDCO/ NKDA for such work. The licensed Contractor will be responsible for the
water supply and sanitary discharge connection; needs to sign the documents for
obtaining CC from NKDA.
➢ The diameter of pipes and fittings shall mean the nominal bore for ductile and GI
pipes, outer diameter for cPVC, uPVC and RCC pipes, unless otherwise specified.
➢ The work shall include the cost of making necessary chases, holes etc. in walls, floors
and other places and making good on completion of work. Any damage caused to
floors during sanitary and plumbing works shall be made good by the Contractor to
the entire satisfaction of Architect/ Engineer/ PMC/ Engineer-in-charge.
➢ Handling, fitting and fixing carefully the sanitary fixtures, as per drawings/
specifications and instructions of Architect/ Engineer/ PMC and effecting necessary
pipe connections, joints etc and testing as specified, complete in all respects.
➢ Providing all tools, equipments and testing machines required for testing, supporting
and fixing devices so as to install the sanitary fittings, pipe lines etc. securely in
position.
• Ductile iron pipe work:
➢ Pipe may be cut as required using abrasive saw or rotary wheel cutter or oxy-
acetylene torch. Cut ends and rough edges to be bevelled and ground smooth to
remove all sharp edges.
➢ Push-on joint: Wipe clean the bell socket, the groove and the prepared plain end.
Brush the exposed surface of the gasket and plain end of pipe with soap water or an
approved lubricant before slipping the gasket on to the plain end for joint assembly.
Do not apply lubricant to the bell socket or the surface of the gasket in contact with
the bell socket. Make a small loop in the gasket and insert it in the socket. Make sure
that the gasket faces the correct direction and it is properly seated. The bevelled end
of the pipe is pushed past the gasket, compressing it and forming a pressure tight
and dependable seal.
• G.I. pipe work: The galvanized pipe work shall include cutting to required lengths,
threading, joining, fixing, testing and commissioning of the water lines. If leakage is found
in any part of pipe line during testing or after commissioning, the lines shall be removed,
replaced and tested again. The pipes when fixed to the walls shall be fixed with wooden
packing and GI clamps and screws. They shall be kept at least 12 mm away from the
walls. The piping as done shall be tested for water pressure of 10 kg/ sq.cm. maintained
leak proof for 12 hours. The measurement of the piping shall be done along the
longitudinal axis of the pipe line. The pipe line erection work shall include the following
items:
Page 87 of 97
➢ Providing pipe and other special material as required including all tees, bends,
elbows, reducer, flanges, coupling, unions and all other accessories.
➢ Cutting to required length, threading, joining, fixing, testing and commissioning the
line.
➢ Providing wooden battens, clamps, screws, rubber insertions, bushes etc.
➢ For underground GI pipe line; excavation, dewatering, backfilling, ramming,
surrounding the pipe all-round with minimum 150 mm thick compacted silver sand
and providing thrust block at a distance of 3 m centre to centre including
anticorrosive treatment as approved by the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC. Surplus
excavated soil to be removed as directed outside the site to the approved damping
ground.
• cPVC pipe works: The work shall be completed by joining pipe with fittings/ transition
fittings by flow guard solvent cement etc, putting all plugs, clamps in position including
cutting chases and making good the wall and fixed with proper clamps. All terminal
points for installation of faucets shall have brass terminal fittings as required by the
Architect/ Engineer/ PMC and as per manufacturer’s specification. Protective coating, if
specified, shall be provided.
• uPVC pipe works: The work for erection of uPVC soil/ waste/ rain water pipes shall be
completed with joining fittings viz. bends, junctions, cowls, offsets, etc., by flow guard
solvent cement as approved by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge with plastic clamps of
suitable designs for support. Provision shall be made for the effect of thermal movement
by not gripping or disturbing the pipe at supports between the nut-bolts for the
suspended pipe. The supports shall allow the repeated movements to take place without
abrasion. Jointing of uPVC pipes shall be made by means of solvent cement for horizontal
lines and “O” rubber ring for vertical line.
Excavation for putting pipeline in position, refilling and disposal of surplus earth etc;
cutting holes in walls and floors wherever required and making good the same and make
the system complete as directed by the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC.
• RCC pipe works: Non-pressure NP2 class R.C.C. pipes with collars, jointed with stiff
cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2 fine sand) to correct levels including testing of joints and
making good leakages, wherever required.
(v) Laying of pipes:

• General:
➢ The cPVC/ uPVC/ G.I pipes and fittings shall run in wall chase or ceiling or as
specified. The fixing shall be done by means of standard pattern holder bat clamps
keeping the pipes about 15 mm clear of the wall where to be laid on surface or
specified. Where it is specified to conceal the pipes, chasing may be adopted or pipes
fixed in the shafts, ducts etc. but there should be sufficient space to work on the
pipes with usual tools. Pipes may be buried for short distances with adequate
protection against damage and special care taken at joints. Pipe sleeves shall be fixed
at a place the pipe is passing through a wall or floor to allow freedom for expansion
and contraction and other movements. In case of GI pipes embedded in walls or
floors it should be painted with anti-corrosive bituminastic paints of approved
quality. Under the floors the pipes shall be laid in layer of sand filling.
➢ The GI pipe shall be laid with the socket in upstream and shall rest on solid and even
foundations for the full length of the barrel. Socket hole to be made in the
foundation sufficiently deep to allow sufficient space for the pipe jointer to work
Page 88 of 97
right around the pipes and it remains practicable to accommodate the socket and
allow the joint to be made. Each separate pipe shall be individually set for the line
and level using one of the standard procedures as approved by the Architect/
Engineer/ PMC.
➢ Ductile iron pipe shall be laid in such a fashion so as water reaches to underground
tank with positive pressure. A non-return valve is to be provided. Necessary trench
laying and backfilling shall be as specified.
➢ Where pipes are not bedded on concrete, the trench shall be left slightly high and
carefully bottomed up as pipe laying proceeds so that the pipe barrels rest on firm
and undisturbed ground. If the excavation has been carried too low, packing done
shall be by concrete.
➢ All vertical pipe shafts, soil pipes or ventilation pipes shall be strongly supported at
the foot upon a bed of concrete firmly attached to the walls. It shall be fixed at least
5 cm clear of the finished surface of the wall by means of suitable clamps of
approved type.
➢ All cutting of holes, chases, trenches etc. at any place necessary in connection with
the works and subsequent mending of damages are to be included in the rates and
not paid extra.
• Internal works: Internal cPVC pipes and fittings inside the toilet and kitchen shall be fixed
by means of standard pattern holder bat clamps keeping the pipe 20 mm clear of the
wall everywhere or concealed as directed. If cPVC pipes and fittings are placed inside of
wall, it is to be fixed concealed on floors and walls as per manufacturer’s specification.
Where it is imperative to fix the pipe in front of a house or in any conspicuous position,
where it looks ungainly, chasing may be adopted. The holder bat clamps shall be fixed at
a distance not exceeding 3 meters apart. Concealed pipes are to be secured to walls by
hooks. The valves should be fitted with a long screw/ union. All pipes and fittings shall be
fixed truly vertical and horizontal or as directed by the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC.
• Pipe passing through wall: Where a pipe is required to pass through a wall or
foundation of a building or other rigid structure, it should be enclosed in a suitable sleeve
having a minimum radial clearance of 25 mm or as directed; alternately, a lintel or
relieving arch may be formed in the structure to accommodate the passing pipe. Care
should be taken to prevent, water passing along the barrel of the pipe and through the
wall or the entry of surrounding granular material.
• External drainage works: External building drainage for soil and waste water as well as
storm water may be laid with uPVC pipes. Laying and construction methodology is given
below. Manholes catch pits and gully pits will be the ancillaries in the system.
uPVC pipe works:
➢ uPVC pipes do not readily fracture under load, but are liable to deformation. They
depend considerably on the immediate surrounding fill to resist circumferential
deformation. Accordingly, uPVC flexible pipe lines should be surrounded by specified
non-corrosive material and the fill material to be properly compacted to prevent
excessive deformation of the pipe. The design of bedding for pipelines is based on
the principle that the ability of a pipe to carry a load may be increased by the
provision of suitable bedding.
➢ Connections of the polyethylene pipe to auxiliary equipment such as valves, pumps
and tanks shall be through flanged joints which shall consist of the following:
❖ A polyethylene flange thermally butt-fused to the stub end of the pipe.
❖ SS 316 back up ring mate with SS 316 flange.
Page 89 of 97
❖ SS 316 bolts and nuts as required.

❖ Flange connections shall be provided with a full-face neoprene gasket.
➢ If a defective pipe is discovered after it has been installed, it shall be removed and
replaced with a sound pipe in a satisfactory manner at no additional cost to the
Engineer-in-charge. All pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned before
installation, shall be kept clean until they are used in the work and when laid, shall
conform to the lines and grades required and not kinked or otherwise damaged.
(vi) Excavation of trenches:

• Excavation shall be done as laid down in the specification of Civil Works.
(vii) Lowering of pipe into trench:

• Pipe should be lowered into the trench with tackle suitable for the weight of the pipes
using suitable lifting slings, preferable flat. On no account should chains or wire ropes be
used. The position of the sling to ensure a proper balance should be checked when the
pipe is clear of the ground. Any construction debris inside the pipe is removed using pull
through.
• Pipe should be joined in the trench and laid on the prepared bed so as to maintain
substantially continuous contact with the bed. Small depressions should be made in the
bed to accommodate the pipe joints. When the pipe socket or pipe and collars have been
bedded, the depressions should be filled taking care that no voids remain under or
around the joint.
• If due to steep gradient or waterlogged conditions, the bedding tends to act as a drain for
subsoil water, the insertion of water stops by means of puddle clay dams across the
trench may be necessary to resist the passage of water.
• Trench preparation: The trench should not be opened too far in advance of pipe laying
and should be backfilled as soon as possible. The width of the trench at the crown of the
pipe should be as narrow as practicable but not less than the outside diameter of the
pipe plus 300 mm to allow proper compaction of the side fill and at a height of 225 mm
above the crown of the pipe, the trench may be of any convenient width.
• Depth of the trench plays an important role and depends on the dia of the pipe and
cover required. The min. depth should be width plus outer diameter of pipe or 750 mm
above the crown of the pipe, whichever is more. If shoring is required then it should be
done as per instruction of Architect/ Engineer-in-charge. Excavated material should be
deposited one metre away from the edge of the trench to avoid damage to the pipes
through falling stones or debris.
• Trench bottom: In all cases, the trench should be excavated to a depth which will allow
for laying the pipes on a prepared under bed. The trench bottom should be carefully
examined for the presence of soft spots and hard objects such as stones, rock projections
or tree roots, which should be removed and filled with well tamped bedding material.
Where a delay in pipe laying is envisaged, the bottom layer of 300 mm should not be
removed until the permanent material is about to be placed in order to avoid
deterioration of the formation.
• Bedding material: Imported sand or sand/ gravel mixture having a compaction factor not
greater than 0.3 may be used. It should be properly compacted so as to attain not less
than 90 % of the max. dry density at optimum moisture content and provision should be
made for field testing accordingly.
Page 90 of 97
• Back filling: The material used for side fills and initial backfill should comply with the
requirements for bedding material. For protection of the pipe, the side filling and initial
backfilling operations should be carried out as soon as possible, after the pipes have
been laid and tested. The material should be placed and compacted by hand in layers not
more than 100 mm thick and should extend over the crown of the pipe to a depth of 100
mm for 110 mm dia pipe and 150 mm for larger diameter. It should extend over the full
width of the trench as excavated.
If “as-dug” material is free from stones exceeding 40 mm, imported processed granular
material is not needed above the pipe crown. Cover the pipe crown with a min. of 300
mm of compacted “as-dug’ material. Hand tamps the material fully at the sides of the
pipe, while tamping lightly over the crown. Continue hand tamping until a finished layer
of 300 mm has been placed over the pipe. Mechanical compactors, other than hand
vibrators, should not be used until the total depth of backfill over the pipe is 450 mm.
(viii) Joining of pipes:

• Joining of pipes with solvent cement:
➢ Cut the pipe as square as possible. Ensure that fitment of pipe with socket of fitting is
correct. The total length of insertion of socket shall be marked on pipe (for most of
the cases the pipe inserted should be up to marked line and in no case shall be less
than 2/3rd of the pipe end up to marked line).
➢ The pipe and socket should be clean, dry, and free from dust, oil, water, grease etc.
The surface should be wiped clean with dry cloth or cleaner may be used to remove
impurities from the surfaces to be coated with solvent cement. Roughen the outside
of the pipe and the inside of the socket using sand paper or piece of hacksaw blade
up to make the entry mark. Stir adhesive i.e. solvent cement thoroughly. Apply the
thick coat of solvent cement using a flat clean brush evenly on the inside of the
socket mouth for full length of insertion and then on outside of the pipe end up to
marked line.
➢ After application of solvent cement, insert the pipe within one minute into the
socket. Hold the joint for few seconds and ensure that pipe does not come out of the
fitting. Wipe off extra cement. Do not dilute solvent cement with cleaning fluid.
Special care should be taken while joining large diameter and or higher class pipes (6
kg/sq cm and above). For such pipes always heavy-duty solvent cement must be
used.
• Joining of NP 2 R.C.C pipes:
➢ Wrap tarred gasket around the spigot of each pipe and the spigot placed into the
socket of the pipe previously laid; the pipe adjusted and fixed in its correct position
and the gasket caulked tightly home so as to fill not more than one quarter of the
total depth of the socket. The end grooves of the R.C.C pipe shall be filled with
necessary bitumastic compound/ black putty. The remainder of the socket shall be
filled with a stiff mix of cement mortar (1:1) one part of cement to one part of clean
sharp washed sand. When the socket is filled, a fillet should be formed round the
joint with a trowel forming angle 45 degrees with the barrel of the pipe. The mortar
shall be mixed as needed for immediate use and all mortar shall be used up within
half an hour of mixing.
➢ After the joint has been made, any and all extraneous materials shall be removed
from inside of the joint with a suitable scrapper or 'badger'. The newly made joints
shall be protected until set from the sun, drying winds, rain or dust. Sacking or other
Page 91 of 97
suitable materials, which can be kept damp, shall be used. The joints shall be
exposed and space left all round the pipes for inspection by the Architect/ Engineer/
PMC. The inside of the sewer must be left absolutely clear in bore and free from
cement mortar or other obstructions throughout its entire length. The joints shall be
cured for at least 7 days.
(ix) Testing of water supply system: After completion of erection and assembly of water supply
system; the system shall be charged slowly and carefully with water allowing all air inside to
escape by avoiding shock or water hammer. The services shall then be inspected under working
conditions of pressure. When all draw of points are closed, the service pipe shall be water tight.
Then the water pressure in the pipeline increased by hydraulic pressure testing machine to
reach the test pressure and held for the period mentioned in the schedule. All piping, fittings
and appliances checked for leak proof condition. Ensure necessary support for protection from
damage and corrosion etc. for piping, fitting and all appliances.
• Testing of pipes and fittings: On completion of assembly, the pipelines are to be tested
to ensure that the system is absolutely leak proof. All tests shall be conducted by the
Contractor at his expenses in presence of the Architect/ PMC/ Engineer.
➢ All cPVC (schedule 40) and G.I pipes and fittings for water distribution arrangement
should be tested by hydraulic pressure machine to a pressure of 7 Kg. per sq.cm. and
pressure shall be maintained for not less than 30 minutes to ensure that pipes have
proper threads and that proper materials (such as teflon tape) have been used in
jointing of G.I pipe, and solvent cement joint for cPVC (schedule 40) pipe. All leaky
joints must be made leak proof by tightening or re-doing it at Contractor's expenses.
➢ Water supply pipeline from underground water tank to overhead tank and roof ring
main shall be tested to a pressure of 10 kg/ sq. cm. maintained for at least 2 hours.
➢ Because of possibility of damage in transit, cistern shall be retested for water
tightness on arrival at site before fixing in place.
(x) Testing of sewer system: Comprehensive testing of all appliances shall be made by simulating
conditions of use before final approval. Overflow shall also be examined for obstruction. All
lengths of the sewer and drain shall be fully tested for water tightness by means of water
pressure maintained for not less than 30 minutes. Testing shall be carried out from manhole to
manhole. All pipes shall be subjected to a test pressure of at least two-meter head of water at
the highest point of the section under test. The pipes shall be plugged preferably with
standard drain plugs (with rubber strings) on both ends. The upper end shall be connected to a
pipe for filling with water and getting the required head. The leakage or quantity of water to be
supplied to maintain the test pressure for a period of 10 minutes shall not exceed 0.2 liters/mm
dia. of pipes per kilometer length per day for non pressure pipes. However, it is better to
observe the leakage for a period of 24 hours, if feasible.
• Sewer/ storm lines shall be tested for straightness:
➢ By inserting a smooth ball of diameter 15 mm less than the bore of the pipe. In the
absence of obstructions such as yarn or mortar projecting at the joints the ball
should roll down the invert of the pipe and emerge at the lower end.
➢ By means of a mirror at one end and a lamp at the other end. If the pipelines are
straight the full circle of light will be seen otherwise obstruction or deviation will be
apparent.
➢ The Contractor shall be giving a smoke test to the drain and sewer (if made by SWR
and NP2 R.C.C pipe) at his own expense if directed by the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC.
Page 92 of 97
For brick sewers, regardless of their dia, the permissible leakage of water shall not
exceed 10 cubic meters for 24 hours per km length of sewer.
• Testing of manhole: All manholes shall be tested for water tightness by filling them with
water and observing any subsidence of water level. The down-stream pipeline too shall
be filled with water to avoid outgo from the manhole. This applied to specifications for
manholes.
(xi) Test for drain pipe: The drain pipe shall be subject to test pressure of at least 1.5 mtr head of
water at the highest point of the section under test. The tolerance figure of two litres per
centimeter of diameter per kilometer (or one gallon per inch diameter per mile) shall be
allowed during a period of ten minutes. The test shall be carried out by suitably plugging the
low end of the drain and the ends of connections if any and then filling the system with water.
(xii) Test Register: A test register for all sanitary and plumbing lines including manholes shall be
maintained at site which shall be signed and dated by the Contractor and Architect/ Engineer/
PMC.
(xiii) Installation of sanitary fixtures and fittings:

• General requirement:
➢ The fixtures and fittings shall be provided with all such accessories as are required to
complete the item in satisfactory working conditions, whether specifically mentioned
or not in the schedule of quantities, specifications and drawings.
➢ The sanitary fixtures and fittings shall be installed at the correct assigned position as
shown on the drawings and as directed by the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC, and shall
fully meet the aesthetic and symmetrical requirements as demanded by the
Architect/ Engineer-in-charge. All fixtures and accessories shall be fixed in
accordance with a set pattern matching the tile or interior finish as per the
requirements. Wherever necessary, the fittings shall be centered to dimensions and
pattern as called for.
➢ Skilled workmen shall install fixtures with appropriate tools according to the best
trade practice. Manufacturer’s instructions shall be followed for the installation of
fixtures. Fixtures in all toilets shall be of standard height mounting as called for on
the drawings. Fixtures shall be mounted rigid, plumb and true to alignment.
• Sanitary fixtures and appurtenances:
➢ European water closet (EWC) with concealed cistern: Water closet shall be fixed on
the wall with fixture provided in the set. The EWC must be fixed to correct line, level
and dimensions. If necessary, the edging between wall and EWC shall be finished
with silicon compound manufactured by M/s. Pidilite Industries or approved
equivalent. If applied, the compound must be wiped clean so as no smears are left on
wall or on EWC surface. The EWC set shall be so installed that no gap remains
between wall and water closet.
Cistern for EWC shall be fixed behind the EWC bowl inside wall. The flush pipe (if
required) should be of heavy quality and white in colour. EWC seat and lid shall be
fixed on the WC bowl with brass CP hinges or with the hinges supplied by the
manufacturer. Angle valve with wall flange shall be fixed in line of the cistern inlet
ball cock and the connector pipe will be a short one also to be connected in the same
straight line with the cistern inlet as indicated in the drawing. A health faucet
Page 93 of 97
attached to 1 m stainless steel braided hose with swivel hook to be placed beside the
EWC.
➢ Indian water closet (IWC) with cistern: The Orissa type IWC shall be embedded in
the floor with PCC (1: 2: 4) and Sika grout admixture so that the foot-rest portion
remains flush with finished floor level. Flushing cistern with angle valve shall be
placed at a suitable location in the wall above IWC. Angle valve with wall flange shall
be fixed in line of the cistern inlet ball cock and the connector pipe will be a short
one also to be connected in the same straight line with the cistern inlet as indicated
in the drawing.
➢ Wash basin set: The wash basin will be fixed to the wall in the following manner. The
wash basin is under counter type and supported on CI brackets (heavy type) or 15 NB
GI (medium) pipe embedded in wall with concrete block grout of 100 x 100 mm x
wall thickness or stainless steel anchor bolt. The anchor bolt, if used, will be
embedded in the wall in cement sand mortar grout (1: 3) with Sika grout non–shrink
admixture.
The wash basin shall be placed correct to line and level. Levelling shall be checked by
good quality spirit levels and not the conventional tube type water levels. The
grouting shall be cured for 3 days. The edge of wall and gap between counter top and
basin shall be finished neatly with colourless silicon compound manufactured by M/s.
Pidilite Industries or approved equivalent. Next, the 32 mm CP waste with waste
coupler shall be fixed. The outer end will be sealed with a rubber ring or suitable
sealant approved and covered with a flange. CP angular stop cock (hot and cold)
with wall flanges shall be fixed to the GI/ cPVC pipe fittings with teflon tape.
Connector pipes and coupling nuts shall be fixed with proper bending to the inlet
points of wall mixture. Other necessary fittings like bottle trap, piller cock etc. as
specified in schedule shall be fixed with teflon tape as per the direction of Architect/
Engineer/ Engineer-in-charge. The bracket arrangement, GI pipe etc. to be painted
with two coats of synthetic enamel paint over one coat of zinc chromate primer as
directed.
➢ Shower set: This will be installed as concealed units. There will be two-in-one
concealed type wall mixture and CP bend pipe for shower. Overhead shower will
have one angular shower arm with wall flange and ball bearing shower rose. All
fixtures shall be screwed on type and shall be fitted with teflon tape and hold-tite
pipe thread solution. No jute and zinc oxide will be allowed for sealing the threaded
joints. The shower set (if G.I) long screws will be made from ‘M’ class Tata make MS
pipes and then galvanize. The concealed stop-cocks shall be so fitted that the wall
flanges are flush mounted on wall cladding without showing any gap between wall
face and flange face. The centreline of shower arm and the concealed stopcock
should be in the same line.
➢ Towel rails: These shall be fixed to walls with brass CP/ galvanized screws (IS: 1365
and IS: 1366) 40 mm long and PVC holdfasts. All holes will be drilled with portable
electric drill. Installation heights and other dimensions will be as per the drawing.
➢ Ablution/ bib taps: This tap shall be screwed-on type with wall flange. The tap shall
be screwed-on with teflon tape and hold-tite joint sealant. Installation heights and
other dimensions will be as per the drawing.
➢ Kitchen sink: The kitchen sink of approved make shall be installed on the kitchen
table where an aperture provided to suit the sink dimensions. C.P. brass mixture with
wall mounted swivel type sink spout (for hot and cold water) with wall flange shall be
Page 94 of 97
fixed at the center of sink bowl with height and dimensions as shown in drawing. The
accessory will be screwed-on type and is to be installed with teflon tape and hold-tite
joint sealing solution. The sink shall be supported on CI brackets (heavy type) or 15
NB GI (medium) pipe embedded in wall with concrete block grout of 100 x 100 mm x
wall thickness or stainless steel anchor bolt. The anchor bolt, if used, to be
embedded in the wall in cement sand mortar grout (1: 3) with Sika grout non–shrink
admixture. The sink will have a 40 mm dia waste outlet fitted with coupling nut and
small flange. The bracket arrangement, GI water supply pipe etc. to be painted with
two coats of synthetic enamel paint over one coat of zinc chromate primer as
directed.
➢ SS grating: Heavy Duty stainless steel grating will be placed vertically over the wall
flush with the wall tiles and the edge sealing to be done with colourless silicon
compound.
➢ Supporting and fixing devices: The Contractor shall provide all the necessary
supporting and fixing devices to install the sanitary fixtures and fittings securely in
position. The fixing devices shall be rigidly anchored into the building structure. The
devices shall be rust resistant and shall be so fixed that they do not present an
unsightly appearance in the final assembly. Where the location demands, the
Architect/ Engineer-in-charge may instruct the Contractor to provide chromium
plated or other similarly finished fixing devices. In such circumstances the Contractor
shall arrange to supply the fixing devices and shall install the fixtures complete with
appropriate vibration isolating pad, washer and gasket etc. All pipes shall be securely
supported. The maximum distance between hanger and supports for horizontally
mounted and vertically mounted pipes shall be as indicated below.
Details of pipe support:
Sr. no. Nominal size of M.S. Flat “ U ” Bolt Expansion Bolt

1 Pipe (mm) size (mm) Dia (mm) size (mm)
2 Up to 25 75 x 6 6 6
3 32 to 40 75 x 6 6 9
4 50 to 80 75 x 6 9 9
5 100 75 x 6 12 12
6 150 75 x 6 15 15
Schedule of pipe supports:
Hanger rod or
Nominal pipe M.S hook thk Maximum interval in steel Maximum interval in
clamp in
size in (mm) in (mm) pipe (m) PVC pipe (m)
(mm)
H V H V
Up to 50 9 5 2.5 3.0 1.2 1.5
65 to 80 12 6 3.3 4.5 1.9 2.4
100 15 6 4.4 4.5 2.4 2.4
150 22 9 4.8 4.5 2.4 3.0
Note: All clamp, hook, etc. made of MS flat shall be hot dip galvanized type. All nut, bolt,
U-bolt, washer and band strap etc. supplied shall also be hot dip galvanized only.
➢ Final installation: The Contractor shall install all sanitary fixtures and fittings in their
final position in accordance with approved trial assemblies and as shown on
Page 95 of 97
drawings. The installation shall be complete with all supply and waste connections.
The connection between building and piping system and the sanitary fixtures shall be
through proper unions and flanges to facilitate removal/ replacement of sanitary
fixtures without disturbing the built-in piping system. All unions and flanges shall
match in appearance with other exposed fittings. CP fittings and fixtures including
specials and wall flanges shall be of approved quality ISI marked of 15 mm nominal
dia fixed to concealed/ exposed pipe line with leak proof threaded joint by teflon
tape, testing the joints hydraulically to a pressure of 10 kg/ sq cm and rectify leaks in
the joints, if occurs.
Fixtures shall be mounted rigid, plumb and to alignment. The outlets of water closet
pans and similar appliances shall be examined to ensure that outlet ends are butting
on the receiving pipes before making the joints. It shall be ensured that the receiving
pipes are clear of obstruction. When fixtures are being mounted, attention shall be
paid to the possibility of movement and settlement by other causes. Overflows shall
be made to ensure that necessary anchoring devices have been provided for
supporting water closets, washbasins, sinks and other appliances.
➢ Protection from damage: The Contractor shall take every precaution to protect all
sanitary fixtures against damage, misuse, cracking, staining, breakage and pilferage
by providing proper wrapping and locking arrangement till the completion of the
installation. At the time of handing over, the Contractor shall clean, disinfect and
polish all the fixtures and fittings. Any fixtures and fittings found damaged, cracked,
chipped, stained or scratched shall be removed and new fixtures and fittings free
from defects shall be installed at the cost of Contractor to complete the work.
(xiv) Manhole:
• Manholes of different types and sizes shall be constructed in the sewer line at such
places and to such levels and dimensions as shown on drawings or as directed by the
Architect/ Engineer/ PMC. The size specified shall indicate the inside dimensions of the
manholes. The work shall be done strictly as per the drawings and specifications.
• The manhole shall be excavated true to dimensions and levels shown on the plan or as
directed by the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC.
• Bed concrete: The manholes shall be built on a bed of cement concrete (1: 3: 6) (1
cement: 3 fine sand: 6 stone ballast) with 20 mm down stone chips. The thickness of the
bed shall be (15 cm) up to a depth of 2.0 mtr, unless otherwise specified or directed by
the Architect/ Engineer/ PMC.
• Brick work: The brickwork shall be with 1st class bricks in cement mortar 1: 6 (1 cement:
6 fine sand).
• Plastering: The walls of the manholes shall be plastered inside with (18mm) thick cement
plaster 1: 4 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand) finished smooth, with a floating coat of cement
slurry. In case of arched type manholes the walls shall be plastered inside all round only
up to crown level and flush pointed with cement mortar 1: 2 (1 cement : 2 find sand). All
external surface of brick masonry shall be plastered with (12mm) cement plaster 1: 4 (1
cement: 4 coarse sand). The plastered area shall be water proofed with addition of
approved water proofing compound as per manufacturer's recommendation.
• Benching: The channels and benching shall be done in cement concrete 1: 2: 4 (1
cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 stone ballast with 20mm gauge and rendered smooth with
neat cement.
Page 96 of 97
• R.C.C. work: R.C.C. Work for slabs and lintels shall be in cement concrete 1: 1.5: 3 (1
cement: 1.5 coarse sand: 3 stone ballast with 20 mm down stone chips. The thickness of
the slab and reinforcement shall be as per standard drawing.
• Foot rests: All manholes deeper than 1.0 Meter shall be provided with C.I. footrests as
per IS: 5455. They shall be embedded in cement concrete blocks (225 x 225 x 80 mm.) of
1: 2: 4 mixes. Foot rests shall be fixed 30 cm apart vertically and staggered laterally and
shall project 10 cm beyond the surface of the wall.
• Manhole cover with frame: P.C.P.C manhole cover with frame should be heavy duty (32
MT capacity) at road and medium duty (12 ton capacity) for inside and foot path area.
(xv) Disinfection of piping system and storage tank: Before commissioning the water supply
system, the Contractor shall arrange to disinfect the entire system as described below:
The water storage tanks and pipes shall first be filled with water and thoroughly flushed out.
The storage tanks shall then be filled with water again and disinfecting chemical containing
chlorine should be added gradually while tanks are being filled to ensure thorough mixing.
Sufficient chemical shall be used to give water a dose of 50 parts of chlorine to one million
parts of water. If ordinary bleaching powder is used, the proportions will be 150 gm. of powder
to 1000 liters of water. The powder shall be mixed with water in the storage tank. If a
proprietary brand of chemical is used, makers shall specify the proportions. When the storage
tank is full, the supply shall be stopped and all the taps on the distributing pipes are to be
opened successively working progressively away from the storage tank. Each tap shall be
closed when the water discharged begins to smell of chlorine. The storage tank shall then be
filled up with water from supply pipe and added with more disinfecting chemical in the
recommended proportions. The storage tank and pipe shall then remain charged at least for
three hours. Finally the tank and pipes shall be thoroughly flushed out before any water is used
for domestic purpose.
(xvi) Method of measurement: The following methods of measurement will be followed unless
otherwise mentioned in General Conditions of Contract.
• Sanitary fixtures, water heater etc.: These shall be measured as per actual number of
units fixed.
• uPVC soil, waste pipes and fittings: The measurement of pipes shall be taken along the
centerline of the pipelines inclusive of fittings and joints.
• Underground water supply pipes and fittings: The measurement shall be taken along
the centerline of pipelines inclusive of PPR/ G.I/ PVC Specials. Number of PPR/ G.I/ PVC
fittings will not be measured separately. No extra payment is admissible for testing of
pipeline. Numbers of valves, cocks, pumps etc. are to be measured separately.
• Underground sewer and storm lines: For sewer/ storm lines, measurement shall be recorded
for the finished length of the pipeline including joints i.e. overall length of sewer/ storm line
excluding the internal length of manholes. For yard gully connections, measurement shall be
recorded between the joint of yard gully and inside face of manhole. Number of manholes,
gully pit and yard gullies etc. are to be measured separately. No extra payment is admissible for
testing of sewer lines, storm line and water supply line.
Page 97 of 97
ELECTRICAL WORKS
1. SCOPE
a. This Specification covers the design, engineering, manufacture, testing at manufacturer’s

works before dispatch, packing, forwarding and delivery, supervision of erection, testing at site
and commissioning of cubicle type, indoor, floor mounted, dust and vermin proof 11 kV
Vacuum Circuit breaker panel complete with all accessories required for satisfactory and
coordinated operation.
b. The bidder is wholly responsible for providing a functionally complete system in accordance
with the specifications, schedule of quantities, and SLD.
c. The equipment shall be of type tested design at CPRI /Independent test house for short circuit,
temperature rise, dielectric tests and all other tests as required for the ratings as indicated in
the BOQ/Drawings etc. If the type test reports are not available for the required ratings, the
test has to be conducted and relevant documents shall be submitted.
d. Vendor shall not restrict to the tests mentioned in the specifications. All necessary testes as
per code / Client requirement shall be conducted.
e. Type of breaker, short time rating and other specific details, please refer to the technical &
specific requirement sheets, BOQ and scheme drawing.
f. The panel shall be provided with necessary base frames, cut-outs and other necessary items
required for complete functioning of the panel.
g. All such systems / equipment / components / works which are necessary for the completeness
of the system but not mentioned explicitly shall be a part of the scope of VCB panel vendor.
h. The breaker panels shall be provided with potential free contacts or any other field devices to
accept command from BMS and to send status/any other signals to BMS as per IO
Summary/drawings apart from the generally required components.
i. The switchgear shall have suitable provision (cut-out) for housing the Electronic Trivector
meters (ETVM) to be supplied by the Electronic-billing agency.
j. All necessary interlocking arrangements to be provided as per standards and as indicated in
the drawings. This should also cover the necessary interfacing requirements of BMS
2. SUBMISSIONS
a. Equipment drawing / GA drawings including manufacturer’s data, shop drawing showing the
co-ordinated installation detail, control block diagram and interface wiring diagram shall be
furnished.
b. Builder’s works requirement such as equipment foundation requirements and rating of
interfacing devices with other panels / equipments.
c. Equipment earthing layouts and schematics shall be furnished.
d. Guaranteed technical particulars as listed in the Annexure-I to be filled / confirmed by the
manufacturer / supplier along with the above submittals.
e. All the pages of this technical specification have to be signed and submitted along with the
above listed drawing / documents by the manufacturer / supplier.
Page 1 of 64
3. STANDARDS
Updated and current Indian Standard Specifications and Codes of Practice will apply to the
equipment and the work covered by the scope of this contract. In addition, the relevant clauses of
the Indian Electricity Act 1910, Indian Electricity Rules 1956, National Building Code 2005, National
Electric Code 2008, Code of Practice for Fire Safety of Building (general): General Principal and Fire
Grading – IS 1641 - 1988 as amended up-to date shall also apply. In case of any contradiction
between these codes, the most stringent of the above shall apply. Wherever appropriate Indian
Standards are not available, relevant British (BS) and/or IEC Standards shall be applicable.
(a) IS 3427; 1969 : Metal enclosed switchgear and control gear for voltages above
1000V but not exceeding 11000 V.
(b) IS 2516 : AC Circuit Breakers
(c) IS 3842 : Specification for electrical relays for AC system
(d) IS 3231 : 1986 : Electrical Relays for Power System Protection
(e) IS 3156; 1978 : Voltage Transformers.
(f) IS 2705 ; 1981 : Current Transformers
(g) IS 5424 : 1983 : Rubber Mats for Electrical Works
(h) IS 2551 : 1982 : Danger Notice Plate
(i) IS 1248 & 3107 : Direct acting Electrical indicating instruments.
(j) IS 2099 : Bushings for alternating voltages above 1000V.
(k) IS 6875 : Control switches for voltages up to and including 1000V AC and
1200 V DC.
(l) IS 2147 : Degree of protection for enclosure
(m) IS 2208 : Specification for HRC cartridge fuse links up to 650 Volts.
(n) IS 5082 : Wrought Al. and aluminum alloys, bars, rods, tube and Sections for
electrical purposes.
(o) IEC 129 : AC isolators and earthing switches
(p) IEC 298 : AC metal enclosed switchgear and control gear for rated voltages
above 1kV and up to and including 72.5 kV.
(q) IEC 694 : Common clauses for high voltage switchgear and control gear
standards.
(r) IEC 56 : HV alternating current circuit breakers.
(s) IEC 137 : Bushings for alternating voltages above 1000V
(t) IEC 470, : HT AC contactors
IEC 60298, IS 3427
(u) IEC 60694, : Bus bar
IS 12729, IS 5082
4. Site conditions:
The VCB’s shall be suitable for installation and satisfactory operation to operate under following site
conditions.
Atmosphere : All weather condition.
Altitude : 300 mtr. above MSL
Page 2 of 64
Ambient temperature range : 30C to 45 0C

Seismic Zone : III
Seismic Vibration components
Vertical acceleration : 0.155G (ratio to Gravity)
Horizontal acceleration : 0.209G (Ratio to gravity)
Seismic Design Criteria :
The equipment shall be designed for operation in seismic zone for earthquake resistance. The
seismic loads are due to the horizontal and vertical acceleration which may be assumed to act non-
concurrently. Seismic level Zone- III, as per new IS- 1893, Year-2002 has to be considered for the
design of equipment. The seismic loads shall be equal to static loads corresponding to the weight of
the parts multiplied by the acceleration. The equipments along with its parts shall be strong enough
and sufficiently well connected to resist total operating stresses resulting from the forces in normal
operation but in case of abnormal condition shall also resist with forces superimposed due to
earthquakes.
SECTION-I : 11KV VCB Panel

SINGLE BUSBAR INDOOR TYPE 1-PANEL 11 kV 25 kA SWITCHBOARD
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATION
Fully interlocked floor mounted indoor type single board panel equipped with vertically/horizontally
isolated and horizontally withdrawn Vacuum Circuit Breaker with motor operated spring charged
mechanism. The switchboard should be designed and constructed in accordance with latest
revisions of IEC-62271- 100/102/200; IEC-60694; IEC- 61633, however, it should also conform to the
requirements of IS: 13118; IS: 3427. In addition, the switchboard should strictly conform to
following general specification.
2. SYSTEM PARAMETERS & SWITCHGEAR RATINGS

A. Relevant System particulars are as follows:
a) System: 11kV switchboard : 11 kV 3 phase, 50 Hz. effectively
earthed
b) Highest System Voltage : 12kV for 11kV system.
c) Insulation level for both : 12kV rms /28 kV rms /75 kV peak
11 kV switch board
d) Fault Level (Symmetrical) : 25 kA rms for 1 sec
e) Average ambient Temperature : 400 C
f) Maximum ambient : 450 C
Temperature
g) Humidity : 100%
h) Altitude : Less than 300 Meters above mean
sea level
B. Rating of Switchgear:
Page 3 of 64
a) Insulation level : All equipment should be rated for

: 12 kV
b) Rating of busbar : 630A
c) Incomer & Outgoing : 630A
feeder panel
d) Rated power Frequency : 28 kV rms
withstand voltage of Sw. Gear
e) Impulse withstand voltage : 75 kV peak
[1.2/50 micro-sec. Waveform (phase to earth)]
f) D.C. Voltage Rating of : 110V D.C.
Closing & Tripping coils
g) Voltage Rating for Spring : 230V, AC, 1-phase
Charging motor
h) Voltage Rating for : 230V, AC, 1-phase
indication lamps
i) Mechanical endurance
capability of operating
Mechanism of breaker with : 10,000 operations.
moderate duty cycle
NOTE: Current rating of the circuit breakers should be on the basis of the breaker trucks
housed inside the cubicle in its service position at the specified maximum ambient
temperature.
C. PANEL DETAILS
(a) Each switch panel should be basically divided into the following
compartments:
• Busbar compartment
• Circuit breaker compartment
• CT & Cable Box compartment
• LT compartment
(b) Each compartment should be isolated from each other, by means of metal
barriers / shutters to avoid any possibility of contact with live parts and to
prevent fault propagation between compartments in one cubicle. All
compartments should also be completely sealed off and all redundant
holes/cutouts meticulously blocked off to prevent passage of vermin from
one compartment to other.
(c) The cubicle should be fabricated with minimum 2mm. thick sheet steel for
the covers; 3mm. thick sheet steel for the barriers / front door and be of
bolted type design to permit easy extension in future and should be vermin
proof and weather proof of protective class IP: 4X. Mating surfaces of all the
bolted parts are to be specially painted with zinc paint to ensure continuity
of earthing between them. All the fastenings are to be integral with the
panel or door with locking facilities. Doors & panels should be fitted with
weather proof sealing materials to prevent entry of vermin and ingress of
dust particles.
Page 4 of 64
(d) Temperature rise at Silver-plated contacts and connections should not

exceed 65 0C over the maximum ambient temperature but the temperature
rise for external connection to cables should not exceed 45 0C.
(e) All low voltage conductors that run through high voltage compartments (e.g.
wirings for the CTs, heaters etc.) must run through grounded metal
raceway/flexible metal conduit. The only exception is for short pigtail and
connections to electrical devices that cannot interface with metal encasing.
(f) Panels should be of arc resistant construction. Individual explosion vents /
flap type pressure relief device should be provided for breaker, busbar,
cable compartment on the top of the panel to let out the gases under
pressure generated due to a fault inside the panel. These vents must be
positioned so that the hot gases are directed away from the operators.
Door must be reinforced, secured with special hinges and multiple points
latching hardware to prevent bursting open in case of internal fault for
safety of operators. Doors, side panels, covers and parts of equipment
should withstand the high pressure until relief flap operates, without being
blown off from the cubicle during any internal arc fault. The front door of
the breaker compartment cannot be opened when the breaker is in 'service'
position.
D. Busbar Compartment
a) Totally enclosed busbar chambers complete with three phase 630A
electrolytic copper busbars and busbar droppers of current rating equivalent
to that of corresponding circuit breaker rating. The busbar chamber should
be contained in its own bus-trough and should be totally segregated from
the breaker or circuit chambers.
b) There may be grounded metal segregations between each cubicle and the
bus troughs.
c) Busbars should be fully insulated. Insulation is required on all parts of
busbars which include splice joints, tap points, droppers etc. Cast resin or
Fiberglass shrouds for joints shall be provided. Bus insulation should
withstand a high potential test equal to maximum rated voltage of the
equipment for one minute. Splice joints must be silver-plated.
d) Busbar system must be designed and tested to withstand short circuit
forces, BIL voltage, & I2R losses.
e) All hardware shall be corrosion resistant. All joints and connections shall be
made by zinc passivated or cadmium plated high tensile strength steel bolts,
nuts and washers, secured against loosening.
f) Busbars shall have uniform current ratings throughout their length.
g) The thermal design of the busbars shall be based on installation of the
switchgear in poorly ventilated condition.
h) All busbar connections shall be supported and braced to withstand stresses
due to maximum short circuit current and also to take care of thermal
expansion.
Page 5 of 64
i) Busbars shall be colour coded for easy identification and so located that the
sequence R-Y-B shall be from left to right, top to bottom & rear to front,
when viewed from front of the switchgear assembly.
E. Circuit Breaker Compartment

a) The truck mounted apparatus like, circuit breaker, operating mechanism;
potential transformer etc. should be housed in the circuit breaker
compartment. The front door of this compartment should be provided with
single grip locking device for effective clamping along the full height of the
door. This locking device should be provided with additional external
padlock. Arrangement should be provided on front door to observe the
mechanical ON / OFF indication, spring charged / discharged condition,
operation counter of circuit breaker and the mechanical indication of
TEST/SERVICE positions of the truck. Necessary orifice should be provided
for manual charging of springs without opening the front door. Also
mechanical ON & OFF push buttons should be provided for emergency
closing and opening of the circuit breaker while in service position, without
opening the front door.
b) The fully draw out type truck should have three definite positions viz.
Isolated, Test and Service position. A racking handle is to be provided for
the ease of insertion and withdrawal of the breaker truck to and from the
service position without opening the front door.
c) In TEST position, the main power contacts should be isolated while the
secondary control contacts remain connected thereby enabling operation of
the circuit breaker electrically inside the cubicle in TEST position with front
door closed.
d) There should be a mechanical interlock to prevent isolation of the plugs of
secondary control contacts when the CB is in ‘closed’ position. Also there
should be provision so that the CB cannot be selected to ‘service’ position
without connecting the secondary control contacts.
e) The chamber should have two sets of isolating plugs and spouts with
automatic metallic safety shutter suitable for independent padlocking. The
shutters shall open / close automatically when the circuit breaker is racked
in / out. Circuit / Busbar spout shutters should preferably be made of sheet
metal and colour coded with proper inscriptions ‘Danger’, ‘Busbar’, ‘Circuit’
etc. Provision shall be made to padlock the breaker in its disconnected/test
position. It should also be possible to open & padlocking one set of shutter
with the other set closed/opened.
f) Potential Transformer (three phase unearthed unit) should be mounted on
withdrawable type trolley or on circuit breaker trolley itself complete with
H.T. fuses, primary and secondary isolating contacts. The PT trolley or front
door should have sealing arrangement on corners.
Page 6 of 64
g) The breaker truck front sheet should be strong enough to ensure safety of
operating personnel in case of untoward operating condition even when
breaker compartment door is opened.
F. C.T. and Cable Box Compartment

a) The mounting of CTs should be such that they are easily accessible and can
be replaced in future, if necessary, without disturbing power cables
connected in the cable compartment. C.T. secondary terminals should be
easily accessible from the rear (after opening the rear cover plate) for
checking of secondary wirings. HT-class cast resin bar primary type would be
preferred for all types of panels.
b) The cable compartment should have provision for terminating 2 x 300mm2
single core copper XLPE cables. Cable end box compartment with bottom
plates considered in the proposed scheme. Note: Incoming cable and it’s
termination accessories are in the scope of power supply distribution agency
(ref: DBR-battery limits of electrical works).
c) Clearance between the 2 nos. cable connecting droppers of the same phase
should be at least 150mm.
d) A minimum vertical clearance of 600 mm is required from the cable lug-
fixing hole to the cable gland plate for facilitating ‘Raychem’ dry type
termination of cables. The gland plate in all the switch panels should be of
non-magnetic type, undrilled and suitably split in three parts for ease of
cable termination. The split section should be in vertical plumb line directly
below the individual cable droppers.
e) Lugs for termination of cable are to be supplied along with the panels. Cable
termination chamber should be suitable for ‘Heat Shrink’ / ‘Cold Shrink’ /
‘Raychem’ type joint.
f) All removable back and side covers should be provided with suitable grip
handles for ease of fixing and removal.
g) For the outgoing feeder switch, the rear cover plate should have provision of
sealing by seal with metal wire at one point on the top and at another point
at the bottom. For this, dowel type pins of about 4 mm diameter can be
fixed at the fixed portion of the rear plate. The dowel pins will be projected
about 1 cm through the hole at the removable rear plate and hole will be
provided at this pin for sealing of the rear cover with State Electricity
Board’s seal.
G. L.T. Compartment
Following control / indication / metering / relay equipments are to be provided in the
L.T. compartment:
(a) Control:
One Lockable Pistol grip type ‘close-neutral-trip’ three position breaker control switch
with sequence lost motion device for alarm and auto trip lamp cancellation contacts
Page 7 of 64
and having locking facilities in neutral position – to be provided on front door at a

convenient height to enable easy access to the operator.
(b) Indication:
Following indicating lamps are to be provided on front door of each incomer and
outgoing switch panel:
QTY COLOUR INSCRIPTION OPERATING VOLTAGE
i) One Red C.B. On 230V A. C.
ii) One Green C.B. Off 230V A. C.
iii) One Blue Spring Charged 230V A. C.
iv) One Amber Trip Healthy (Trip Coil-1) 110V D.C
v) One Amber Trip Healthy (Trip Coil-2) 110V D.C
vi) One White Auto Trip 110V DC.
NOTE: All indication lamps should be of wide voltage band, low voltage glow
protected LED type. One Push Button with 4N/O contacts for Trip Circuit healthy check
should also be provided in each panel. Each trip healthy lamp will glow when the push
button contact is closed after pressing the push button.
(c) Instruments:
i) Each Incomer switch panel should have 3 phase Ammeter and Voltmeter.
These meters should be 3-phase, 4-wire flush mounting type Digital Panel
meters, operated of 5A CT secondary & 110V VT secondary. The meters
should have provision of site programmable CT & VT Ratio selection &
internal phase selection from front. Auxiliary supply for the above meters
should be 110V AC from VT voltage.
ii) There will be no ammeter or voltmeter in the outgoing feeder switch panel.
iii) One suitable ammeter to monitor the space heaters in each switch panel
individually by means of a selector switch so that current drawn by each
heater in the panel as well as all the heaters together can be monitored.
iv) All meters should be installed at a same height & location in all the panels
for uniformity and convenience of taking reading by the operators.
(d) Relays:
Incomer Switch Panel:
i) One Optical Fiber based Numerical Line Differential Protection relay, Rating
– CT Input: 5A, Binary Input & Rated Aux Supply Voltage: 110V DC including
FO patch chord of 50m length with suitable connectors at relay end and FC
connectors at another end.
ii) One Tripping relay with rated voltage: 110V DC. Contact: 3N/O & 1N/C H/R
iii) Two nos. Trip circuit Supervision relay, Contact: 2N/C + 1N/O S/R on alarm
unit ‘C’ with flag, Rated voltage: 110V DC
iv) One Auxiliary relay, Contact: 2N/O S/R per element with flag, Rated voltage:
110V DC.
v) One 4-pole (3-O/C & 1-E/F) numerical Over-current & Earth fault relay.
Auxiliary Supply: Nominal- 110V DC, Range-50 to 150V DC, CT input: 5A,
Page 8 of 64
Status input voltage: 110V DC, Contacts: 2 N/O for General Trip, 1 N/O each
for IDMTL O/C & E/F and 1 N/C for watchdog.
Common Relay for 1- Panel Switch Board: (To be provided in Incomer-1 Panel)
i) One Bus Bar protection relay, rated current-1Amp, setting range-10%-40%

with 2 N/O self-reset contacts per element in 1DV draw out case, with 3nos.
1000 ohm stabilizing resistances, one no. associated Bus-bar protection
‘IN/OUT’ switch with corresponding Red & Green indication lamps and
circuitry for tripping all the circuit breakers through bus-bar protection &
White coloured indication lamp for the operation of bus-bar protection .
ii) Bus Zone protection ‘IN/OUT’ switch should be lockable type and have at
least one spare contact each for IN & OUT positions.
iii) One Bus Zone protection Tripping relay with rated voltage: 110V DC.
Contact: 4N/O H/R per element.
iv) Common Relay for 1- Panel Switch Board: (To be provided in Incomer-1
Panel)
v) One DC under Voltage relay draw out type of Un: 220V DC & Uaux: 110V AC.
(e) Other Equipments/ Features:
i) The front door of LT panel, being too high, should be provided in two halves
for convenience of operation at site. While the top half should be hinged at
one side & other side fixed with bolts/fly-nuts, the lower half should be
provided with ‘Almirah’ type locking arrangement for ease of
opening/closing, without sacrificing the vermin proofing aspect.
Arrangement of sealing of front door should be provided at corners.
ii) One no.3-phase, 4-wire link type Test Terminal Block with rear connection
arrangement should also be provided in each Incomer & Out-going panel for
bus zone protection. Bus zone CT should be routed through this TTB and a
bus wire is to be formed in the switchgear.
iii) All equipment on the door of the LT compartment and inside the LT
compartment, which are to be frequently accessed by the operator viz.
Control handle, Bus zone IN/OUT selector switch, protective relays,
indication lamps, fuses & links etc. are to be mounted at a lower height
while others viz. instruments, TTBs, terminal blocks etc. may be mounted at
a higher height.
iv) The following documents should be provided for our approval before
manufacturing:
▪ Schematic circuit diagram including inter-panel wiring diagram.
▪ Drawing showing the layout of equipment indicating location of the
terminal blocks and other equipment.
▪ Specifications of components to be used, like contactors, relays, etc.
(f) Control and C.T. secondary wiring:
i) Secondary wirings will be done with 1.1 kV grade (2.5 mm2 for CT & VT
circuits and 1.5 mm2 for Control circuits) copper PVC flexible stranded wires,
Page 9 of 64
terminated at the end by ‘RING’ type lugs with separate sleeves, crimped
socket & suitably ferruled on equipotential basis, as per our specification
and approved schematic diagrams. Red, Yellow, Blue & Black coloured wire
should be used for CT & VT circuits and Grey for control / alarm / indication
circuits.
ii) All terminal blocks should be stud type of size 4 mm dia. complete with nuts,
check nuts, spring washers and flat washers. Terminal block for CT
secondary wirings except those to be used for Tariff metering CT cores in
Outgoing Feeder panel should be disconnecting type and terminal blocks for
all other purposes should be of Stud type. 5% terminal blocks of each type
should be provided as spare. Not more than two wires to be terminated to a
single terminal block.
iii) Ring type crimping lugs should be used for termination of all wirings. Extra
secondary wire termination lugs, terminals and any other special tools
required for termination & which are proprietary items should be supplied
loose as free issue in adequate numbers (minimum 10 nos. of each type of
lugs at each panel) as may be required during the pre-commissioning /
commissioning tests.
iv) All terminal lugs are to be provided with a suitable separate insulating sleeve
(of length not less than 15mm.) to cover up the bare portion of the lugs. All
terminal blocks should be covered with transparent top covers.
v) Wherever necessary, MCBs of reputed make should be provided for control
circuit protection / isolation (except in DC circuit). Spare MCB should be
provided in the L.T chamber for future use. All fuse base & carriers should
with suitable HRC fuses. While all incoming wires to be terminated at the
bottom of MCB/NS fuse base, the outgoing wires to be terminated at top.
vi) All HRC fuses, links, lamps, control switches, contactors & relays should have
suitable easily visible inscriptions on anodized aluminum plates to indicate
the purpose clearly.
vii) There should be provision for terminating LT control cables to be entered
from the bottom of the switchgear cubicle.
viii) For the Outgoing Feeder Switch, space with wiring on front door panel of
the LT Chamber should be provided for mounting Tariff Meter at a height of
150 cm from ground. Meter will be supplied and installed by corresponding
Electricity Supply Authority.
ix) Static relay unhealthy contact of all panels should be looped up to the end
panels for local alarm.
H. CURRENT TRANSFORMER SPECIFICATION:
All HT-class CTs, if provided, should be of cast resin bar-primary type, rated for 12 kV voltage
grade and 31.5 kA for 3 seconds duration 25kA for 1 sec.(same as that of VCB rating as stated
in previous clauses). HT-class wound primary CTs may be accepted only in case bar primary
type CT cannot be accommodated. State Electricity Board’s approval will be required for
wound primary CTs. All CTs should conform to IS: 2705.
Page 10 of 64
a. Outgoing Feeder Switch Panel

Three CTs in each phase, viz.
CT -1: Purpose : Bus Zone protection
Turn Ratio : (i.e. CTR-100/5A)
Class : PS Rated Primary
Current : 630A
VK : >= 75 (RCT + 0.5) volts
I MAG : = <15 mA at ½ VK
RCT : =<2.5 ohm
CT -2: Dual purpose : Back up protection & metering

CTR : 100/5A
Class : 5P15 (Protection) & 0.5S (Metering)
Burden : 15 VA (at 400/5 ratio)
CT -3: Purpose : Tariff Metering

CTR : 100/5A
Class : 0.5s
ISF : =<5
b. Incomer Switch Panel Two CTs in each phase, viz.
CT -1: Purpose : Bus zone protection
Turn Ratio : (i.e. CTR-100/5A)
Class : PS Rated Primary
Current : 630A
VK : >=75 (RCT + 0.5) volts
I MAG : =<15 mA at 1/2 VK
RCT : <=2.5 ohms
CT -2: Dual purpose : Line Differential, Back up protection & Metering
CTR : 100/5A
Class : 5P15 (Protection) & 0.5S (Metering)
Note:
• Above Bus Zone protection CTs should have identical specifications i.e. identical RCT,
VK & I MAG in all Incomer & O/G feeder Switches.
• CT -1 should be on the cable side, CT -3 on the Bus-bar side.
• 3nos. 5/5A, 10VA, Cl: 0.5S, ISF<=5, Interposing CTs are to be provided in the LT
chamber of each Incomer switch panel for instrument security.
(a) POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER SPECIFICATION:

One 3- phase withdrawable type potential transformer connected in circuit side of the
Incomer & Outgoing breakers in star / star fashion for instrumentation and metering
and complete with HV fuses, withdrawal trolley, VT primary and secondary isolating
Page 11 of 64
contacts, to be provided in each panel. VT can also be mounted in the CB trolley itself
and its secondary terminals should be wired up to the terminal block in the LT
compartment.
Following points are to be considered for the design of the VT.
a) VT Primary Neutral should not be earthed.
b) Highest System Voltage: 12 kV.
c) Rated Insulation Level: 28 / 75 kV.
d) Terminal Marking: R phase: - 1a-1n, Y phase: - 1b-1n, B phase: - 1c-1n.
e) There should be no MCB connected to the VT secondary circuit instead
there should be LT fuses (4A) only.
f) Rating of HT VT fuses to be mentioned.
g) For the outgoing feeder switch, there should be arrangements for sealing at
LT panel, CT and VT as well as in other removable plates, if any, from where
CT and VT secondary wires are accessible.
There should be two cores for each VT. The ratio and output of the VT should be as
follows:
• Core 1: 11000V /110V : Output - 50 VA per phase; Class – 3P V.f. - 1.2 cont.
& 1.9 for 8 hrs. (To be used for open delta)
• Core 2: 11000V 110V : Output - 50 VA per phase; Class – 0.5 V.f. - 1.2 cont.
& 1.9 for 8 hrs. (To be used for Panel instruments or Tariff Meter)
I. CIRCUIT BREAKER
a) Circuit breaker will be gang operated triple pole Vacuum Type having a rupturing
capacity of 25 kA symmetrical for 3 sec 1 sec with self-contained spring operated
type mechanism and secondary isolating sockets and will be mounted on trolleys
having easy maneuvering facility. The vacuum interrupters should be capable to
withstand full rated asynchronous voltage across the open poles continuously.
b) The circuit breakers shall be capable of rapid and smooth interruption of current
under all conditions completely suppressing all undesirable phenomenon even
under most severe and persistent short circuit condition or when interrupting small
leading or lagging reactive current.
c) The circuit breakers must be capable of coping with the interrupting duties
produced by the switching of transformer magnetizing currents, capacitor switching
currents. Test certificates demonstrating the ability of the circuit breakers for these
duties are to be submitted.
d) In the event of failing to complete a closing operation by one pole of any phase
provision is to be made for automatic tripping of all three phases of the circuit
breakers.
e) All circuit breakers must include a sliding ground shoe that automatically engages
the ground bar in the breaker compartment when the breaker is inserted.
f) Suitable limit switches are to be provided for remote indication of breaker racked in
/ out position.
g) Circuit breaker of identical rating shall be physically and electrically interchangeable.
h) One ‘open-close-open’ operation of the circuit breaker shall be possible after failure
of power supply to the spring charging motor.
Page 12 of 64
J. Operating Mechanism
a) The circuit breakers should have self-contained spring operated mechanism housed
in sheet steel enclosure. The mechanism shall be such that failure of any auxiliary
spring will not prevent tripping of the breaker.
b) Each part of the operating mechanism is to be constructed with material having
substantial strength, utilizing materials as stainless steel, brass or gun metal to
prevent sticking due to rust or corrosion wherever necessary. The overall design is
to be such as to reduce mechanical shock to a minimum and to prevent inadvertent
operation due to fault current, vibration or other causes.
c) In operating mechanism, the bearings, which require grease, shall be equipped with
pressure type grease fittings. Working parts of the mechanism shall be adequately
pinned or locked to prevent loosening with repeated operations of the breaker.
d) An approved mechanically operated indicator shall be provided to show the close
and open position of the breaker & charged / discharged position of spring with
mechanism housing door closed.
e) In the event of mechanism failing to latch in the closed position, the circuit breaker
is to be arranged to open at normal speed.
f) The spring operating mechanism shall be automatically charged by the motor in no
more than 30 secs. In case of emergency, it shall also be possible to charge the
spring manually with a hand crank or similar tools. The tool should be placed in
clearly marked place. The motor should be disconnected automatically while
charging the breaker manually.
g) Spring closing mechanisms are to be recharged automatically for further operations
as soon as the circuit breaker has completed the closing operation.
e) The spring charging motor shall have adequate thermal rating for a continuous
sequence of closing and opening operations of the breaker. The motor shall be
effectively protected by a motor protection circuit breaker placed inside the
operating mechanism. A timer with alarm contact shall be provided to de-energize
the motor in case of non-operation of the limit switch.
f) Opening / Tripping of the Breaker shall be independent of motor operation.
g) Closing action of the breaker shall charge the opening spring and make it ready for
tripping.
h) The operating mechanism shall deliver continuously and smoothly its stored energy
during the whole stroke, avoiding any surge / vibration that could affect the
mechanical and electrical performance of the circuit breaker.
i) If the circuit breaker closing mechanism is not fully recharged for further operation
within a predetermined time after a closing operation, the mechanism is to be
locked out with initiation of an alarm.
j) Circuit breakers are to be provided with slow acting manually powered operating
devices for inspection and maintenance purpose only.
k) The operating mechanism shall be provided with means to prevent pumping while
the closing circuit remains energized, should the circuit breaker either fail to latch or
Page 13 of 64
trip during closing due to the operation of the protective relays. Any relays to
accomplish this shall be mounted in the L.T. compartment.
l) The components of the operating mechanism shall be adequately dimensioned and
provided with the limit switches, changeover-switches and other ancillary
equipment required allowing the safe operation of the breaker within the
guaranteed performance limits, as well as manual operation for maintenance.
m) Closing & tripping supply should be fed from 110V D.C. battery. Closing coil should
operate correctly at all values of control voltage between 70% and 110% of the
rated value. Shunt trip coil shall operate at all value of control voltage between 70%
and 110% of the rated value. Two nos. shunt trip coils with independent magnetic
circuit - one for normal tripping and other for bus zone protection (fast acting type)
are to be provided.
n) Other parameters of the circuit breaker:
• The circuit breaker should be ‘Trip Free’ type.
• Opening time of circuit breaker including time for arc quenching should be
within 60 mill seconds.
• Minimum number of auxiliary contacts of circuit breaker should be 6 N/O +
6N/C. These auxiliary contacts should be mechanically coupled to the circuit
breaker. Spare contacts should be wired up to the terminal block for
remote connection.
K. SWITCHPANEL EARTHING:
The panel should have the following earthing facilities:
a) An earth bus of 50mm x 6mm copper flat should run throughout the length of the
switchboard and both end panels should have provision to connect this earth bar to
the earth-grid of the station. All metal parts of the switchboard not carrying current
shall be directly bonded to this earth bus. Blades of integral earth switches should
also be connected directly to earth bus through braided copper flexible. Earth
busbar end on the panel sidewall should be totally vermin proof.
b) Necessary sliding contacts are to be provided in the breaker and earthing trolleys to
earth the trolleys when they are inserted into the breaker compartment.
c) All hinged doors should be earthed through braided flexible copper wires of
adequate cross-section.
d) All CT & VT bases should be connected to the earth bar of the panel.
L. INTERLOCK & SAFETY DEVICES:
To avoid unwanted operation, each switch unit shall be provided with a system of electrical
and mechanical interlocks, which will automatically impose a fixed and fail-proof sequence of
operation. Apart from other interlock features that may be considered essential for the
particular design of the switchgear offered, the following shall be provided:
a) The manual/power operated isolating device of the circuit breaker shall be in-
operative:
i) When circuit breaker contacts are closed either in 'service' or in 'test'
position.
Page 14 of 64
ii) Should attempts be made to rack in the circuit breaker with the safety
shutters locked.
iii) When circuit breakers are fully racked in or isolated.
b) The electrical tripping circuit shall be completed through the secondary isolating
contacts before the circuit breakers can be closed or racking in the circuit breaker
is not possible unless the control plug is fully engaged. An interlock should be
provided to prevent isolating of the secondary contacts when the circuit breaker is
closed.
c) The circuit breakers cannot be closed except when selected to the 'service' / 'test'
position i.e. circuit breakers cannot be operated when the truck is in between
service and test position.
d) Integral earthing switch cannot be switched 'ON' when the truck is inside the panel.
e) Following interlocks are to be provided for busbar and circuit earthing:
i) Integral busbar earthing isolator cannot be operated until all circuit breakers
including respective Bus-section circuit breaker connected to that bus are
'OFF' and isolated.
ii) For earthing through separate earthing trucks, an audiovisual alarm /
annunciation scheme should be provided in the earthing truck to prevent
inadvertent earthing of live circuit / busbar.
f) There should be interlocks for automatic discharging of springs when the circuit
breaker is removed from its compartment.
g) Interference devices are to be used to prevent circuit breaker of wrong rating from
being inserted into a compartment.
h) Circuit breaker cannot be inserted into the service position in closed condition.
M. ALARM CIRCUIT:
A suitable alarm and indication circuit are to be incorporated so that when a CB trips by
operation of its protective relay, there should be initiation of the alarm bell and auto trip lamp
with the provision of “acknowledge” and “Reset”. An alarm testing arrangement should also
be provided so that the alarm circuit may be tested from time to time to ensure healthiness of
alarm bell as well as the circuit.
N. SPACE HEATER:
Space heaters of suitable rating with matching thermostat should be mounted in all the
compartments with a controlling switch inside the L.T. compartment to avoid condensation in
the moist weather. An ammeter should be provided in the L.T. compartment to monitor the
current taken by individual heaters and to detect outage of any of the heaters from the circuit.
The heater is to be mounted on mica/asbestos blocks, raised from the MS sheet of the panel,
at a convenient location so that it can be easily accessible during operation.
O. SPARES:
The vendor should quote for the following spares with the switchboard. Orders for spares may
be placed with the switchboard:
• 1 no. Current Transformer
• 1 no. Potential Transformer
• One set inter phase insulating barrier
Page 15 of 64
• 1 No. pole with accessories for CB

• 3 nos. bus-bar spouts
• 3 nos. circuit spouts
• 3 nos. male & female isolating contacts for busbars & circuits
• 1 no. breaker operating mechanism
• 1 no. breaker isolating mechanism
• Closing & Tripping coils – 1 No. of each type
• 1 no. spring charge motor
• 1 set of Auxiliary switch
• 1 set of Limit switch
• 3 nos. support insulators
P. ACCESSORIES TO BE SUPPLIED:
In addition to the standard accessories required for the switchboard, the following should also
be furnished for use at site:
a) 1 no. Anodized nameplate is to be mounted inside front door of each panel detailing
electrical specifications of CTs / VTs with serial number of each CT/VT.
b) Suitable stickers with red coloured inscriptions as “DANGER”; “BUSBAR ALIVE AT
11000 VOLTS”; “CIRCUIT ALIVE AT 11000 VLOTS” etc. should be fixed on respective
removable covers on both front and rear of all panels. The VT chamber front cover
should also have such sticker in red as “DANGER- 11000 VOLT VT”. Stickers should
also be provided on all bus bar and circuit side shutters of incomer and out-going
feeder panels as “BUSBAR” and “CIRCUIT”. On bus-bar end covers on either side the
size, no. of parallel conductors and phase sequence colour code should be marked.
Q. TEST & INSPECTION:

• The offered switch panels should be type tested as per relevant standards
mentioned above and copies of all Type Test Certificates should be submitted along
with the tender for perusal and record of the Purchaser. The switch panels should
also undergo Routine Test as per referred standards and all such Test Certificates
along with manufacturer’s Test Certificates for all instrument transformers should
be submitted to Purchaser for prior approval before asking for despatch clearance.
• On completion of manufacturing of switchboard, Purchaser should be informed well
in advance for deputing representative for formal inspection of the switchboard or
according waiver of inspection, at the discretion of the Purchaser.
R. Drawings & documents to be submitted with Tender:
• Type test reports

• GA drawings
• User’s manuals and erection manuals
• Sectional drawings of each type of switchgear with dimensions
• Front, rear, side & top view and clearances of each type of switch panel with
dimensions
• Drawing detailing the accessibility of CTs after connection of the power cables
Page 16 of 64
Additional Drawings to be submitted after awarding of the order for approval from
Purchaser:
• Sectional drawing of Busbar compartment, CT compartment, circuit breaker
compartment and cable compartment
• Equipment layout inside and on the door of LT compartment
• Single line drawings showing CT, VT details
• Inscription details for all equipment and fuse-links in LT compartment
• AC & DC electrical schematic drawings
• Bill of materials with detailed specifications
• Bus wiring diagrams
• Equipment-wise connection diagrams
• Drawing detailing the minimum withdrawal space for CB truck
• Drawing detailing the withdrawal arrangement of VT
All drawings in post order stage should be furnished in Adobe Reader Version 6.0 format for
prior approval. Production of switch panels should only be taken up after obtaining final
approval of all drawings.
The final ‘As- built’ set of drawings including dimensional sectional views, complete wiring
schematics and test certificate of all instrument transformers & other bought out items should
be furnished in four sets as hard copies and also in soft format (Adobe Reader Version 6.0) for
archive.
Page 17 of 64
Annexure – I
(To be filled and confirmed by manufacturer / supplier)

A. 11KV VCB PANEL (Guaranteed Technical Particulars)
Name, address and country of manufactures for all equipment shall be specified.
1. Name of manufacturer
2. Country of manufacturer
3. Type of circuit breaker
4. Standard applicable
B. Technical Guarantees
1. Nominal operating voltage

2. Rated voltage
3. Rated normal current
4. Rated frequency
5. Number of poles
6. Type of installation (Indoor /out door)
7. Number of breaks per pole
8. Rated short circuit breaking current
9. Symmetrical component at rated voltage
10. DC component
Asymmetrical breaking current at rated voltage
11. Short time current rating
12. Rated making capacity
Maximum total break time m sec
Rated break time m sec
Maximum opening time m sec (App.)
13. Maximum arcing time m sec
14. First pole to clear factor
15. Closing time m sec (App.)
16. Close-open time m sec. (App.)
17. Operating duty O-0.3sec-CO-3min-CO
18. Maximum breaking current under phase kA
opposition
19. Maximum line charging breaking current
20. Maximum pole discrepancy
21. Maximum temperature rise for main contacts over
design ambient temperature of 50ºC
22. Rated voltage and pickup range
23. Trip coil V DC, W (Max)
Page 18 of 64
24. Close coil V DC, W (Max)

Dielectric withstand of complete breaker
25. One minute dry and wet power frequency
withstand voltage
26. Between line terminals and ground kV rms
Between terminals with breaker kV rms
contacts open
1.2/50 µsec impulse withstand
Between line terminals and ground kV Peak
Between terminals with breaker kV Peak
contacts open
27. Operating mechanism
Type of operating mechanism
Closing
Tripping
Construction details
Type and material of main contact
28. Type and material of arcing contact
Auxiliary contacts
29. Normally Open Nos.

Normally Closed Nos.
30. Control cabinet
Type of installation
Thickness of sheet steel mm

Degree of protection IP-xx
Control wiring PVC wired
Spare heaters 230V,AC

Earth terminals Earth Bus provided
31. Circuit breaker support structure
with foundation bolts
Support structure
32. Weight of complete circuit breaker
Kg (Approx.)
33. Minimum clearance in air between
Page 19 of 64
Live parts -do-

Live parts to earth -do-
Live parts to ground level -do-
Noise level at the base of the breaker
Terminal connectors Bimetallic
END OF SECTION – I
Page 20 of 64
SECTION - II
1. M.V. PANELS
A. Scope:
▪ The scope of this section comprises the supply, erection, testing and commissioning of M.V.
Panels and Distribution Panels conforming to these specifications and drawings.
B. MV Panels:
i) All electric panels will be fabricated from 16 SWG CRCA sheet steel MS sheets properly
supported with angles and channels. It will conform to IP 54.
ii) The cubicle will be single front.
iii) The cubicle will be floor-mounted type unless specified.
iv) The doors will be provided with internal hinges and panel locks of superior quality. The
hinges will be union joint type to facilitate easy removal of the doors when necessary.
v) The doors will be provided in a similar fashion as generally provided for the outdoor cabinet,
where water cannot enter in the cabinet from the door.
vi) The door will be provided with strengthening arrangement to avoid wobbling and distortion.
vii) Wherever the doors are opened on the horizontal hinges, an arrangement will be provided
to latch the doors in the open condition for the inspection of the wiring.
viii) Generally push buttons, signal lamps and control components will be provided on hinged
door, with suitable latching arrangement to hold the door in open position.
ix) The cabinet will be of welded construction and not of jointing construction.
x) The channel 75 mm x 6mm x 40 mm will be provided at the bottom of each cabinet. This is
required to make the cabinet stable and space for cable bends. The foundation holes with
grouting bolts will be provided in the channel frame.
▪ Sectionalized cable entry plates of 16 SWG MS sheets at the top or/and bottom and
top complete with cable glands and cable lugs for both the end terminations of each
cable should also be supplied.
▪ The circuit components will be mounted on sectionalized 16 SWG CRCA MS sheet

steel with suitable threading in the sheets to facilitate easy maintenance, future
addition etc.
▪ Provision of cable alleys and bus alleys shall be made where back openings are not
required.
▪ Top and bottom gland plates shall be provided as per requirement of cable
terminations.
Page 21 of 64
C. Dimensions:
• The height of all panels will not be more than 2100 mm but switchgear MCCBs/ACBs etc
shall be provided within 2000mm height.
D. Adaptor Chambers for all Cable Entry:

• Wherever necessary, sheet metal adaptor chambers with angle frame and minimum full
depth of Panel will be supplied with panel. All the covers of the adaptor box will be
removable type. The box can be mounted horizontally or vertically. The pattern of the
cable entry, wherever not specified, will have to be confirmed by the manufacturer in
writing, after placement of order.
E. Metal Treatment:
• The cubicle will undergo the following process of metal treatment:
a) Sanding,
b) Degreasing to be done with asfocoat or equivalent,
c) Derusting and phosphatising with scalegun as focle an or equivalent,
d) Two coats of red oxide primer,
e) Putty work,
f) Two coats of synthetic enamel of desired shade.
F. Cubicle Illumination:
• Required number of illumination points with switch and fuse will be provided in the panel,
without bulbs. These illuminating points will be connected before the main switch so that
the lights can be switched on with out switching on the main switch. The light point will
have industrial pattern switch having porcelain base and brass cover. HRC fuses and brass
lamp holders. Minimum number of illuminating points will be three. This however shall be
subject to provision in the bill of quantities.
G. Hand Lamp Points:

• Minimum one number hand lamp point with switch is to be provided in the cubicle along
with the illumination point as stated above to facilitate use of inspection hand lamps for
maintenance purpose, subject to provision in bill of quantities.
H. Busbars:
• The busbars will be made of Aluminum Strips designed to have a current density not more
than 1A/mm². The busbars will be covered with PVC sleeves and properly supported. The
busbar supports will be designed to withstand short circuit current equivalent to 35 MVA at
415 volts. The busbars will be adequately insulated and protected to prevent accidental
contact during the operation and maintenance.
I. Insulation:
• The insulation between the phases and between the phases and ground of the power
conductors will be made of synthetic resin board/molding, resistant to dust and dampness.
Page 22 of 64
All insulating material will be non- hydroscopic, fungus-proof and treated with suitable
synthetic varnishes.
J. Terminals:
• Cables shall be terminated in bus bars with suitable Copper/Brass nut bolts with
Copper/Brass washers.
K. Wire Ways:
• PVC extruded wire ways of required size will be provided for wiring in the control panel.
L. Ferruling and Colour Code:
• Cabling for power circuit should be red, yellow and blue or otherwise proper coloured
sleeving will be provided at both ends of the cables. For control cables, every conductor will
be provided with the identification ferrule matching with the one in the drawing.
M. Cable Termination:
• Every cable, either for control or power duty will be provided with crimping of soldering type
of lugs of suitable size.
N. Internal Wiring:
• All the wires will be FRLS PVC insulated of ISI approved, 1.1kV Grade and reputed make. The
cables will be copper conductor only and will be stranded and the minimum number of
strands will be three. The ratings will conform to IEE regulations.
O. Earthing:
• The earth busbars should be of tinned copper/as specified G.I. bolts; nuts, bolts to be of
cadmium plated with washer. Earth busbars will be provided all around the cubicle at the
bottom and it will be of the same size as neutral busbar but the maximum size will be 75 x 6
mm with duplex external earth connection arrangement.
P. Cable Gland sand Lugs:
• The cable glands will be of brass cone grip type. These glands will be provided for all the
outgoing connections at both the ends for power as well as control circuits provided in the
panel and also for the incoming cable or cables. Crimping type or solder type lugs should be
supplied along with each panel for termination of outgoing cable at both the ends (i.e. load
end and panel end) with each outgoing feeder.
Q. Space Heater:
Page 23 of 64
• Space heaters - minimum 2 Nos. x 75 watts each - will be provided with switch and MCB in
each panel subject to provision in bill of quantities.
R. Bus Coupler:
• This shall be of the ‘OFF’ load type, housed in metal-clad, totally enclosed cubicle type panel,
suitable for front of board operation with ‘ON’ and ‘OFF’ flag indicators.
• The fixed and moving contacts shall be made of high conductivity silver-plated copper and
shall be provided with a mechanical interlocking arrangement between the two adjacent
incomings.
S. Feeder Units:
• The feeder units shall be of compartmental design comprising of cubicles assembled

together and shall incorporate MCCBs / ACBs at 440 Volts as specified.
• The MCCBs shall be quick make quick break and trip free type with magnet thermal release
electronic trip protection against over load and short circuit and under voltage.
• Operating handles should be retractable type and should be provided with appropriate
interlocking facilities.
• Busbars and rise connections should have sufficient mechanical strength to withstand the
effects of short circuit until it can be cleared by appropriate protecting device. All risers and
busbars should be clearly marked with appropriate colour code to enable immediate
identification of the phase and neutral.
• The vertical busbars should have a number of laminations to give appropriate current rating
and can be graded to suit the current rating required at each point by omitting laminations
at the point of current decrease. The bus bar connections should be clamped and no pre-
drilling should be necessary.
• Arrangements should be provided to receive paper insulated or PVC cables, either from the
top side or from the bottom (as specified).
• All the feeder unit should have on its door, an ammeter and selector switch. The current
transformers to feed this ammeter should be clamped to the rear of the unit and the whole
un complete with CTs, shall be removed intact from the board if required without
disconnecting the small wiring. This shall, however be subject in provision in bill of
quantities.
T. Fabrication drawings
• Contractor shall submit three sets of fabrication drawings to the consultant for review. Two
set would be returned after review and six copies shall be furnished as final certified
drawings.
2. CAPACITOR BANKS:
Page 24 of 64
A. Scope:
• The scope of this specification covers manufacture, supply, installation testing and
commissioning of 415 volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz capacitor Banks conforming to IS 2834.
B. Construction:
• 2.2.1 Indoor type, air cooled, with low viscosity impregnated paper dielectric,
hermitically sealed units.
• 2.2.2 The impregnant used shall be non-inflammable, oxidizing, lower freezing point type
synthetic compound.
• 2.2.3 Main connection from active element is to be brought out through porcelain
bushing with moralized coating. Bushings shall be soldered on the cover to ensure a perfect
hermetic sealing.
• 2.2.4 Each coil shall be protected by an individual silver wire fuse.
• 2.2.5 All capacitors shall be of low loss factor type suitable to withstand plus minus 10%
voltage variation, and rated for temperature not exceeding 30 deg. C above ambient.
• 2.2.6 Capacitor units shall be provided with externally mounted discharge resistors to
reduce the residual voltage to less than 50 volts in one minute of switching off.
Electronic timer shall be provided to affect the necessary time lag between switching off and
on.
• 2.2.7 Individual units shall be provided with MCCB, busbars, jumpers and terminal
chamber to make bank of required kVAR. Terminal chamber shall be sufficiently long to have
cable entry from bottom.
• 2.2.8 Capacitor Panel shall be provided with MCCB Incomer, necessary Meter, APFC Relay,
MCCB for each bank, Detuned Filter, Capacitor bank and two earth terminals.
• 2.2.9 Rating plate as per IS 2834 shall be provided on each unit and for complete bank
also.
• 2.2.10 Each unit of capacitor shall be of specified kVAR to form the banks specified. Each
unit shall be capable of being put into circuit of the supply or of the discharge resister.
Necessary isolating switches for the purpose, mounted on suitable board shall be provided
along with contactors, push buttons and indication lights.
C. Test & Test Certificates:
• All routine tests as per IS 2834 shall be carried out at manufacture’s work and test
certificates to be submitted before delivery of capacitor banks to site.
D. Drawings & Information:
• a. Contractor shall furnish general arrangement drawing showing front view

plan, foundation plan, busbars, terminal arrangement and weight.
Page 25 of 64
b. Terminal plan showing terminal numbers, fixing arrangement etc.

c. Contractor shall furnish three copies of above drawings for Engineer in charge
review. After final review six copies shall be furnished as final certified drawing.
• Erection and maintenance manual complete with all relevant information, drawings and
literature etc.
E. Installation, Testing & Commissioning:
• 2.5.1 Capacitor Banks shall be thoroughly cleaned and checked regarding leakage if any.
• 2.5.2 All terminations shall be fully tightened.
• 2.5.3 Insulation resistance shall be measured with 500 Volts D.C. megger.
• 2.5.4 Capacitor bank shall be installed at least 300 mm away from the wall on suitable
frame work of welded construction.
F. Transformer:
Installation Location:
This specification covers design, manufacturing, testing and delivery of the oil immersed, outdoor
type, three phase, 50 Hz Transformers with Off Load Tap Changer.
The equipment offered shall be complete with all parts necessary for their effective and trouble-free
operation. Such parts will be deemed to be within the scope of the supply irrespective of whether
they are specifically indicated in the commercial order or not.
It is not the intent to specify herein complete details of design and construction. The equipment
offered shall conform to the relevant standards and be of high quality, sturdy, robust and of good
design and workmanship complete in all respects and capable to perform continuous and
satisfactory operations in the actual service conditions at site an shall have sufficiently long life in
service as per statutory requirements. The design and constructional aspects, including materials
and dimensions, will be subject to good engineering practice in conformity with the required quality
of the product, and to such tolerances, allowances and requirements for clearances etc. as are
necessary by virtue of various stipulations in that respect in the relevant Indian Standards, IEC
standards, I.E. Rules, I.E. Act and other statutory provisions.
Tolerances: Tolerances on all the dimensions shall be in accordance with provisions made in the
relevant Indian/IEC standards and in these specifications. Otherwise the same will be governed by
good engineering practice in conformity with required quality.
The transformer shall be installed outdoors.
Standards Applicable
Page 26 of 64
Indian Standards
• IS 1271 Transformer Classification of insulating materials

• IS 2026 (Part – I) Power Transformer – General
• IS 2026 (Part – II) Power Transformer – Temperature rise
• IS 2026 Power Transformer – Insulation level and (Part III) dielectric tests
• IS 2099 High Voltage Porcelain bushing screen
• IS 2705 (Part I & III) Current Transformers
• IS 3202 Core of practice for climate proofing
• IS 3639 Power transformer fittings and accessories
• IS 6600 Guide for loading of oil immersed transformer
• CBIP CBIP Guideline
Type of Insulating Oil
Synthetic Ester Oil Immersed Transformer
This specification covers design, manufacturing, testing and delivery of the Synthetic Ester Oil
Immersed Transformer.
• IEC 61099: Specification for unused synthetic organic esters for electrical purposes
• Properties: Synthetic Ester – based Dielectric Fluid shall follow Physical Properties, Chemical
Properties, Dielectric Properties as per IEC 61099
• Tests are applied to “Synthetic Ester” as per IEC 61099 Clause No. 8 & IEC 61203 Clause No.6
Windings
LV winding upto 1000 Volt
Low voltage Winding upto 1000 volt, shall be made with 99.9% pure electrolytic grade copper / 99%
pure Aluminum, insulated with high grade paper Insulation. Manufacturer shall provide preferably
foil windings for LV coils so as to reduce the stray loss and overall surface area. The LV winding
should be able withstand thermal and mechanical stress in the event of short circuit.
Core
Transformer shall be double wound core type with low loss, non-ageing, high permeability PRIME
GRADE, CRGO with M4 Grade or Better, perfectly insulated and clamped to minimize noise and
vibrations. Followings should be Mandatory for any Manufacturer: -
1. Transformer shall be of BOLTLESS core design.

2. Core shall be purchased Directly from Manufacturer or from their accredited Marketing
organization of Repute & not through any agent. Bidder has to submit manufacturer’s name
during bidding having sufficient credential & Core has to be purchased from the approved
manufacturer.
Page 27 of 64
3. Stage inspection of the core shall be done at manufacturer’s premises & inspection call shall
be given with following Documents:
• Invoice of the supplier

• Mill’s test certificate
• Packing list
• Bill of landing & Bill of Entry certificate by customs
4. Transformer manufacturer should have in-house core cutting facilities for proper control &
monitoring of quality & to avoid mixing of Prime core with Second grade /defective core
materials. Transformer Manufacturer should have in-house slitting Machine so as, core is cut
to width & stacked with minimum air gap thus ensuring Burr level less than 10 Microns.
5. The insulation structure for the core to bolts and core to clamp plates shall be such as to
withstand a voltage of 2000V for one minute.
Power Rating
The power rating of the Distribution transformer shall be 250kVA, as per IS 1180 standard.
Voltage Rating
Voltage ratio for the Distribution Transformer shall be 11/0.433 kV.
Cooling Method
Cooling shall be via Mineral Oil Naturally circulated and Air Naturally circulated.
Tap Changing Method
The Off Circuit Tap changing (OCTC) shall have following:
1. Operating handle or wheel, accessible from ground level.

2. Tap position indicator.
3. Pad locking arrangement.
4. The tap-changer connections and contacts shall be accessible through an excess hole having
a bolted gasketed cover.
Loss Levels & Impedance
Transformer losses & impedance shall comply to IS 1180 for Distribution transformers of Energy
Efficiency Level 2 or Level 3.
Tank
Conventional tank with Detachable radiators
Page 28 of 64
The exterior of tank and other steel surfaces exposed to the weather shall be thoroughly cleaned
and have a priming coat of zinc chromate applied. The second coat shall be of an oil and weather-
resistant nature, preferably of distinct colour from the prime and finish coats. The final coat shall be
of a flossy, oil and weather resisting non-fading paint of specified shade. The interior of the tank
shall be cleaned by shot blasting and painting with two coats of heat resistant and oil insoluble paint.
Steel bolts and nuts exposed to the atmosphere shall be galvanized.
Unless otherwise stated, the tank together with radiators, conservator, bushings and other fittings
shall be designed to withstand without permanent distortion the following conditions:
1. Vacuum withstand shall be as per CBIP Guideline.

2. Internal gas pressure of 0.35 Kg/cm2 (5 lbs/sq.in) with oil at operating level.
The tank cover shall be suitably sloped so that it does not retain rain water.
The material used for gaskets shall be cork neoprene or approved equivalent.
Termination Options
Porcelain Bare Bushing or Air Insulated Cable Box arrangement.
Testing
TESTS
The first seven tests listed below shall be carried out and shall be deemed to be included in the
BIDDERS scope. Bidder shall quote extra unit prices for carrying out type tests as specified:
ROUTINE TESTS as per IS 2026 – The manufacturer should have NABL accredited test lab.
1. Measurement of winding resistance

2. Measurement of voltage ratio and check of voltage vector relationship
3. Measurement of impedance of voltage (principal tapping), short circuit impedance and load
loss
4. Measurement of no load loss and current
5. Separate source voltage withstand test
6. Induced overvoltage withstand test
7. 2kV withstand test for all wiring
8. Magnetic Balance Test
TYPE TESTS:
Optional price shall be quoted by bidder for carrying our Type tests as per IS 2026. All the type tests
shall be carried our in NABL accredited test lab.
Page 29 of 64
1. Lightning impulse test - Test certificate of similar design shall be furnished.

2. Temperature rise test - To be done on the transformer at third party or NABL accredited lab.
3. Zero phase sequence impedance test - Test certificate of similar design shall be furnished.
4. Pressure & vacuum Test as per CBIP guidelin on tank.
5. Measurement of Acustic Noise level of transformer.
6. Measurement of Capicitance & Tan Delta of winding.
END OF SECTION – II
SECTION - III
1. HT, LT POWER & CONTROL CABLES
(a) SCOPE
This specification covers the requirements for design, engineering, manufacture, testing at
manufacturer’s works before dispatch, packing, forwarding, delivery, storage at site, laying, testing
and commissioning, of XLPE cables for medium and high voltage systems and cable
jointing/Terminating accessories for high voltage systems.
(b) STANDARDS
The cables shall comply with the latest edition of the following standards:
IS:1554 - PVC insulated heavy duty cables

IS: 7098 (PART-I)-1988 - Cross-linked polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed
cables for working voltages up to 1100V.
IS: 7098 (PART-II)-1985 - Cross-linked polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed
cables for working voltages from 3.3 kV up to and
Including 33 kV.
IS 1255 – 1983 - Code of practice for installation and maintenance of power
cables
IS: 8130 - Conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords.
IS: 5831 - PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables.
IS 5891 – 1970 - Recommended short circuit rating of high voltage PVC
cables
IS 3961 – 1987 - Recommended current rating
IS:3975 - Mild steel wires, strips and tapes for armouring of cables.
IS:2633 - Methods of testing weight, thickness and uniformity of
coating on hot dipped galvanised articles.
IS: 209 - Specification of zinc.
Page 30 of 64
IS: 3961 (PART-II) - Recommended current ratings for PVC insulated and
PVC sheathed heavy duty cables.
IS: 10418 - Wooden drums for electric cables.
IEC: 540 & 540A - Test methods for insulation and sheaths of electric
cables and cords.
IS: 10462 (PART-I) - Fictitious calculation method for determination of
dimensions of protective coverings of electrometric
and thermoplastic insulated cables.
IS: 10810 (PART 58) - Oxygen Index test
BS 7655 LTS 2 - Flammability Characteristics of cables
IEC 60092-SHF-1 - Flammability Characteristics of cables
IEC-332 - Flammability Characteristics of cables
SS4241475 class F3 - Flammability Characteristics of cables
ASTM-D-2843 - Determination of smoke generation of outer sheath under
fire
(c) DESIGN FEATURE
• 3.1 The cable shall maintain their insulating properties as required by the operating
conditions when subjected to maximum ambient temperature of 50 deg C and a maximum
conductor temperature of 90 deg C.
• 3.2 The conductor temperature during short circuit shall not exceed 250 deg C. Cables
shall be suitable for short time overload.
• 3.3 The cables shall maintain its required insulating properties when exposed
environment and mechanical stresses resulting during installation and operation.
• 3.4 Cables shall be suitable for installation on multi-tier ladder type cable trays running
horizontally or vertically in the buildings as well as in the concrete cable trenches, RCC
Hume/ GI pipes, outdoor cable trays restricted ventilation. No forced ventilation is envisaged
for the cables. Cables shall also be suitable for lying underground directly.
(d) GENERAL CONSTRUCTION:
• The cables shall be suitable for laying in trays, trenches, ducts & conduits and for
underground buried installation with uncontrolled backfill and possibility of flooding by
water and chemicals.
• Outer sheath of all PVC and XLPE cables shall be black in colour and the minimum value of
oxygen index shall be 29 at 27  2C. In addition suitable chemicals shall be added into the
PVC compound of the outer sheath to protect the cable against rodent and termite attack.
• Sequential marking of the length of the cable in meters shall be provided on the outer
sheath at every one meter. The embossing shall be legible and indelible.
• The overall diameter of the cables shall be strictly as per the values declared in the technical
information furnished along with bids subject to a maximum tolerance of  2 mm.
Page 31 of 64
• PVC/Rubber end caps shall be supplied free of cost for each drum with a minimum of eight
per thousand metre length. In addition, ends of the cables shall be properly sealed with caps
to avoid ingress of water during transportation and storage.
• Cable bending radius for multi core cables should not exceed 12D, where D is the diameter
of cable.
• Voltage grade would be according to required voltage.
• Number of cores for power would be one, two, three, three and half or four as per design.
Number of cores for control cable shall be four & above or as specified.
• All the power and auxiliary/ control cables shall be rated at 650/1000V for armoured and un
armoured cables.
• XLPE insulated cables shall be rated for continuous operation at maximum conductor
temperature of 90deg C and for a maximum short circuit temperature of 250 deg C.
(e) kV Power & control cables
• All power/control cables for use on medium voltage systems shall be heavy- duty type,
1100V insulated, FRLS XLPE for LT and FRLS PVC for control cables of sizes and quantity as
per the BOQ.
• The conductors shall be ‘stranded’ for both aluminium and copper cables. Conductors of
nominal area less than 25 Sq. mm shall be circular only. Conductors of area 25 Sq. mm and
above may be circular or shaped. Cables with reduced neutral conductor shall have sizes as
per Tables 1 of IS 1554 (Part-I).
• The thickness of insulation and the tolerance on thickness of insulation shall as per table 2 of
IS: 1554 Part – 1. Control cables having 6 cores and above shall be identified with prominent
and indelible English numerals on the outer surface of the insulation. Colour of the numbers
shall contrast with the colour of insulation with a spacing of maximum 50mm between two
consecutive numbers. Colour coding for cables up to 5 cores shall be as per Indian standard.
• Armouring for multi-core cables shall be by single round galvanised steel wires where the
calculated diameter below armouring does not exceed 13mm and by galvanised steel strips
where this dimension is greater than 13 mm. Requirement and methods of tests for armour
material and uniformity of galvanisation shall be as per IS-3975 and IS-2633. The dimensions
of armour shall be as per table 5 of IS: 1554(Part-1). Armouring for single core cable shall be
with H4 grade hard drawn aluminium round wire of 2.5 sq.mm diameter.
• Conductors shall be smooth, uniform in quality, free from scale, spills, splits and any other
defects. There shall be no joints in individual strands except those made in the base rod or
wire before final drawing.
(f) XLPE CABLES
• System Voltage: 1.1, 11kV, 3Phase, 50 Hz earthed or unearthed as per the system design
requirement.
• Power cables for 1.1 kV upto and including 11 kV systems shall be aluminium conductor;
XLPE insulated screened, sheathed, armoured and overall PVC sheathed as detailed below.
• The conductor shall be stranded and compacted circular for all cables.
Page 32 of 64
• All cables rated 3.8/6.6kV and above shall be provided with both conductor screening and
insulation screening. The conductors shall be provided with non-metallic extruded semi-
conducting shielding.
• The core insulation shall be with cross-linked polyethylene insulating compound applied by
extrusion. It shall be free from voids and shall withstand all mechanical and thermal stress
under steady state and transient operating conditions. It shall confirm to the properties
given in Table-1 of IS: 7098 (PART-II).
• The insulating shielding shall consist of non-metallic extruded semi-conducting compound in
combination with a nonmagnetic metallic screening of copper. The copper screen shall be
capable of carrying the single line to ground fault current.
• The conductor screen, XLPE insulation and insulation screen shall all be extruded in one
operation by “Triple Extrusion “process to ensure perfect bonding between the layers. The
core identification shall be by coloured stripes or by printed numerals.
• The inner sheath shall be applied over the laid up cores by extrusion and shall conform to
the requirements of type ST2 compound of IS: 5831. The extruded inner sheath shall be of
uniform thickness for multi core cables, the armouring shall be by galvanized steel strips. If
armouring is specified for single core cables in the data sheet, the same shall be with H
grade hard drawn aluminium round wire of 2.5 Sq. mm diameter.
• The outer sheath of the cables shall be applied by extrusion offer the armouring and shall be
of PVC compound confirming to the requirements of type ST2 compound of IS: 5831. The
thickness of outer sheet shall be as per amendment No. 1 to table 5 of IS: 7098 part 2. (For
both armoured and unarmoured cables.)
• The dimensions of the insulation, inner sheath and armour materials shall be governed by
values given in Table 2, 3 and 4 (Method “b”) of IS: 7098 Part-II.
• Aluminium cables shall be used for HT distribution. The type of insulation for cable will be
XLPE & the type of inner sheathing will be PVC wrapped PVC extruded. The type of amour
shall be unarmored /armored /tape armored. Outer sheath shall be PVC.
(g) CABLE ACCESSORIES:
• The termination and straight through jointing kits for use on the systems shall be suitable for
the type of cables offered as per this specification.
• The accessories shall be supplied in kit form. Each component of the kit shall carry the
manufacture’s mark of origin.
• The kit shall include all stress grading, insulating and sealing materials apart from conductor
fittings and consumable items. An installation instruction sheet shall also be included in
each kit.
• The contents of the accessories kit including all consumables shall be suitable for storage
without deterioration at a temperature of 45 with self-life extending to more than 5 years.
• TERMINATING KITS: The terminating kits shall be suitable for termination of the cables to
indoor switchgear or to a weather-proof transformer/motor. For outdoor terminations,
weather shields/sealing ends and any other accessories required shall also form part of the
kit. The terminating kits shall be one of the makes/types mentioned in the data sheet.
Page 33 of 64
• JOINTING KITS: The straight through jointing kits shall be suitable for installation on
overhead trays, concrete lined trenches, and ducts and for underground burial with
uncontrolled backfill and possibility of flooding by water and chemicals. These shall have
protection against any mechanical damage and suitably designed to be protected against
rodent and termite attack.
(h) TESTS:
Type tests should have been carried out to prove the general qualities and design of given type of
termination /jointing system. The type tests shall include the following tests conforming to IS
specification. The type test certificates shall be submitted along with the offer.
➢ Rated withstand AC voltage test
➢ Partial discharge test
➢ Rated withstand surge voltage test
➢ Continuous AC voltage test with cyclic current load (umber of heating cycles-3)
➢ Partial discharge test
➢ Continuous AC voltage test with cyclic current load (Number of heating cycles-60)
➢ Thermal short circuit test
➢ Continuous AC voltage test with cyclic current load (Number of heating cycles-63)
➢ Rated withstand surge voltage test
➢ D.C. voltage test
➢ Test under the influence of moisture
➢ Dynamic short circuit test
(i) PACKING AND MARKING
• Cables shall be despatched in non-returnable wooden/ metallic drums of suitable barrel

diameter, securely battened, with the take-off end fully protected against mechanical
damage. The wood used for construction of the drum shall be properly seasoned, sound and
free from defect. Wool preservatives shall be applied to the entire drum. Ferrous parts used
shall be treated with a suitable rust preventive finish or coating to avoid rusting during
transit or storage.
• An arrow instruction should be indicated to show the direction of rotation of the drum. The
cable shall carry the following information either stenciled on the drum or contained in a
label attached to it.
a) Reference to this Indian standard
b) Manufacture’s name, brand or trade mark.
c) Type of cable and voltage grade
d) No. of cores
e) Nominal cross- sectional area of conductor
f) Cable code
g) Length of cable on drum
Page 34 of 64
h) No. of lengths on reel, drum or coil ( if more than one)

i) Gross weight
j) Country of manufacture
k) Year of manufacture
• The cable shall be placed on the drums in such a manner that it will be protected from injury
during transit. Each end of the cable shall be firmly and properly secured to the drum. The
end of each length shall be sealed before shipment. The drums shall be secured firmly in
position so that they will not shift during transit.
• Each drum shall have a distinguishing number, either printed or neatly chiseled on the
outside of one flange.
• Wooden cable drums shall be suitably constructed to avoid any problem due to shrinkage.
(j) CABLE TRAY
(a) Cable trays shall be of a perforated / ladder type as mentioned in BOQ with 2mm
minimum thick GI with returned edges and hot-dipped galvanized overall. The hot
dipped galvanized cable trays and their fittings shall conform to the Indian standard
or their latest amended editions or equivalent international standard.
(b) Trays shall be supported from the soffit of structural slabs and beams by hot dipped
galvanised rods not less than 6mm dia. and/or hot dipped galvanised angles brackets
fixed on side wall or on the floor. Hot-dipped galvanization shall comply to ISO
1459, 1460, 1461 with minimum coating thickness of 85um and 210um for indoor
and outdoor installation. All bolts and nuts shall be electroplated with zinc or
cadmium with minimum plating thickness of 25um.
(c) Tray supports shall be spaced according to the number and size of cables being
carried on the tray.
(d) Cables mounted on the trays shall be laid after installation of the tray and spaced to
avoid derating of the cables. Cables shall be grouped in circuits and individually
clipped, cleated or tied at intervals of not less than 600mm lengths on horizontal
runs and 1m lengths on vertical runs, using PVC sheathed flexible aluminium strips.
(e) Notwithstanding the minimum gauge of metalwork specified, gauges shall be of

sufficient strength to prevent sagging between supports. Details shall be submitted
to the Project Manager for approval.
(f) Cables leaving cable trays shall be installed properly without damage to cables by
cutting edges of trays and inserting rubber pads to underside of cables.
Page 35 of 64
(g) Trays shall not be bent for change in direction of run. Proper bends or straight trays
meeting at an angle shall be employed at change of direction. Cable trays shall be
supported at either sides of junction.
(h) Where trays are exposed to the weather, they shall be coated with epoxy resin as
approved by the Project Manager before painting. PVC coating is not acceptable.
(k) TESTING
i) Tests at Manufacturer’s Works

• Type tests
PVC insulated Cables shall be subjected to type tests and acceptance test at
manufacturers work as per IS: 1554 – part 1 – 1988 carried out in accordance with
appropriate parts of IS: 10810 – 1984. Copies of the type test reports shall be
furnished by the contractor /type test certificates of the similar cables of same
rating shall be submitted which is less than five years old and the test should be
carried out from Govt/ Govt. approved test house. XLPE cables shall be tested as per
IS: 7098 (applicable part of respective voltage class).
• Routine test
PVC Cables shall be subjected to routine test as per IS: 1554 – 1988 and XLPE cables
as per IS: 7098 as below.
a) Conductor resistance test
b) High voltage test at room temperature.
ii) Testing at Site

• Before laying
➢ All cables before laying shall be pressure tested for one minute with 1000
volts megger. Cable cores shall be tested for continuity, absence of cross
phasing, insulation resistance to earth/sheath/armour and insulation
resistance between conductors.
• After laying
➢ After laying and jointing, cables shall be subjected to a 1.5 minutes AC/DC
pressure test.
➢ MV cables shall be tested upon installation with a 500V Megger and the
following readings established :
1) Continuity on all phases
2) Insulation Resistance :
i) between conductors
ii) all conductors and ground
iii) 11.2.4 All test readings shall be recorded and shall form part of the completion
documentation
iv) 11.2.5 Underground Cable routes shall be got verified with the help of cable
detector.
Page 36 of 64
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION
L. Installation
• Cable laying shall be in accordance with IS: 1255-1983 (Latest Edition). Cables shall be laid in
accordance with the routing available and as required in
trenches/tunnel/Ceilings/Trays/Pipes etc. The route shall be marked by the contractor in the
working drawings. Cables shall be laid in masonry trenches, directly on walls ceiling, inside
shafts /cable trays, directly buried in ground or in pipes/ducts as elaborated below. Cables of
different voltages and also power and control cables shall be laid in different trenches with
adequate separation. Wherever available space is restricted such that this requirement
cannot be met, medium voltage cables shall be laid above HT cables as approved.
• Single cables/Fire survival cables shall be fixed directly to walls or ceiling and supported at
not more than 600 mm. Cables laid in built-up trenches shall be on MS supports.
• Cables shall be so laid that the maximum bending radius is 12 times the overall diameter of
the cable for medium voltage cables and 15 times the overall diameter for 11 kV cables or in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations whichever is higher.
• In the case of cables buried directly in ground, the cable route shall be parallel or
perpendicular to roadways, walls etc. Cables shall be laid on an excavated, graded trench,
over a sand or soft earth cushion to provide protection against abrasion. Cables shall be
protected with brick or cement tiles as shown on drawing. Width of excavated trenches shall
be as per code of practice and drawings.
• All cables shall be full runs from panel to panel without any joints or splices.
• Cables laid in Masonry Trenches
➢ Wherever so specified, cables shall be laid in indoor/outdoor masonry/RCC trenches
with chequered plate/RCC covers to be provided by contractor. Cables shall be laid
on Gl supports of approved design grouted in trench walls at intervals not exceeding
600 mm. If required, cables shall be arranged in tier formation inside the trench.
Cables shall be dressed properly so that the clear spacing between the cables shall
not be less than the diameter of the cable. Suitable clamps, hooks and saddles shall
be used for securing the cables in position. Complete details of this support work
shall be shown in working drawings to be prepared by the Contractors and
submitted for approval of Employer's representative before execution. Works shall
be carried out only as per approved working drawing.
• Cables/Bus duct laid in Tunnel
➢ Wherever so specified, cables shall be laid in RCC tunnel. Cables shall be laid on
cable Trays with Gl supports of approved design grouted in tunnel walls at intervals
not exceeding 600 mm. If required, cables shall be arranged in tier formation inside
the trench. Cables shall be dressed properly so that the clear spacing between the
cables shall not be less than the diameter of the cable. Suitable clamps, hooks and
saddles shall be used for securing the cables in position. Complete details of this
support work shall be shown in working drawings to be prepared by the Contractors
Page 37 of 64
and submitted for approval of Employer's representative before execution. Works

shall be carried out only as per approved working drawing.
➢ Bus duct shall be laid in tunnel with the help of GI supports from Wall/Ceiling. The
Bus ducts shall run along the edge of the wall to allow movement of
installation/maintenance workers in the centre. Suitable supports including all
accessories shall be considered for proper installation of the Bus duct. Complete
details of this support work shall be shown in working drawings to be prepared by
the Contractors and submitted for approval of Employer's representative before
execution. Works shall be carried out only as per approved working drawing.
• Cable laid On Trays/Walls
➢ Where the number of cables is run, necessary cable trays shall be provided wherever
shown. Cable trays shall be of mild steel as specified in the BOQ. Trays shall not be
directly suspended but supported on mild steel framework.
➢ Where cables in large numbers are to be laid in trays, ladders duly fabricated with
MS angles & strips as specified in the BOQ shall be provided.
➢ Cable shall be secured in position and dressed properly by means of suitable damps,
hooks, saddles etc. such that the minimum clear spacing between cables is diameter
of the cable. Clamping of cables shall be at minimum intervals as below.
Type of Fixing
Size Clamping by
cables intervals
MV Up to and including 25 sq.mm Saddles 1 mm thick 450mm
MV & HV 35 sq.mm to 120 sq.mm Clamps 3mm thick 25mm wide 600 mm
MV & HV 150 sq.mm and above Clamps 3mm thick 40mm wide 600 mm
Note: The fixing intervals specified apply to straight runs. In the case of bends, additional clamping
shall be provided at 30 cm from the centre of the bend on both sides.
• Buried Directly in Ground
➢ Cables should be so laid that they will not interfere with under ground structures.
➢ All water pipes, sewage lines or other structures which become exposed by
excavation shall be properly supported and protected from injury until the filling has
been rammed solidly in places under and around them. Cables shall be laid and
protected at such locations.
➢ Any telephone or other cables coming in the way are to be properly shielded as
directed by Employer's representative.
➢ Surface of the ground shall be made good so as to conform in all respects to the
surrounding ground to the satisfaction of Employers' representative.
Page 38 of 64
• Cable trays
➢ Cable trays, of sizes as per BOQ and drawings, shall be of doubled bend channel
design unless otherwise stated. Cable trays shall be fabricated from minimum 2 mm
thick sheet steel and shall be complete with tees, elbows, risers, and all necessary
hardware. Trays shall be MS power coated as specified. Cable trays shall be erected
in perfect level and plumb and shall comply with the following:
➢ Trays shall not have sharp edges, burrs or projections injurious to cable insulation.
Trays shall include fittings such as bends, risers etc. for changes in direction and
elevation. Each run of cable tray shall be completed before laying of cables. Cable
trays shall be exposed and accessible.
➢ Trays shall be supported adequately at minimum 1 m distance from the building
structure by means of painted/galvanized(as specified) MS structural members
secured to the structure by dash fasteners or by grouting. The entire cable tray
system shall be rigid. Cost of support arrangement shall be included in the rates
quoted for supply and installation of trays. Complete details of this support
arrangement shall be shown in working drawings to be prepared by the Contractors
and submitted for approval of Employer's representative before execution. Works
shall be carried out only as per approved working drawing.
• Routing of the Cable Runs
➢ Before cable laying work is undertaken, the route of the cables shall be decided in
consulting with the Employers' representative/ with respect to the drawing.
➢ While shortest practicable route shall be preferred, cable runs shall follow fixed
development such as roads, footpaths etc with proper offsets so that future
maintenance and identification are rendered easy.
➢ Whenever cables are laid along well demarcated or established roads, the LV/MV
cables shall be laid further from the kerb line than HV cables.
➢ Cables of different voltages and also power and control cables shall be kept in
different trenches with adequate separation. Where available space is restricted,
LV/MV cables shall be laid above HV cables. Where cables cross one another, the
cables of higher voltage shall be laid at a lower level than the cables of lower
voltage.
➢ Power and communication cables shall as far as possible cross at right angles. Where
power cables are laid in proximity to communications cables the horizontal and
vertical clearances shall not normally be less than 60 cm.
• Width of Trench
➢ The width of trench shall be determined on the following basis.

o The minimum width of masonry trench for laying single cables shall be 350
mm or as specified in BOQ.
Page 39 of 64
o Where more than one cable is to be laid in the same trench in horizontal
formation, the width of trench shall be increased such that the inter-axial
spacing between the cables except where otherwise specified shall be at
least one cable diameter.
➢ There shall be a clearance of at least 150 mm between axis of the end cables and the
sides of the trench.
➢ The space between multiple cables laid in same trench shall be laid as prescribed by
the manufacturer of the cable or as recommended in standards
➢ Depth of Trench
Where cables are laid in single tier formation, in ground the total depth of the
trench shall not be less than 750 mm for cables up to 1.1 kV and 1000 mm for cables
above 1.1 kV. When more than one tier of cables is unavoidable and vertical
formation of laying is adopted, the depth of trench shall be increased by 300 mm for
each additional tier to be formed.
• Excavation of Trenches in Ground
➢ The trenches shall be excavated in reasonably straight lines. Wherever there is a

change in direction, suitable curvature of 12/15 times the overall diameter of the
largest MV/HT cable shall be provided. Where gradients and changes in depths are
unavoidable, these shall be gradual. Excavation should be done by any suitable
manual or mechanical means. Excavated soil shall be stacked firmly by the side of
the trench such that it may not fall back into the trench.
➢ Adequate precautions shall be taken not to damage any existing cables, pipes or
other such installations during excavation. Wherever bricks, tiles or protected covers
or bare cables are encountered, further excavation shall not be carried out without
the approval of the Employers' representative. The Contractor shall use a cable
detector along the route of excavation and identify existing live cables along the
route and exercise caution during excavation.
➢ Existing property exposed during trenching shall be temporarily supported or
propped adequately as directed by the Employers' representative. The trenching in
such cases shall be done in short lengths, necessary pipes laid for passing cables
therein and the trench refilled as required. If there is any danger of a trench
collapsing or endangering adjacent structures, the sides shall be well shored up with
timbering and/or sheathing as the excavation proceeds. Where necessary these may
even be left in place when backfilling the trench.
➢ Excavation through lawns shall be done in consultation with the Employer's
representative. Bottom of the trench shall be level and free from stone, brick, etc.
The trench shall be provided with a layer of clean dry sand cushion of not less than
80 mm in depth before laying of cables.
12.15 Laying of Cable In Trench in Ground
Page 40 of 64
12.15.1 The length of the cable on each drum shall be as per IS: 10418-1972 . The cable drum shall
be properly mounted on jacks or on a cable wheel at a suitable location. It should be
ensured that the spindle, jack etc are strong enough to carry the weight of the drum without
failure and that the spindle is horizontal in the bearings so as to prevent the drum creeping
to one side while rotating.
12.15.2 The cable shall be pulled over rollers in the trench steadily and uniformly without jerks or
strains. The entire cable length shall, as far as possible, be laid in one stretch. However when
this is not possible the remainder of the cable shall be removed by flaking i.e. making one
long loop in the revere direction.
12.15.3 After the cable is uncoiled and laid over the rollers, the cable shall be lifted slightly over the
rollers beginning from one end by helpers standing about 10 metre apart and drawn
straight. The cable should then be taken off the rollers by additional helpers lifting the cables
and then laid in the trench in a reasonably straight line.
12.15.4 For short runs and cable sizes up to 50 sq mm 1.1 kV grade the alternative method of direct
handling can be adopted with the prior approval of the Employer's representative. If two or
more cables are laid in the same trench, care should be taken to preserve relative position.
All the cables following the same routes shall be laid in the same trench. Cables shall not
cross each other as far as possible. When the cable has been properly straightened, the
cores shall be tested for continuity and insulation resistance. The cable shall be measured
thereafter.
12.15.5 Suitable moisture sealing compound/tape shall be used for sealing of the ends of cables laid
in the trench. All the cables remaining in drums after laying shall be sealed in a dust and
moisture proof manner.
12.15.6 The trench shall be provided with a layer of clean dry sand cushion of not less than 80 mm in
depth before laying of cables. Cable laid in trenches in a single tier formation shall have a
covering of clean dry sand of not less than 170 mm above the base cushion of sand before
the protective cover is laid. If additional tiers are formed each of the subsequent tiers also
shall have a sand cushion of 300 mm and the top most cable shall have a final sand covering
not less than 170 mm before the protective cover is laid. A final protection to cables shall be
laid to provide warning to future excavators of the presence of the cable and also to protect
the cables against accidental mechanical damage. Such protection shall be with second class
bricks of not less than 225 mm x 100 mm x 75 mm (normal standard size) laid breadth wise
for the full length of the cable to the satisfaction of the Employer's representative. Where
more than one cable is to be laid in the same trench this protective covering shall cover all
the cables and project at least 50 mm over the sides of the end cables. In addition bricks on
edge shall be placed along the entire run on either side of the cable run.
12.15.7 The trenches shall then be back filled with excavated earth free from stones or other sharp-
edged debris and shall be rammed and watered in successive layers not exceeding 300 mm.
Page 41 of 64
Unless otherwise specified a crown of earth not less than 50 mm in the center and tapering
towards the side of the trench shall be left to allow for subsidence. The crown of earth
should however not 100 mm exceed so as not to be a hazard to vehicular traffic.
12.15.8 Where road beams or lawns have been cut or kerb stones displaced the same shall be
repaired and made good to the satisfaction of the Employer's representative and all surplus
earth and rocks removed to places as specified.
12.16 Route Markers
12.16.1 Route markers shall be provided along straight runs of the cables at locations approved and
generally at intervals not exceeding 25 meters. Markers shall also be provided to identify
change in the direction of the cable route and also for location of every underground joint.
12.16.2 Route markers shall be made out of 100mm x 100mm x 5mm Gl plate welded or bolted onto
35 mm x 35 mm x 6 mm angle iron 600 mm long duly painted with anti-corrosive paint. Such
plate markers shall be mounted parallel to and 300 mm or so away from the edge of the
trench/pipe/duct, or as directed at site.
12.16.3 Markers shall be embedded in cement concrete 1:2:4 (one cement, 2 coarse sand : 4 graded
stone aggregate of 30 mm normal size). The word "Cable" and other details such as voltage
grading, size etc as required shall be painted on the marker.
12.17 Identification tags
Plastic identification tags shall be provided to cables at end terminations indicating the
feeder number and the Panel/Distribution board from where it is being laid. Cable tags shall
also be tied to cables at the following points:
Inside the cubicles at the point of glanding.
a) Within the distances of 1 to 2 meters on either side of crossing of any wall, floor, fire
stop or other barrier in cable galleries/ trenches etc. One meter distance to be kept so
that cable tags do not get concealed during lost/ disturbed fire sealing, re-plastering, etc.
b) At the field end termination before entry to the terminal box/ junction box/ marshalling
box.
c) Within the distances of 1 to 2 meters of either side of acute bends, tray jumping and at
every 30m interval in straight run.
d) In every span over 30 meters found without any tag despite above.
12.18 Laying in Pipes/Closed Ducts
12.18.1 In locations such as road crossings, entry to buildings/poles in paved areas etc., cables shall
be laid in pipes or closed ducts. Spun reinforced concrete/GI pipes or UPVC ducts shall be
used for such purposes and the pipe shall not be less than 100 mm in diameter for a single
cable and not less than 150 mm for more than one cable. These pipes shall be laid directly in
Page 42 of 64
ground without any special bed. Unless otherwise specified the top surface of pipes shall be
at a minimum depth of 1000 mm from the ground level when laid under roads, pavements
etc.
12.18.2 The pipes for road crossings shall preferably be on the skew to reduce the angle of bend as
the cable enters and leaves the crossing. Pipes shall be continuous and clear of debris or
concrete before cable is drawn. Sharp edges at ends shall be smoothened to prevent injury
to cable insulation or sheathing.
12.19 Laying of Cables in Floors
Laying of cables directly in floors shall be avoided and Gl pipes of adequate size shall be used
wherever necessary. However, if the cables have to be laid direct in the floor specific written
approval of Employers' representative shall be obtained and the Contractor shall cut chases,
lay the cables and make good the chases to original finish.
12.20 Cable Entry into Buildings
Cable entry into buildings shall be made through RCC pipes recessed in the floor. RCC Hume
pipes shall be provided well in advance for service cable entries. The pipe shall be filled with
sand and sealed at both ends with bitumen mastic to avoid entry of water. Suitable size
manholes shall be provided wherever required to facilitate drawing of cables as per
requirements. The Contractor shall submit a written request to Employer's/Engineer's
representative cabling for inspection of works:-
• On excavation and provision of sand bed at bottom of trench
• On laying of cables, and provision of sand bed over the cables
• On provision of protective cover & back filling
• On commencing termination of cable
These requests shall be serially numbered and shall be in an approved format out of one or
two formats to be submitted by the Contractor
12.21 Cable Joints
Cable joints shall be resorted to and permitted only if length of the cable root is more than
standard cable drum length. Cable joints shall not be permitted in any other circumstances.
Wherever unavoidable these joints shall be made with specific approval of Employers'
representative, and shall from a part of cable run/ laying.
12.22 Cable Loops
Page 43 of 64
12.22.1 At the time of the installation approximately 3 meters of surplus cable shall be left as below
or as directed by Employer's representative or Engineer-in-charge.
- at each end of the cable .
- on each side of underground straight through/tee/termination joints.
- at entries to buildings
This cable shall be left in the form of a loop.
12.22.2 Wherever long runs of cable length are installed cable loops shall be left at suitable intervals
as specified by the architect/clients.
12.23 Termination / Jointing Of Cables
12.23.1 All cable terminations for conductors’ up to 10 sqmm may be insertion type and be
terminated through cage claps as required/feasible and all remaining & higher sizes shall
have tinned copper compression lugs. The end terminations shall be insulated with a
minimum of six half-lapped layers of PVC tape. Cable armouring shall be bonded at both
ends.
12.23.2 Soldered jointing/termination shall be totally avoided. Solder-less termination by using
crimping tools, suitable lugs and double compression brass glands shall be used. In the case
of aluminium conductors, it is to be ensured that the conductor oxidation is cleaned by
means of emery paper and then a thin coat of tin is applied before termination.
12.24 Earthing
The cable trays along with their supporting arrangements shall be properly earthed by the
supplier with nut and bolts from the earthing risers provided by purchaser, generally in the
vicinity of the tray routing. The earthing shall be as per latest I.E. Rules and IS/IEC
recommendation. The size of earth connection shall be such that its conductance should be
more than the conductance of 14 sq.mm. copper conductor cross section.
END OF SECTION – III
Page 44 of 64
SECTION - IV
MCB DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
1. SCOPE
This specification covers the requirements design, engineering, manufacture, packing,
forwarding, delivery, storage at site, installation, testing and commissioning of Distribution
Boards (DBs) suitable for operation on 415 V 3 Phase 4 wire 50 Hz supply feeding final
lighting and power sub circuits.
2. STANDARDS AND CODES
Updated and current Indian Standard Specifications and Codes of Practice will apply to the
equipment and the work covered by the scope of this specification. In addition the relevant
clauses of the Indian Electricity Act 1910, Indian Electricity Rules 1956, National Building
Code 2005, National Electric Code 2008, Code of Practice for Fire Safety of Building (general):
General Principal and Fire Grading – IS 1641 - 1988 as amended up to date shall also apply.
Wherever appropriate Indian Standards are not available, relevant British and/or IEC
Standards shall be applicable.
IS 8828: 1996 and IEC 60947 : Miniature Air Circuit Breakers for AC circuits
IS 12640: 1988 : Residual current operated Circuit Breakers
IS 13947: 1993 : Low voltage switchgear and control gear Part
II
IS 2147: 1962 : Degrees of Protection provided by
enclosures
for low voltage switchgear
IS 10118: 1982 : Code of Practice for installation and
maintenance of switchgear not exceeding
1000 volts
IS 4237: 1982 : General requirements for switchgear and
Control gear for voltages not exceeding
1000 volts
IS 8623 (part-1)-1993 : Low voltage switchgear and controller
assemblies: Part-1 Requirement for type tested and partially type tested
assemblies IEC60529/BS EN 60529 : Specifications for
Degrees of Protection
Provided by enclosures
IEC60439-3 or BS EN 60439-3 : Distribution boards
IEC60947-2 or BS EN 60947-2 : Moulded case Circuit breaker (MCCB) and
Electronic tripping units and accessories.
Page 45 of 64
IEC60898 or BS EN 60898 : Miniature Circuit breaker (MCB)
3. GENERAL REQUIREMENT
1) The distribution board shall comprise factory assembled and wired, totally enclosed,
metal clad fabricated out of cold rolled steel with minimum thickness of 2mm with
gasket at all points and opening including hinged doors with suitable locking facility. The
DB shall be suitable for flush and surface mounting.
2) All Distribution board incomer shall be provided with single point isolation.
3) Earth fault protection, short circuit protection and over load protection shall be ensured
at the incomer breaker of the distribution board.
4) IP 42 distribution board shall be used for indoor application.
5) DBs mentioned in terms of number of ways shall be meant complete number of
outgoings with separate incomer slots.
6) Proper diameter holes (knock out holes) shall be provided to suite the incomer and
outgoing conductors/ conduits.
7) Insulated cover plate shall be provided for protection inside the panel to shroud all the
line parts. Only the operating part of the MCB/ ELCB / RCCB/ RCBO shall be projecting
outside the cover plate. The incoming MCB/ ELCB / RCCB/ RCBO terminals shall be
suitably shrouded to avoid accidental contact. The incoming and outgoing terminals shall
be suitable for terminating cables as per the standards.
8) All the low voltage internal wiring of the distribution boards shall be of 1100V grade
stranded copper conductor of 99.9% conductivity, FRLS PVC insulated wires of suitable
sizes as per requirement. Suitable size of PVC sleeves shall be provided at the terminals.
9) Proper wire termination lugs, termination materials and sleeves shall be used at
conductor ends in order to ensure proper connectivity with MCB/ ELCB / RCCB/ RCBO/
earthing terminals.
10) All termination lugs inside DB shall be crimped with wire ends in order to ensure the
proper connectivity.
11) All the device wires and terminal blocks within the board shall be clearly identified by
durable and legible tags corresponding to those in applicable drawings. All wiring shall
be easily identifiable by ferrules (interlocking type) accessible for maintenance checks.
12) The DB should have name plate with its designation inscribed on it. The name plate
shall be made of durable material with legible lettering. Refer its relevant SLD's for
designation of DB's.
13) The following colour coding shall be used for identification of bus bars and wiring, as per
IS 5578-(1984).
R-Phase - Red
Y-Phase - Yellow
B-Phase - Blue
N-Neutral - Black
E-Earthing - Green or Yellow-Green
Control - Grey.
Page 46 of 64
14) All metallic noncurrent carrying parts including doors, switch base, handles etc shall be
securely connected to the main earth bus by stranded PVC insulated copper wire of
adequate size.
15) The type of distribution board shall be chosen as listed in the BOQ/SLD.
4) Miniature Circuit Breaker MCB).
The Miniature circuit breaker (MCB) shall be heat resistant, moulded type designed,
manufactured at tested as per IS: 8828 (1996) & IEC 60898:1995. The MCBs shall have
inverse time tripping characteristic against overloads and instantaneous trip against
short circuit. The MCBs shall be slip on type to the bus bar. The ON and OFF position
shall be clearly marked on the MCB. The MCBs shall be suitable for operation of 50 deg
C ambient without any deration. The MCBs shall be suitable for 415V, 3PH, 4Wire, 50Hz.
/230V 1Ph 50Hz. (3PH or 1Ph. Type) and the fault level shall be minimum 10kA RMS
symmetrical. The terminals of the MCBs shall be suitable for use with pin/fork lugs. The
terminals in MCBs shall be capable of terminating up to 35 sqmm cable. C- curve shall be
provided for lighting & power and D curve for UPS distribution.
5) The bus bar and connectors shall be made of high conductivity copper conforming to
latest Indian Standards. The bus bar shall be amply sized to carry the rated continuous
current under the specified ambient temperature without exceeding the total
temperature of 90 deg C. The bus bar and their connections shall be capable of
withstanding without damage the thermal and mechanical effects of through fault
currents.
6) Suitable removable gland plates shall be provided for top cable entry, as specified.
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS:
(To be filled and confirmed by manufacturer / supplier)
a. Service : Indoor
b. Type of switchgear : metal enclosed
c. Panel sheet thickness : Minimum 2mm thick CRCA
d. System details:
I. System voltage : 415 (+10% to -10%)
ii. Frequency : 50Hz +/- 3%
iii. System earthing : solidly grounded
iv. Fault level : 10 kA or above
v. Design Ambient : 50 deg.
e. Degree of protection : IP42
f. Main busbar material : High conductivity, electrical grade copper
g. Temperature rise at rated normal current above 50 deg ambient temperature
I. Busbars : 40 deg.
ii. Silver plated joints : 45 deg.
h. Type of mounting : flushed/ surface mounted
Page 47 of 64
j. Earthing
Earth bus running throughout panel : copper.
k. Feeder rating:
i. Busbar rating : Same as the Incomer
ii. Feeder rating and quantity : As per single line diagram
iii. Label : Anodised Aluminium. Labelling will be
through white letters on black background.
l. Drawing submission
i. GA drawing including dimension & weight
ii. Detailed wiring diagram
iii. BOQ with specification and make for all components
m. Deviation : Deviations if any shall be clearly furnished
by the vendor.
n. Inspection (including visual and routine tests)
o. Tests
Routine test : HV test
: Functional checks
: IR checks
p. Paint finish : Off white equivalent to RAL 9010
q. Gland Plates : Removable gland plate shall be provided at
the top and bottom of the board.
r. Quantity : Refer drawing/ BOQ
s. Neutral bar : Separate neutral bar mounting on an
insulator for each phase shall be provided.
t. Body earth : Two separate body earth terminal
with earth
signage to be provided.
u. Installation : Separate GI/ MS frame work with anchor
nut & bolt for easy maintenance.
END OF SECTION – IV
Page 48 of 64
Page 49 of 64
Page 50 of 64
Page 51 of 64
SECTION- V: SWITCH / SOCKET, WIRING & CONDUITS
2. 1 SCOPE
This Specification covers the design, engineering, manufacture, testing at

manufacturer’s works before dispatch, packing, forwarding and delivery, storage at site,
installation, supervision of erection, testing at site and commissioning of Switch socket,
internal circuit wiring, inclusive of concealed/surface conduit/race ways pertaining to:
• Lights and fans
• Convenience socket outlets
• Control wiring
• Sub main wiring
3. 2 STANDARDS AND CODES
Updated and current Indian Standard Specifications and Codes of Practice as

stipulated below shall apply to the equipments and the work covered in this section. In
addition the relevant clauses of the Indian Electricity Act 1910, Indian Electricity Rules 1956,
National Building Code 2005, National Electric Code 2008, Code of Practice for Fire Safety of
Building (general) : General Principal and Fire Grading – IS 1641 and IEE wiring regulation
16th edition as amended upto date shall also apply. Wherever appropriate Indian Standards
are not available, relevant British and/or IEC Standards shall be applicable.
660/1100 V grade FRLS PVC insulated wires. IS 694: 1990

GI conduits for electrical wiring. IS 9537: Part I 1980
IS 9537: Part II 1981
Accessories for rigid steel conduits IS 3837: 1990
Flexible steel conduits for electrical wiring IS 3480: 1990
Switch socket outlets IS 4615: 1990
3 pin plugs and socket outlets upto 250 volts IS 1293: 1988
Glossary of items for electrical cables and conductors IS 1885: 1971
Conductors for insulated electric cable IS 8130: 1984
General and safety requirements for fluorescent lamps
luminaries IS 1913: 1978
Switches for domestic and similar purposes IS 3854: 1997
Boxes for the enclosure of electrical accessories IS 5133: Parts I &II 1969
Danger notice plates IS 2551: 1982
Code of practice for personal hazard fire safety of buildings IS 1644: 1998
Code of practice for electrical installation fire safety of
buildings IS 1646: 1997
Code of practice for electrical wiring installations IS 732: 1989
Page 52 of 64
Code of practice of fire safety buildings (General- Electrical

installations) IS 1646: 1982
Guide for safety procedure and practices in electrical works IS 5216: 1982
4. 3.0 MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
U. 3.1 Conduiting System
3.1.1 Rigid PVC Conduit

These shall be of Medium Grade PVC conduit upto 32mm. Conduits shall be IS
certified and complied. Conduits shall show no appreciable unevenness and shall be free
from burrs, fins and like deformities which may cause damage to cable insulation. These
rough internal edges shall be removed by means of a proper reamer. Wherever so specified,
the conduit conforms to IS 9537 Part – iii, 1983 and IS 3419 – 1988. All conduits used in this
work shall be ISI embossed.
3.1.2 Boxes for Modular Wiring Accessories
Boxes for housing modular wiring accessories (switches, switched socket outlets,
telephone/computer / TV outlets, bell pushes, electronic fan regulators etc.) Shall be
fabricated from minimum 1.6 mm thick MS sheets provided with rust inhibiting zinc
phosphating treatment. The MS boxes shall be suitable for a grid plate being fixed over it for
mounting wiring accessories leaving ample space at the back and on the sides for
accommodating wiring conductors, M.S. boxes shall be provided with a brass earth
terminal. The MS boxes shall have knockout holes for conduit entry which shall be secured in
position by check nuts and provided with bushes. No timber shall be used for any supports.
Switch and outlet boxes shall be located as shown in the drawings.
In case the number of switches in one box is not tallying with that available in standard
manufacture, the box accommodating the next higher number of switches shall be provided
without any extra cost.
3.1.5 Wiring Capacity of Conduits

We propose rigid PVC conduit conforming to IS :732-1989 for wiring of Lights / Power
points/ Data / Telephone and wiring. Insulated copper conductor wires shall be used for
wiring.
Maximum number of wires which could be drawn in various sizes of conduits shall be as
given in table below.
Page 53 of 64
V. 3.2 FRLS PVC insulated wires

Flame Retardant Low Smoke (FRLS) PVC insulated wires shall be single core
unsheathed in voltage grade 1100 V as per IS 694 – 1990 with 99.97% pure electrolytic grade
bright annealed stranded bare copper conductors. Special parameters of FRLS PVC
insulation like critical oxygen index, temperature index, smoke density and flammability test
shall conform to relevant IEC and ASTM Standards. Coil packings shall be ISI marked as
stipulated in IS 694
W. 3.3 Modular Cover Plated Mounted Wiring Accessories
3.3.1 Switches
All 6 amps and 16 amps switches shall be of the modular enclosed type flush
mounted 220 Volt AC of the best quality and standard. The switch moving and fixed contacts
shall be of silver nickel and silver graphite alloy and contact tips coated with silver. The
housing of switches shall be made from high impact resistant, flame retarding and ultra
violet stabilized engineering plastic material. The switch controlling the light point shall be
connected on to the phase wire of the circuit.
3.3.2 Molded Cover Plates

Switches, receptacles and telephone system outlets in wall shall be provided with molded
cover plates of shape, size and colour approved by the Engineer-in-Charge made from high
impact resistant, flame retarding and ultra violet stabilized engineering plastic material, and
secured to the box with counter sunk round head chromium plated brass screws. Where two
or more switches are installed together, they shall be provided with one common switch
Page 54 of 64
cover plate as described above with notches to accommodate all switches either in one, two
or three rows.
One and two gang switch cover plate, telephone outlet cover plate, 6 and 16 amps
switched/unswitched plates shall have the same shape and size. Three and four gang switch
cover plates shall have the same shape and size. Six and eight gang switch cover plates shall
have the same shape and size. Nine and twelve switch cover plates shall have the same
shape and size. Wherever five switches, seven switches, ten switches and eleven switches
are to be fixed the next higher size of gang switch cover plate to be used and openings shall
be provided with blank-off covers at no extra cost.
3.3.3 Wall Socket Outlets

All 6/16 amps wall socket outlets unless otherwise mentioned on the drawings shall
be switched, with round pins and fitted with automatic linear safety shutters to ensure
safety from prying fingers. Unswitched 6/16 amp wall socket outlets where called for in the
drawings shall be of three pin type. The socket outlets shall be made from high impact
resistant, flame retarding and ultra violet stabilized engineering plastic material. The switch
and sockets shall be located in the same plate. The plates for 6 amp switched/unswitched
plugs and telephone outlets shall be of the same size and shape. All the switched and
unswitched outlets shall be of the best standard. The switch controlling the socket outlet
shall be on the phase wire of the circuit. An earth wire shall be provided along the cables
feeding socket outlets for electrical appliances. The earth wire shall be connected to the
earthing terminal screw inside the box. The earth terminal of the socket shall be connected
to the earth terminal provided inside the box.
5. 4 CONDUIT INSTALLATION
X. 4.1 System
The whole conduit system shall be installed to comply fully with relevant provision in
Indian Standard Specifications, Indian Electricity Rules and IE wiring regulations. Conduits
shall be laid either recessed in walls and ceilings or on surface on walls and ceilings or partly
recessed and partly on surface, as required. Stranded copper conductor insulated wire of
size as per schedule of quantities shall be provided in entire conduiting for loop earthing.
Steel wire of suitable size to serve as a fish wire shall be left in all conduit runs to facilitate
drawing of wires after completion of conduiting.
Y. 4.2 Layout
• Conduits layout and routes shall be submitted for Engineer-in-Charge’s approval prior to
execution. Allowance for adjustments due to site conditions shall be provided with no extra
cost.
• Conduit routes shall be chosen for easy, straight runs with a minimum of bends and
crossings. Generally they shall follow the structure of building, running at right angles or in
parallels to floors and ceilings. Conduit shall be kept within 300 mm of floors and ceiling
when running parallel to them.
Page 55 of 64
• Outlets boxes for housing accessories shall be used as draw boxes. The total number of draw
boxes shall be kept to a minimum and shall be provided so that conduits runs do not exceed
12 m or have more than two right angle bends.
• All conduits shall be kept clear of gas and water pipes. In particulars, conduits shall be at
least 150 mm away from gas pipe. Where proximity to these pipes is unavoidable, they shall
be effectually segregated e.g. using rubber or other insulating material to prevent
appreciable voltage difference at possible points of contact. Segregation from extra low
voltage circuits and telecommunication circuits shall also apply unless these are wired to the
same voltage requirements as lighting and power circuits.
• Conduits from different distribution boards shall not be connected to the same junction box.
Each run of conduit shall be assembled complete with draw in wires.
Z. 4.3 Joints and terminations
• Electrical and mechanical continuity shall be maintained throughout all conduits joints and
terminations. Conduit threads shall be thoroughly cleaned and the conduits tightly screwed.
The conduit system shall be watertight after installation.
• Conduits shall be connected using couplers or via boxes. With a coupler, the ends of the
conduit shall butted close together and the running coupler is screwed tightly on and
tightened by a locknut.
• Conduits terminating into boxes provided with spouts shall be threaded so that there are no
exposed threads. For boxes with no spouts, the termination shall be made using a brass bush
and a coupler. The conduit is pushed through the knockout or drilled entry and the bush is
screwed tightly onto its end. The coupler is screwed to butt firmly against the exterior wall
of the box.
• Where conduits are not jointed or terminated in boxes, they shall be terminated in a
screwed brass bush.
• In all joints and terminations, conduits threads shall not be exposed. Where this cannot be
avoided as in a running coupler, the exposed threads shall be coated with red lead paint to
seal against the ingress of water.
AA. 4.4 Bends

• Conduits shall be bent cold with an approved type of bending block or bending machine,
without altering the dimensions of their sections.
• All conduits bends shall be such as to permit compliance to the requirements for bends in
cables to as stated in the IEE regulations
• Bends shall be made with as large a radius as the position of the conduit within the building
permits. Where the bend is more than 90 degree, circular or rectangular junction boxes shall
to be used for connecting conduits.
BB. 4.5 Surface Conduiting
Page 56 of 64
Wherever so desired, conduit shall be laid in surface over finished concrete and/or
plastered brickwork. Suitable spacer saddles of approved make and finish shall be fixed to
the finished structural surface along the conduit route at intervals not exceeding 600 mm.
Holes in concrete or brick work for fixing the saddles shall be made neatly by electric drills
using masonry drill bits. Conduits shall be fixed on the saddles by means of good quality
heavy duty GI clamps screwed to the saddles by counter sunk screws. Neat appearance and
good workmanship of surface conduiting work is of particular importance. The entire
conduit work shall be in absolute line and plumb. Conduits above false ceiling shall be fixed
on suitable hangers supported from the structural ceiling.
CC. 4.6 Fixing of conduit fittings and accessories
For concealed conduiting work, the fittings and accessories shall be completely
embedded in walls/ceilings leaving top surface flush with finished wall/ceiling surface in a
workman like manner.
Loop earthing wire shall be connected to a screwed earthstead inside outlet boxes to make
an effective contact with the metal body.
DD. 4.7 Cleaning of Conduit Runs
The entire conduit system including outlets and boxes shall be thoroughly cleaned after
completion of erection and before drawing in of cables.
EE. 4.8 Protection against Dampness

All outlets in conduit system shall be properly drain and ventilated to minimise chances of
condensation/sweating.
FF. 4.9 Expansion Joints
When crossing through expansion joints in buildings, the conduit sections across the joint
shall be through approved quality heavy duty metal flexible conduits of the same size as the
rigid conduit.
GG. 4.10 Loop Earthing
Loop earthing shall be provided by means of insulated stranded copper conductor wires of
sizes as per Schedule of Quantity laid alongwith wiring inside conduits for all wiring outlets
and sub-mains. Earthing terminals shall be provided inside all switch boxes, outlet boxes and
draw boxes etc.
6. 5. LAYING AND DRAWING OF WIRES

Page 57 of 64
HH. 5.1 Bunching of Wires

Wires carrying current shall be so bunched in conduits that the outgoing and return wires
are drawn into the same conduit. Wires originating from two different phases shall not be
run in the same conduit.
II. 5.2 Drawing of Wires

The drawing of wires shall be done with due regard to the following precautions:-
• No wire shall be drawn into any conduit, until all work of any nature, that may cause injury
to wire is completed. Burrs in cut conduits shall be smoothened before erection of conduits.
Care shall be taken in pulling the wires so that no damage occurs to the insulation of the
wire. Approved type bushes shall be provided at conduit terminations.
• Before the wires are drawn into the conduits, conduits shall be thoroughly cleaned of
moisture, dust, dirt or any other obstruction by forcing compressed air through the conduits
if necessary.
• While drawing insulated wires into the conduits, care shall be taken to avoid scratches and
kinks which cause breakage of conductors.
• There shall be no sharp bends.
JJ. 5.3 Termination /Jointing of Wires
• Sub-circuit wiring shall be carried out in looping system. Joints shall be made only at
distribution board terminals, switches/buzzers and at ceiling roses/connectors/lamp holders
terminals for lights/fans/socket outlets. No joints shall be made inside conduits or
junction/draw/inspection boxes.
• Switches controlling lights, fans or socket outlets shall be connected in the phase wire of the
final sub circuit only. Switches shall never be connected in the neutral wire.
• Wiring conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet. Joints where unavoidable, due
to any special reason shall be made by approved connectors. Specific prior permission from
Engineer-in-Charge in writing shall be obtained before making such joint.
• Insulation shall be shaved off for a length of 15 mm at the end of wire like sharpening of a
pencil and it shall not be removed by cutting it square or wringing.
• Strands of wires shall not be cut for connecting terminals. All strands of wires shall be
twisted round at the end before connection.
• Conductors having nominal cross sectional area exceeding 1.5 sq. mm shall always be
provided with crimping sockets. Tinning of the strands shall be done wherever crimping
sockets are not available as per instructions of the Engineer-in-Charge
• All wiring shall be labelled with appropriate plastic ferrules for identification.
• At all bolted terminals, brass flat washer of large area and approved steel spring washers
shall be used.
• Brass nuts and bolts shall be used for all connections.
Page 58 of 64
• The pressure applied to tighten terminal screws shall be just adequate, neither too much nor
too less.
• Switches controlling lights, fans, socket outlets etc. shall be connected to the phase wire of
circuits only.
• Only certified valid license holder wiremen shall be employed to do wiring/jointing work.
KK.5.4 Load Balancing
The Contractor shall plan the load balancing of circuits in 3 phase installation and get the
same approved by the Engineer-in-Charge before commencement of the work.
LL. 5.5 Colour Code of Conductors
Colour code for normal supply – Red, Yellow, Blue for three Phases, Black for Neutral and
Green for Earth – shall be maintained for the electrical wiring installation
Colour code for UPS supply – Red/white, Yellow/white, Blue/white for three Phases, white
for Neutral and Green/yellow for Earth
MM. 5.6 Design Parameters:
Wiring shall be carried out as per following design parameters in recessed / surface
conduit/conduit cum race way system.
• Only looping system of wiring shall be adopted throughout. No joints excepting at wiring
terminals shall be permitted.
• All accessories shall be flush type unless otherwise stated.
• Each sub circuit shall not have more than a total of 10 nos lights and fans or a load of 800
watts whichever is lesser unless specifically stipulated otherwise. Wiring shall be carried out
in rigid GI conduiting system.
5.6.1 Wiring for Exhaust Fans

Wiring for exhaust fan points shall be same as for Primary light points and shall in addition
include the cost of providing a 3/5 pin 6 amp socket outlet near the fan along with plug top
and a separate 6 amp control switch.
5.6.2 Wiring for Convenience Socket Outlets

Wiring for 6 amps socket outlets on work tables shall be carried out in rigid MS conduits as
indicated in electrical layout drawings.
Point wiring for 3 pin 6 amps convenience socket outlets
Page 59 of 64
Point wiring for 3 pin 6 amps socket outlets on point wiring basis shall be the same as
Primary light points defined in para 7.4.1 and shall in addition include 3 pin 6 amp socket
outlet with 6 amp control switch in GI box with cover. Including loop earthing of the third pin
complete as required and as itemized in scheduled of quantities.
Point wiring for 3 pin 16 amps convenience socket outlets

Point wiring for 3 pin 16 amps socket outlets on point wiring basis shall be the same as
Primary light point and shall in addition include 3 pin 16 amp socket outlet with 16 amp
control switch in MS box with cover. including loop earthing of the third pin complete as
required and as itemized in scheduled of quantities.
7. 6. ROUTINE AND COMPLETION TESTS
NN.6.1 Installation Completion Tests
At the completion of the work, the entire installation shall be subject to the following tests:
1. Wiring continuity test
2. Insulation resistance test
3. Earth continuity test
4. Earth resistivity test
Besides the above, any other test specified by the local authority shall also be carried out. All
tested and calibrated instruments for testing, labour, materials and incidentals necessary to
conduct the above tests shall be provided by the contractor at his own cost.
OO.6.2 Wiring Continuity Test

All wiring systems shall be tested for continuity of circuits, short circuits, and earthing after
wiring is completed and before installation is energised.
PP. 6.3 Insulation Resistance Test

The insulation resistance shall be measured between earth and the whole system
conductors, or any section thereof with all protection in place and all switches closed and
except in concentric wiring all lamps in position of both poles of the installation otherwise
electrically connected together, a direct current pressure of not less than twice the working
pressure provided that it does not exceed 1100 volts for LT circuits. Where the supply is
derived from AC three phase system, the neutral pole of which is connected to earth, either
direct or through added resistance, pressure shall be deemed to be that which is maintained
between the phase conductor and the neutral. The insulation resistance measured as above
shall not be less than 50 megohms divided by the number of points provided on the circuit
the whole installation shall not have an insulation resistance lower than one megohm.
The insulation resistance shall also be measured between all conductors connected
to one phase conductor of the supply and shall be carried out after removing all metallic
connections between he two poles of the installation and in those circumstances the
insulation shall not be less than that specified above.
Page 60 of 64
The insulation resistance between the frame work of housing of power appliances
and all live parts of each appliance shall not be less than that specified in the relevant
Standard specification or where there is no such specification, shall not be less than half a
megohm or when PVC insulated cables are used for wiring 12.5 megohms divided by the
number of outlets. Where a whole installation is being tested a lower value than that given
by the above formula subject to a minimum of 1 Megohms is acceptable.
QQ.6.4 Testing Of Earth Continuity Path

The earth continuity conductor including metal conduits and metallic envelopes of
cable in all cases shall be tested for electric continuity and the electrical resistance of the
same alongwith the earthing lead but excluding any added resistance of earth leakage circuit
breaker measured from the connection with the earth electrode to any point in the earth
continuity conductor in the completed installation shall not exceed one ohm.
RR. 6.5 Testing Of Polarity of Non-Linked Single Pole Switches

In a two wire installation a test shall be made to verify that all non-linked single pole
switches have been connected to the same conductor throughout, and such conductor shall
be labeled or marked for connection to an outer or phase conductor or to the non-earthed
conductor of the supply. In the three of four wire installation, a test shall be made to verify
that every non-linked single pole switch is fitted to one of the outer or phase conductor of
the supply. The entire electrical installation shall be subject to the final acceptance of the
Engineer-in-Charge as well as the local authorities.
SS. 6.6 Performance

Should the above tests not comply with the limits and requirements as above the
contractor shall rectify the faults until the required results are obtained. The contractor shall
be responsible for providing the necessary instruments and subsidiary earths for carrying out
the tests. The above tests are to be carried out by the contractor without any extra charge.
TT. 6.7 Tests and Test Reports

The Contractor shall furnish test reports and preliminary drawings for the
equipment to the Engineer-in-Charge for approval before commencing supply of the
equipment. The Contractor should intimate with the tender the equipment intended to be
supplied with its technical particulars. Any test certificates etc., required by the local
Inspectors or any other Authorities would be supplied by the Contractor without any extra
charge. All test reports shall be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge prior to energizing of
installation.
END OF SECTION – V
Page 61 of 64
SECTION- VI: EARTHING & LIGHTNING PROTECTION
8. 1.1 Scope:
1.1.1 The scope of this section covers supply, installation and testing of earthing system for all non-
current carrying metal parts of electrical installation.
1.1.2 Installation of earthing system for electrical equipment shall be carried out in accordance
with IS 3043 - code of Practice for earthing and conforming to Indian electricity Rules 1956
as ammended upto date.
9. 1.2 Earthing System & Equipment Bonding:
1.2.1 Earthing system shall comprise earth electrodes at each building. Test link boxes shall be
provided at each earth electrodes for periodical resistance measurement. All such earth
electrodes shall be interconnected forming a main loop - (MEL).
1.2.2 The entire conduit installation, cable sheaths and cable armour shall also be bonded to earth
at both ends. It must be ensured that the conduit installations maintain electrical
continuity throughout its entire length. Conduits shall be effectively bonded together at
each joint, such as couplings, junction boxes, draw boxes or any other accessories and
equipments. Where conduits and screwed cable glands are terminated at equipment
enclosures with slip-holes, an earthing/bonding washer (e.g. star-washer) shall be used to
maintain electrical continuity.
1.2.3 All earth connections with solid or stranded conductors shall be made by means of
soldered cable lugs. Connections with G. Iron tapes shall be directly bolted type. All
hardware used shall be galvanised steel, brass or passivated to prevent corrosion. Spring
washer or lock washers shall be used to make all connections secure and vibration-proof. All
contact surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and coated with conducting petroleum jelly to
prevent corrosion.
1.2.4 Earth connections from I.C. Boards shall be taken as directly as possible to the earth buses or
test links
Main earth conductors from earth bus or test-link to the Earth Electrode shall be coated with
bitumastic to reduce straddle potential.
1.2.5 All aluminium earth terminations on all switch board/switch panels shall be with suitable
size crimped lugs of Dowel or equivalent make.
10. 1.3 Earth Electrodes:
Page 62 of 64
1.3.1 Earth electrodes shall consist of Copper/G.I. plates buried in ground or G.I. Pipes lay in
ground. The type of electrodes shall be as specified in the Schedule of Quantities. The
method of installation earth electrode shall be in accordance with IS: 3043. Earth plates shall
be buried minimum 3 meters below virgin ground. Soft soil shall be filled in around the
earth plate and 20mm dia G.I. pipes (class heavy) shall be suitably installed to treat it with
water. Every earth electrode shall have earth test link. Additional earth electrode shall be
provided if necessary to bring down earth resistance within one-ohm.
11. 1.4 Main Earth Conductor:
1.4.1 Main earth conductors shall be Galvanised Iron or Stranded conductors with or without PVC
sheath as specified. They shall be connected at one end to the earth electrode and to the
earth bus or test link at the other end. All connections below ground shall be made by
bolting or riveting and brazing or welding. Sizes of main earth conductors shall be as
specified. All connections to the test-link or earth bus shall be securely bolted. Contact
surfaces shall be tinned and suitably protected with Petroleum Conducting Jelly to prevent
corrosion.
12. 1.5 Installation :
1.5.1 All joints shall be reverted and sweated. Joints in the earth bar between the switch gear
units or to cable sheaths shall be bolted at the joints.
1.5.2 Where the diameter of the bolt for connecting earthbar to apparatus exceeds one quarter of
the width of the earth-bar, the connection to the bolt shall be made with a wider piece to
earth bar. These shall be tinned at the point of connection to equipment and special care
taken to ensure a permanent low resistance contact to iron or steel. All bolts, nuts,
washers, etc. shall be cadmium plated.
1.5.3 Main earth-bars shall be spaced sufficiently away from the surface to which they are fixed,
such as walls or the side of trenches, to allow for ease of connections.
1.5.4 The earthing lead shall be suitably protected from mechanical injury by galvanised iron pipe
wherever it passes through wall and floor. The portion within ground shall be buried at least
60 cm deep.
1.5.5 The earthing lead shall be securely bolted and soldered to the plate or pipe as the case may
be. In the case of the plate, the lead shall be connected by means of a cable socket, with two
bolt and nuts. All washers shall be of the same material as the plate or pipe. All iron bolt,
nuts and washers shall be galvanized.
1.5.6 The earthing plate shall be surrounded by alternate layer of charcoal or coke and salt.
There shall be a 20mm G.I. Pipe running from the top of the plate or pipe. The top of this
Page 63 of 64
pipe shall provide with a funnel and mesh for watering the earth. This will be housed in a
masonry enclosure not less than 30cm x 30cm x 30cm deep. A cast iron frame with 10 mm
thick cover shall be suitably embedded in the masonry.
1.5.7 Earth electrode resistance shall be measured as per IS 3043. No earth electrode installed
shall have a greater ohm resistance than 1.0 ohms as measured by an approved earth
testing apparatus.
END OF SECTION-VI
Page 64 of 64
SPECIFICATION FOR FURNITURES
1. GENERAL
The scope covers providing supply installation of furniture complete in all respects as per furniture
layout enclosed in bid document. Scope covers all components required to supply and all necessary
hardware needed for complete installation of furniture. General features of furniture covered in scope
of Bid Document are detailed hereunder.
2. SPECIFICATIONS
2.1 BUNK BED (Overall size: 2000 L x 900 D x 1600 H): Structure should be made up of MS Tubular fame
Structure Ø50. 4 / 19.05 / 12.7 (+/- 5%) or MS frame of square pipes 40mm x 40mm x 1.6mm, 25mm x
25mm x 1.6mm (+/- 5%). Horizontal beams are made of rectangular tube 50 x 25 / 40 x 20 / Mattress
supports, and ladders are made of S. Tube 20 x 20 / 25 x 25 / Strip 25x3 (+/- 5%). Three nos. of
Horizontal stiffeners are to be provided at equal intervals to hold the mattress base. The stiffeners are
made of Square tube of size 25 x 25mm made out of MS with a thickness of 1.2mm. Bed is made up
CRCA Sheet/ 12mm plywood for mattress. Bed is provided with rubber bush in legs. All the metal
components are power coated to the thickness of 50-60 Microns. Manufacturers to have ISO 9001, ISO
14001, ISO 18001, Indian Design Mark, and BIFMA certificate for few of its product.
2.2 SINGLE BED Overall size: 2000 L x 900 D x 1600 H): Structure should be made up of MS Tubular fame
Structure Ø50. 4 / 19.05 / 12.7 (+/- 5%) or MS frame of square pipes 40mm x 40mm x 1.6mm, 25mm x
25mm x 1.6mm (+/- 5%). Horizontal beams are made of rectangular tube 50 x 25 / 40 x 20 / Mattress
supports, and ladders are made of S. Tube 20 x 20 / 25 x 25 / Strip 25x3 (+/- 5%). Three nos. of
Horizontal stiffeners are to be provided at equal intervals to hold the mattress base. The stiffeners are
made of Square tube of size 25 x 25mm made out of MS with a thickness of 1.2mm. Bed is made up
CRCA Sheet/ 12mm plywood for mattress. Bed is provided with rubber bush in legs. All the metal
components are power coated to the thickness of 50-60 Microns. Manufacturers to have ISO 9001, ISO
14001, ISO 18001, Indian Design Mark, and BIFMA certificate for few of its product.
2.3 GYM LOCKERS - 4 Door Locker Unit 2 Nos (600 x 350 x 1800): The lockers are made up of CRCA
having 2 compartments in every tower. The size of each tower is 300 (W) X 350 (D) X 1800 (H). Each
compartment has an individual locking mechanism pre-fitted to it. The top of the Tower is made up of
2mm thick CRCA duly powder coated to approved finish. The carcass and shelf are made up of 0.8mm
CRCA Duly Powder Coated. The skirting is made up of 1.2mm CRCA duly powder coated to the approved
finish. The powder coating is of 50-60 microns. All CRCA material confirm to IS 513 CR2 2008.
Manufacturers to have ISO 9001, ISO 14001, ISO 18001, Indian Design Mark, and BIFMA certificate for
few of its product.
Page 1 of 1
PRE ENGINEERED BUILDING WITH

ROOF SHED
1. GENERAL
The scope covers providing fabrication drawing, fabrication inspection, supply, erection and
commissioning of Pre Engineered Building (PEB) Roof shed complete in all respects as per GADs of sheds
enclosed in bid document. Scope covers all components required to construct primary and secondary
framing (floors, wall and roof purlins), wall and roof cladding, catwalk with hand rail, staircase, sliding
door with frame and all necessary hardware needed for completing building/ shed. General features of
PEB sheds covered in scope of Bid Document are detailed hereunder.
2. DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS
2.1 DESIGN LOADS (LIVE/ WIND) Building should be designed and analyzed for all possible combinations
of live load, dead loads, gravity loads, earthquake loads, crane loads if any, wind loads etc for mean
probable life of structure for 50 years.
2.1.1 Live load 0.75 kN/m2 as per IS 875-2-1987 Code of practice for design loads (other than
earthquake) for buildings and structures, Part 2: imposed loads
2.1.2 Wind load Basic wind speed as per IS 875-3-1987 Code of practice for design loads (other than
earthquake) for buildings and structures, Part 3: wind loads Probability factor k1 as per codal provision
Terrain, height & structure size factor k2 as per codal provision Topography factor k3 as per codal
provision
2.1.3 Seismic Zone As per IS 1893-2002 (or latest)
2.1.4 Dead load All possible weight of building components, electrical cables, water pipelines, fittings etc
should be considered.
2.1.5 Load combination All possible load combinations should be considered, i.e., dead load, imposed
load, wind load, seismic load etc as per relevant IS codes.
2.2 DEFLECTIONS Main frame, Vertical, Lateral, Purlins As per IS 800-2007 (or latest)
2.3 APPLICABLE CODES Relevant BIS Codes with latest revision should be used. Wherever other than BIS
codes/ manuals are mentioned equivalent BIS Codes may also be used.
DESIGN CODES & STANDARDS
a) IS:800 - LATEST Code of practice for General construction in Steel

b) IS: 816 - LATEST Code of practice Welding
Page 1 of 4
c) IS: 4923 – LATEST Code for square & rectangular Hollow sections.
d) IS: 1161 – LATEST Code for circular Hollow sections
e) IS 1893- LATEST: Criteria for earthquake resistant design of structures
f) IS 875- LATEST Design loads (other than earthquake) for buildings and structures
g) IS 801- LATEST Cold formed light gauge steel structure members in general building
construction
h) IS 12843- LATEST Tolerances for erection of steel structures
i) IS: 808 - LATEST Code for Hot Rolled steel beams
2.4 COLUMN DESIGN Column design should be such that all load is vertically transferred directly to
ground.
3. SCOPE OF WORKS
3.1 Scope covers execution of complete PEB Building & roof shed as per GAD of shed enclosed and
specifications detailed in Bid Document and comprising items mentioned hereunder. However, the list is
not exhaustive and may require some more items, which are not included in the list but are essentially
required for completion of the work. a) Rigid frame structural for column, rafters with end plates, purlin,
girt, bracing preferably piped bracing b) Roof (minimum thickness 30mm) and wall cladding sheet
(minimum thickness 50mm) Sandwich Panle (PUF and pre coated galvanized iron profile sheet), flashing,
trim, gutter, downspout c) Structural hardware, sheeting fastener, end lap sealant d) Anchor bolts and
template e) Crane girders/ beams, bracket, catwalk with hand rails at gantry level and staircase/ ladder
to gantry f) Framed opening, sliding doors, gravent, louver , turbo vent g) Structural members with one
coat of factory applied primer and paint, final painting h) False ceiling panel, door, window, ventilator,
rolling shutter, masonry brick wall, partition wall etc
3.2 Scope covers submission of GAD of sheds including architectural drawings detailing plan, elevation
and sections of PEB shed and design basis report of shed as per specification detailed hereunder by
bidder for approval of the employer within key dates mentioned in Bid Document.
3.3 Scope covers submission of Structural drawings of PEB Building including foundation design and
details by bidder to the employer for execution.
3.4 Scope covers submission of quality assurance plan including source of materials for fabrication and
erection of PEB Building & roof shed by bidder to the employer for fabrication and execution. Bidder
should ensure that standard code of practice and recommended installation methodology of erection of
PEB Building & roof shed are adopted during erection at site. Bidder should ensure necessary tackles
and tools like torque wrench, power drill/ screw driver etc are used during erection. Bidder should
ensure proper scaffolding; man lift, road mobile crane etc are deployed and used at site during erection.
3.5 Scope covers necessary tests conducted in-house and from approved recognized testing center and
submission of test certificates for chemical and mechanical properties as per approved quality assurance
plan for fabrication and erection.
Page 2 of 4
3.6 Scope covers execution of foundation and horizontal ties as per design loads of PEB shed. Bidder
should. Design should be prepared based upon site soil conditions. Anchor bolts should be set strictly as
per approved setting plan unless otherwise specified.
3.7 Scope covers interior partition walls, electrical, plumbing, cooling, heating, foundation, masonry
walls, doors, windows, ventilators, concrete flooring. Materials not specifically mentioned in this
specification and executed by bidder will be paid as per relevant items of BOQ in Bid Document.
4. STANDARD MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS

Relevant BIS Codes latest revision should be used. Wherever other than BIS codes/ manuals are
mentioned equivalent BIS Codes may also be used.
4.1 STRUCTURAL sections should be TSMB / NPB E350 MPa steel. Sections should not be fabricated
from plates at site. Hollow sections shall be YST355 confirming IS Code 4923 Latest & 1161 latest
4.2 FASTENERS Primary structural connections should be made with high strength bolts Gr8.8 steel
Purlins and girts should be connected to supporting members by machine bolts Gr4.6 steel. Anchor bolts
should be made from rods conforming to ASTM F1554 with minimum yield strength of 350 MPa. Roof
and wall panels should be fastened by No12 carbon steel self-drilling.
4.3 PAINTING Scope covers painting of structural members. Primary steel should be cleaned thoroughly
before applying primer coat. One primer coat of red oxide zinc chromate as per IS 2074 should be
applied in shop after fabrication with an average dry film thickness (DFT) of 35 microns. Painting covers
one shop primer coat and two coats of synthetic enamel paint of total DFT thickness of 100 microns on
all structural members.
4.4 SHEETING Scope covers supply and erection of 0.50 mm (+/- 0.05%) thick pre coated galvanized iron
trapezoidal profile sheeting from reputed manufacturer with nominal 28 mm deep ribs. End ribs should
be designed for anti-capillary action to avoid seepage of water through lateral overlap. Feed material of
profiled sheet should be zincalume/ galvalume steel with base metal thickness (BMT) of 0.50 mm and
total coated thickness of 0.60 mm. Base metal should be high strength steel of 240 MPa yield strength
with hot dip metallic coating of aluminum zinc alloy (55% Al, 43.4% Zn & 1.6% Si) as per ASTM A792M/
AS1397 & AZ150 of 150 gm/m2 total on both sides with super durable polyester quality paint coat
conforming to AS/ NZS 2728 Type4. Painting should comprise of epoxy primer coat of 5-7 micron on
both surface, polyester top coat of 15-18 micron on top surface. Sheet should have protective guard film
of 25 microns minimum. Color shade for roof and wall cladding sheets should be selected from standard
color shade with approval of the employer. Paint for exposed coat should be super durable polyester
with inorganic pigment and free of lead. Sheets should have marking details on backside of sheet at
regular intervals indicating steel manufacturers name and product details. Sheeting should be fastened
with nominal 40 micron zinc coated or nominal 25 micron zinc-tin alloy coated Hex head self-drilling
screw as per AS3566 2002 Class-3 fasteners of approved make with EDPM washer as per requirement
considering profile shape and design load. Fastener size should be selected as per design/
manufacturers recommendations.
Page 3 of 4
4.4.1 WALL PANEL SYSTEM Supplying pre coated galvanized iron profile sheets 0.50 mm (+ 0.05 %)
total coated thickness with zinc coating 120 grams per sqm as per IS: 277, in 240 mpa steel grade, 5-
7 microns epoxy primer on both side of the sheet and polyester top coat 15-18 microns. Sheet
should have protective guard film of 25 microns minimum and rigid puff insulated percolated galvanized
Iron profile sheet Rigid PUF (Rigid Polyurethane Foam) of minimum thickness 50 mm, density 40kg(+/-
2kg) per cum in between two pre-coated galvanized iron profile i/c corrugated portion .Panels are HCFC
and CFC free. Panels have metallic Tongue and groove joining system.
4.4.2 ROOF PANEL SYSTEM Supplying pre coated galvanized iron profile sheets 0.50 mm (+ 0.05 %)
total coated thickness with zinc coating 120 grams per sqm as per IS: 277, in 240 mpa steel grade, 5-
7 microns epoxy primer on both side of the sheet and polyester top coat 15-18 microns. Sheet
should have protective guard film of 25 microns minimum and rigid puff insulated percolated galvanized
Iron profile sheet Rigid Trapezoidal PUF (Rigid Polyurethane Foam) of minimum thickness 30 mm,
density 40kg(+/-2kg) per cum in between two pre-coated galvanized iron profile i/c corrugated portion
.Panels are HCFC and CFC free. Panels have metallic Tongue and groove joining system.
4.5 LOUVER Scope covers supply and fixing of louvers as per GAD of shed with fixed louver blades and
border flashings manufactured from same sheeting material with outer side and inner side as per color
scheme approved by the employer.
4.11 ACCESSORIES (TRIMS, FLASHINGS, GUTTER, DOWNSPOUTS, RIDGE, CAPPING AND LINER PANEL)
Scope covers supply and fixing of accessories , flashings, gutters, down take pipes, trims, ridges, capping,
liner panels etc fabricated from same sheeting material used for roof and wall cladding application.
Accessories should be fixed properly with roof and wall sheeting to ensure weather tight PEB Building &
roof shed. Down-take pipes/ downspout should be fabricated in square section (equivalent to 6”
diameter pipe) from same sheeting material. Gutter and down-take pipe system should ensure no water
accumulation and stagnation at gutter level. Color on outer side of accessories should be as per
approved colour.
5. SOURCES
A. Likely Manufacturers and suppliers of Materials for PEB Building & roof shed complete in all
respect should be of Tata Steel, Sail & RINL.
B. Likely Manufacturers and suppliers of Materials for sheeting: “Tata Blue Scope, JSW & JSPL or
equivalent”.
Page 4 of 4

NIT - 2.1.technical Specification

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

NIT - 2.1.technical Specification

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

NIT - 2.1.technical Specification

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TECHNICAL

1. Civil Works : Page 2-97

1. General notes to the specification:

(a) Notes for Tenderer:

(b) Specific requirements from Contractor:

(iv) Contractor to provide:

(vi) Setting out of works:

(vii) Quality of materials supplied:

(viii) Sampling and testing:

(ix) Test certificates:

(xii) Disposal of earth:

(xiii) Purchase of materials:

(xv) Unforeseen work:

(xvi) Interruption of work:

(c) General description of civil works and finishing:

13 Door 32 mm thick ISI marked factory made solid core block

(d) Recommended/ preferred manufacturer for building materials and

(v) Recommended make list:

(b) Classification of excavated materials: (IS: 1200 – 2002, part 1)

(c) Site layout and levels:

(d) Method of excavation:

(f) Inspection and measurement:

(g) Filling and backfilling:

(h) Rates to include for excavation items:

(i) Silver sand filling:

(iii) Rates to include:

(iv) Supplying of silver sand.

(v) Filling in layers with adequate consolidation.

(vi) Dressing of surface to required level and slope.

3. Cement concrete works:

(ix) Reinforcement steel:

(xii) Joint materials:

(xv) A competent person approved by Architect/ Engineer-in-charge shall be employed by the

(xx) Sample and tests:

(c) Measurement of materials:

(d) Concrete mixes:

(e) Ready-mixed concrete:

(g) Compaction and vibration:

(h) Defective or poor concrete:

(ii) Honey combing:

(iii) Protection and curing:

(i) Construction joints:

(j) Water bar and water sealer:

(k) Tests for concrete:

Table for frequency of sampling (as per IS: 456 - 2000)

Quantity of Concrete in the Work m3 Number of Samples

Notes: a. At least one sample shall be taken from each shift.

A cube register to be maintained at site by the Contractor.

(vi) The tests shall be as under:

(l) Surface finishes:

(m) Large concrete pours:

(n) Contractor’s rates to include:

(viii) Weigh batching using a mechanical weigh batcher or volumetric batching.

(xi) Form work at all levels.

(o) Mode of measurements of cast-in-citu reinforced and plain concrete:

Sr.no. Form work for Size of form work (thickness/ cross-section)

Cleaning and treatment of forms: